^TUiAT-'Htr^ (JkUc) ^^^l:^!^J^^/^>*^ -t-rt-^i* e^' ^' X WKl-H), PARSONS X CV AMJANV ' ! / ' /P By section fourteen of the " Act to Improve the Discipline and Promote the Efficiency of the Military Forces of the State," passed April 6th, 1858, these " General Regula- tions" are made part of the statutes for the government of the Military Forces. The section is as follows, viz. : " § 14. The Rules and Regulations prepared by a board of officers, under section one of title nine of the Militia Laws, having received the approval of the Commander-in-Chief, are hereby made part of the acts for the government of the Military Forces." ivir?5909 GENERAL HEAD-QUARTERS, ) State of New-York. ) Adjutant-Qexebal's Office, Albany, April Qth, 1858. GENEBAL OKDEKS, ) No. 30. ) The following General Regulations for the Military Forces of the State of New-York having been approved by the Commander-in-Chief, he commands that they be promul- gated, in pursuance of section one of title nine of the Militia Law, passed April 17, 1854; and they are hereby promulgated for the government of all concerned : and he further commands that they be strictly observed, and that nothing contrary to the tenor of these Regulations be enjoined, in any part of the Forces of the State, by any Commander whatsoever. By order of the Commander-in-Chief. FRED'K TOWNSEND, Adjutant- General. I 1858. ) STATE OF NEW-YORK, Albany, March Isf, To His Excellency John A. King, Commander-in-Chief of the Military Forces of the State. Sir, — The Board of Officers constituted by General Orders No. 7, of the 13th of January, 1855, and by orders modify- ing the same, for the purpose of preparing " General Regu- lations" for the government of the Military Forces of the State, respectfully submit for your approval, as the result of their labors, the annexed Regulations. FREDERICK TOWNSEND, Adjutant- General New -York State Militia, II. B. DURYEA, Brig.-Gen'l ComUding 5th Brigade JV. Y. S. M. W. S. FULLERTON, Mojor-GerHl Com^ding 1th Division JV. Y. S. M. Z. T. BENTLEY, Brig.-Gen'l Com' ding 19th Brigade iY. Y. S. M. R. B. VAN VALKENBURGH, ColoTiel Com' ding 60th Regiment N. Y. S. M. GENERAL REGULATIONS MILITA.IIY FORCES STATE OF NEW-YORK. ARTICLE L MILITARY DISCIPLINE. 1. All inferiors are required to obey strictly, and to execute with alacrity and good faith, the lawful orders of the superiors appointed over tnem. 2. Military authority is to be exercised with firmness, but with kindness and justice, to inferiors. Punishments shall be strictly conformable to military law. 3. Superiors of every grade are forbidden to injure those under them by tyrannical or capricious conduct, or by abusive language. ARTICLE II. DUTIES OF THE SOLDIER. 4. The military forces of the state are organized in pursuance of the provisions of the Constitution of the United States and of this state, for the defence of the country and the maintenance of public order. The citizen soldier will remember that it is upon him, when the civil power has failed, that the state relies for the vindication of its laws and institutions, imperiled from whatever cause ; and that in becoming the soldier, he has lost none of the characteristics or duties of the citizen, but has assumed, simply, such further obligations as GENERAL REGULATIONS Precedence of Offlc9r$. imperatively demand of him a conduct which shall inspire the confi- dence and respect of the people. SUBORDINATION TO CIVIL AUTHORITIES 6, Respect and obedience to the civil authorities of the land is the duty of all citizens, and more particularly of those who are armed in the public service. 6. A civil officer, charged with the execution of process, will, on making known his character and business to the commanding officer of any parade or camp, be permitted to pass and repass all guards and sentinels, for the purpose of executing such process, at reason- able times. ARTICLE in. PRECEDENCE AND GRADATION OF OFFICERS AND NON-COM- MISSIONED OFFICERS. 1. The Commander-in- Chief, 8. First Lieutenant. 2. Major-General, 9. Second Lieutenant, 3. Brigadier-General, 10. Sergeant- Major, 4. Colonel, IL Quartermaster Sergeant, 5. Lieutenant-Colonel , 12. First Sergeant, 6. Major, 13. Sergeant, 7. Captoin, 14. Corporal, and in each grade by date of election or appointment. 8. In cases whore commissions of the same grade and date inter- fere, a retrospect is to be had to former commissions in actual service at the time of the appointment, in the assignment and exercise of command, until the rank is determined by lot 9. When a question of rank shall arise under the last section it shall be settled by lot in the presence of the Commanding Officer of the detachment, Company, Battalion, Regiment, Brigade or Division, or of the Commander-in-Chief, as the case may require. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. Beepormbiliiy — Batik and Command. ARTICLE IV. GENERAL RESPONSIBILITY. 10. A system of responsibility, embracing the highest and lowest grades, is essential for the maintenance of good order; and every oflScer is therefore at all times, and under all circumstances, account- able for the enforcement and preservation of the rules and discipline, according to the powers granted him by his commission. 11. The principle of responsibility indicated above will therefore govern the several grades of military persons in their respective duties. For instance, the non-commissioned oflScers of squads will be responsible to the Lieutenants, the Lieutenants to the Captain, and the Captain to the Colonel; as also will the Sergeant or Chief of Band, and the Non-commissioned Staflf, be immediately responsible to the Adjutant, and the Adjutant to the Colonel or Commanding Oflficer. RANK AND COMMAND. 12. Whenever different corps or regiments happen to join or do duty together, the officer highest in rank of the line, present on duty, has the right to command the whole, and give the orders needful to the service. 13. An officer entrusted with the command of a post, detachment, guard or separate force, will not surrender it to another officer, unless regularly relieved, except in case of sickness or inability to perform his duty, when the officer next in rank of the line present, and on duty, will succeed, as a matter of course. 14. A Detachment is a body of troops sent from the main body to perform a particular service, and to be absent for a limited time ; and may be placed under command of an officer assigned for that purpose. 15. A main body is an army, or any body of troops assembled in the field, or garrison of any fortress or post. GENERAL REGULATIONS Bucoettion in Command, 16. No staff commission shall confer command, except as expressly provided for by law, tactics or the regulations. 17. Brevet commissions are simply honorary, and confer no com- mand or precedence whatever. 18. No officer shall lose command by reason of temporary absence from his military district. But in case of emergency, viz : invasion, insurrection, or when ordered to aid the civil authority, the senior officer of the line present, belonging respectively to any Division, Brigade, Regiment or Company, will assume the command thereof, and issue such orders as may be necessary in obedience to orders re- ceived by him, and he will forthwith transmit notice of the orders so received and issued by him to the regular Commandant of the Division, Brigade, Regiment or Company. 19. When orders for encampment, parade or drill are issued, re- quiring immediate action, the same rule shall be followed by all subordinate officers as is above given in respect to orders in case of emergency. 20. In camp and in the field, tho senior officers of the line, actually present and on duty, with the respective Divisions, Brigades, Regi- ments and Companies, shall be in command thereof for all the purposes of duty at such camp or in the field ; but no officer who may come temporarily in command, in pursuance of any of the fore- going provisions, shall perform any duty of such regular com- mandant, not connected with the emergency or required to be performed in the camp or field. ARTICLE V. SUCCESSION IN COMMAND. 21. An officer who succeeds to any command or duty stands in regard to his duties in tlie same situation as his predecessor. The officer relieved shall turn over to his successor all orders in force at tho time, pertaining to his command or duty. Officeis who are pro- FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. Resignation of Officers — Commander'in'Chief and his Staff. moted, or intend to remove from their command, or have leave of absence, shall also deliver all public property and funds in their hands to their respective successors, and shall take a receipt therefor. 22. An officer rendered supernumerary, or vsrho shall have resigned, shall turn over to his successor in command all the public property in his possession, and all other property pertaining to his command, for which he may be responsible to the State, including books, blanks and documents ; and the successor shall give him duplicate receipts for the same, which receipts shall specify the condition of the pro- perty. One of these receipts shall be transmitted to the Adjutant- General, to insure a correct accountability, the other retained by the officer relieved, for his own security. 23. An officer in a temporary command shall not, except in urgent cases, alter or annul the standing orders of the regular or permanent commander without authority from the next higher commander. ARTICLE VL RESIGNATION OF OFFICERS. 24. No officer will be considered out of service, on the tender of his resignation, until it shall have been duly accepted by the proper authority. 25. Resignations shall be forwarded, immediately on their accept- ance, by the officer accepting the same, to the Adjutant-General; and all vacancies occuring in Regiments, Brigades or Divisions shall be immediately reported, to the Adjutant-General, by the officer in command. 26. In time of war, or with an army in the field, resignations shall take effect within thirty days from the date of the order of acceptance. ARTICLE VIL THE COMMANDER-IN-CHIEF AND HIS STAFF. 27. The Commander-in-Chief, being charged by the Constitution of the State with the command of the military forces thereof, will Military. 1* GENERAL REGULATIONS Commanding Offieert — Regiments. have under his supervision the whole military establishment in all its various departments. He will order from time to time such parades, encampments and drills of the military forces, or any part thereof, or of the commissioned officers, as he may deem necessary for improvement, instruction and discipline, or to meet any special exigency of the state. At the encampments and drills of commis- sioned officers, he will appoint such competent persons as instructors, and will require such military service to be performed, as he may seo fit, irrespective of all questions of rank. 28. The Staff of the Commander-in-Chief, and the several Staff Departments, shall rank as follows : 1. Adjutant-General, 6. Surgeon-General, 2. Inspector-General, 7. Quartermaster-General, 8. Commissary-General, 8. Paymaster-General, 4. Engineer-in-Chief, 9. Aids de Camp, 6. Judge Advocate-General, 10. Military Secretary. ARTICLE VIII. COMMANDING OFFICERS. 29. An officer invested with command is responsible for the discipline of the troops under his orders, and for the good condition of everything entrusted to his charge. It is his duty to see that the regulations are strictly enforced, that the necessary arms, equip- ments and ammunition are procured from the Commissary -General, and kept in a ])roper state ; that his command is properly instructed and exercised ; that the required drills, improvement meetings and parades are ordered ; and he will hold himself, and the forces subject to his control, ready at all times for active service, upon the shortest notice. ARTICLE IX. REGIMENTS. 80. The regiment is the unit of organization in the militia; com- panies are simply subdivisions of that unit. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. RegimenU. SI. Unanimity and good understanding amongst the oflScers, as connected with the character and discipline of a regiment, are objects peculiarly deserving the attention of the commanding officer. His timely interference to prevent disputes ; his advice to the young and inexperienced ; his protection of, and favor to the deserving ; and his immediate reprehension of any conduct likely to interrupt the harmony of the corps, are the best means of securing these desirable ends, towards the attainment of which he has a right to demand, and ought to receive, the assistance of every officer. It is well known that perfect civility, and the most conciliatory manners, are com- patible with the exercise of the strictest command ; and it is to be observed, that the commanding officer is equally responsible for the maintenance of discipline and subordination in his regiment, whether on parade, at the mess, or in any other situation. 32. To promote the attainment of a knowledge of parade duties, the commanders of regiments will, at their discretion, but under their own eye, direct the field officers and captains to take command of the parade, without regard to their respective rank. 33. The battalion companies of regiments doing duty as infantry, will be drawn up in line from right to left, as follows : First, fifth, fourth, seventh, third, eighth, sixth, second, according to the rank of their respective captains ; and after the companies once have their positions assigned, they will retain them for all subsequent forma- tions, until a change is directed by the commanding officer. 34. In regiments doing duty as Light Infantry, the order from right to left will be, first, sixth, fourth, ninth, third, eighth, fifth, tenth, seventh, second. If there be nine companies, or a less number, the rule will be the same ; the first and second captains on the right and left, and the third captain with the right centre company. All regiments having more than eight companies doing duty in the same arm, will follow the order prescribed in this paragraph. 35. Flank Companies doing duty in the same arm as the Battalion, will be uniformed and take post, as Battalion companies. But no flank company will be permitted to do duty with the regiment in any GENERAL REGULATIONS Oompaniea — Officers. other arm than that in which it is organized, except by the special order of the Commander-in-Chief. 86. The section of Light Artillery authorized to be attached to a regiment, will consist of one First and one Second Lieutenant, one ordnance sergeant, one first and one second sergeant, two corporals, and not more than twenty-four nor less than fourteen privates. Appli- cations for the organization of sections must be signed by at least eighteen persons liable to military duty in the regimental district ; and must be consented to and approved in the manner required for companies. Ordnance sergeants take grade next before first sergeants. 37. Every article, excepting arms and accoutrements, belonging to the regiment, is to be marked with the number of the regiment. Such articles as belong to companies are to be marked with the letter of the company and number of the regiment ; and such as belong to men, with their individual numbers, and the letter of the company. 88. Sergeant standard bearers, trumpet-major and drum-major of a regiment, rank as first sergeants. ARTICLE X. COMPANIES OFFICERS. 39. Captains or commanders of companies fill one of the most im- portant situations in the service, when they are viewed in relation to the direct influence they exercise upon the soldiery ; to them, there- fore, attaches the high responsibility of the instruction, good order, efficiency, and discipline of their appropriate commands, and no one should bo elected to that office unless well qualified, or willing to qualify himself, for the faithful performance of the duties of the station. 40. It is expected that every Commandant of a company, who has been commissioned one yeor, shall bo capable of commanding and FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. Non-commissioned Offlcer%. exercising his company in every situation, and perfectly acquainted with its interior management and discipline. Commandants of com- panies will be held responsible for the accuracy of the rolls of the uniformed members of their respective companies, and should care- fully correct them before they issue notices for company elections. 41. In case of a vacancy in the office of Captain, or in his absence, the command of the company will devolve on the officer next in rank; and should a company be left without a commissioned officer, while on duty, the Commander of the regiment will order an officer of another company to take the command. Captains will require their Lieutenants to assist them in the performance of all company duties ; the knowledge thus acquired being essential to every company officer. 42. It is the duty of Lieutenants to distribute such orders as the Commanding Officer may direct, and to assist him in making out rolls, reports and returns, in keeping the books of the company, and in all duties pertaining to its welfare. Each Lieutenant will be charged with a squad or squads of the company to which he belongs, for the supervision of order, cleanliness and discipline. NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERS. 43. It is of essential importance to the service that the station and respectability of the non-commissioned officer be upheld ; and that none but judicious and well qualified persons be elected thereto. It is enjoined upon all officers to be cautious in reproving non-commis- sioned officers in the presence or hearing of privates, lest their authority be weakened ; and non-commissioned officers are not to be sent to the guard-room and mixed with privates during confine- ment, but be considered as placed in arrest, except in aggravated cases where escape may be apprehended. 44. In case of neglect of duty, misconduct or inefficiency upon the part of any non-commissioned officer, authority is vested in the Commandant of the regiment to annul his warrant and reduce him to the ranks. 10 GENERAL REGULATIONS CompanU* — Internal Economy — Armt — AccoutremenU, dbe. 45. Uniform companies may, b)' their by-laws, prescribe the length of time for which any or all of their non-commissioned officers are elected. 46. Independent of the particular duties required of non-commis- sioned officers, when in the ranks, according to the systems of tactical instruction, it is also their duty, on parades or in camp, to observe the conduct of the privates, and to report to their immediate Com- mandant every breach of the regulations, or of the orders of the parade or camp. INTERNAL ECONOMY OF COMPANIES. 47. The Captain will cause the men of the company to b«» numbered, in a regular series including the non-commissioned officers, and divided into four squads, each to be put under the charge of a non- commissioned officer. 48. As far as practicable, the men of each squad will be quartered together. 49. The utmost attention will be paid by commanders of companies to the cleanliness of their men, as to their persons, clothing, arms, accoutrements and equipments, and also as to their quarters or tents. 50. In armories, the arms should be placed in arm racks, stoppers in the muzzles, the cocks let down, the bayonets in their scabbards, the accoutrements suspended over the arms, and the swords ( if any) hung by the belts on pegs, and the number of the soldier placed against them. 51. Commanders of companies and squads will see that the arms and accoutrements in possession of the men are kept in good order, and that proper care be taken in cleaning them. 52. Commanders of companies will see that belts are properly fitted to the body ; and it is strictly forbidden to cut them without the sanction of the commander of the company, and then only when FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 11 Companies — Internal Economy — Arms and Accoutrements. it is ascertained to be impossible to make tbera fit properly without. Pipe clay or whiting will be used to clean them, if the belts are white. 53. Cartridge boxes and bayonet scabbards should be polished with blacking — varnish is injurious to the leather. 54. All arms and equipments issued to the troops, when not in use, will be kept in proper armories under the charge of suitable persons, and they will always be placed in condition for immediate use. The barrel of the musket or other fire-arm will constantly be kept clean and free from rust ; great care should be taken in rubbing to prevent bruising or bending the barrel ; it should never be rubbed lengthwise. After firing, it will be necessary to wash out the bore, to wipe it dry, and then to pass a bit of cloth, slightly greased, to the bottom. In these operations a rod of wood, with a loop in one end, is to be used instead of the rammer, which is never to be thus employed when it can be avoided. The bore of the barrel will at all times, except in exercise, be secured against the weather by means of a tompion. A rind of fresh pork, without salt, is better than oil for greasing the metallic parts of the musket. Arms, with per- cussion locks, require to be handled with much care to prevent the hammer ( cock ) from becoming loose, by which its direct fall on the cone (nipple) would be rendered uncertain ; and snapping the piece without a cap upon the cone is prohibited, unless the cone is covered, or otherwise protected. When unloaded, they will at all times be used with the hammer down upon the cone ; but when loaded, and the cap or primer being on the cone, the piece will be carried half-cocked for safety. When there is no cap on the cone, the vent will be closed, with the hammer resting upon it. For exercise each soldier will keep provided a piece of sole leather to fit the cup or countersink of the hammer. 55. Troops having arms with the Maynard lock, will be careful to remove from the magazine of the lock, the primer or tape, when off duty, and replace it in the boxes to be provided for such purpose, to be kept in the cartridge boxes. 12 GENERAL REGULATIONS Companie9 — Internal Economy — AmmuniUon — Ehap$aek$ — Drums, Se. 56. At no time, and under no pretence, are the arms to be left loaded in armories, quarters or tents, or when men are off duty, unless in expectation of an attack ; and no person shall, while on duty, load his gun without orders. 57. No company or regiment, or any part thereof, shall, on any parade or occasion, appear with arms loaded or ball cartridges in their boxes, without permission or orders from the Commandant of their regiment or brigade, except in cases otherwise provided for by law. 58. To carry out the foregoing regulation. Commandants of com- panies, before appearing on parade, are required to cause the arms and accoutrements of their men to be examined, loads to be drawn, and cartridge boxes to be emptied. 59. Ammunition will be frequently exposed to the dry air, or sunned. 60. Ammunition issued to troops will, to prevent waste or injury, be inspected frequently ; each man will be made to pay for the rounds expended without orders, or not in the way of duty, or which may be damaged or lost by his neglect. 61. The greatest precaution is necessary to ascertain that no ball cartridges are mixed with the blank cartridges issued to the men. 62. All knapsacks are to be painted black ; those for the Artillery will be marked in the centre of the cover with the number of the regiment, in figures \% inch in length, of the character called full face, with yellow paint; those for the Infantry and other corps, marked in the same way, with white paint. The knapsack straps will be black. 63. The knapsacks will also bo marked upon the inner side with the letter of the company, and the number of the soldier, on such part as may be readily observed at inspections. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 13 Cbmpanies— Internal Economy — Drums, Dress, Guns, Carriages and Implements. 64. Haversacks will be marked upon the flap with the number of the regiment, the letter of the company and number of the soldier, in black letters and figures. It will be worn on the left side on marches, guard, and when paraded for detached service — the can- teen outside the haversack. 65. The ft-ont of the drums will bo marked with the arms of the state, on a blue field for the Infantry, and on a red field for the Artillery. The letter of the company and number of the regiment, under the arms, in a scroll. 66. The prescribed dress for officers and soldiers will be strictly complied with, and no officer will be justified in making or allowing any alterations therein. 67. Officers, on duty with troops, will wear their proper uniform. 68. Soldiers on duty will wear the prescribed uniform. When on fatigue parties they will wear the proper fatigue dress. 69. When in camp or on parades, if the weather or circumstances should make it necessary for the comfort or health of officers or privates on duty, the Commandant, by special order, may authorize the use of additional clothing. 70. All field-pieces issued to companies or regiments should be kept clean and dry ; their vents frequently examined to see that they are clear ; the elevating screw wiped clean, worked and oiled. When tarpaulins are placed over them, they should occasionally be removed, the guns and carriages brushed off, and, if damp, allowed to dry. 71. An old sponge staff and head should be used for drill. The new sponges should never be used unless the gun is fired. The implements should all be kept under cover, and should be examined and cleaned as often as once a month. The harness and leather articles should be brushed and greased with neaVsfoot oil as often as their condition requires it; if they have a reddish hue, mix a little lamp-black with the oil. First brush the leather carefully, then pass Military. 2 14 GENERAL REGULATIONS JHmihUity and Eitpulsions. over it a sponge wet with lukewarm water, then apply the oil with a soft brush before the leather is quite dry. 72. The ammunition should be frequently examined, and kept dry. Cartridge bags should be kept ready for filling; also port-fires, fuzes, tubes and primers ready for use. 73. In camp or barracks, the company officers must visit the kitchen daily and inspect the kettles, and, at all times, carefully attend to the messing and economy of their respective companies. The commanding officer of the post or regiment will make frequent inspections of the kitchens and messes. 74. On marches, and in the field, the only mess furniture of the soldier will be one tin plate, one tin cup, one knife, fork and spoon to each man, to be carried by himself on the march. 75. Messes will be prepared by privates of squads, including pri- vate musicians, each taking his tour, unless other provision is made for cooking. 76. No persons will be allowed to visit or remain in the kitchens, except such as may come on duty, or be occupied as cooks. ARTICLE XI. DISABILITY AND EXPULSIONS. 77. Whenever any non-commissioned officer, musician or private shall become incapable of performing his duties, in consequence of disease or infirmity, and shall so continue for the space of one yen or whenever the surgeon of any regiment shall furnish the Coni- mandant thereof with a certificate of the permanent disability of such person to perform military duty, the Commandant of such regiment may give to said non-commissioned officer, musician or l)rivate a discharge from further service in the company, and upon presenting the same to the commandant thereof, his name shall be stricken from the rolls. 78. For violation of the by-laws of any uniformed company, any nou-commissioued officer, musician or private, by a vote of the coiU' FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 16 Absence. pany, may be expelled therefrom ; and, upon the action of the company being confirmed in orders by the Commandant of the regi- ment, the name of such person shall be stricken from the roll of such company. (See Title 5, Art. 1, §32, Militia Law, passed 1854. ) 79. Commandants of companies shall report immediately to the Commandant of the regiment the action of the company in relation to expulsions, for his approval or disapproval. ARTICLE XII. ABSENCE. 80. The Commander-in-Chief and the Commandants of Brigades may grant leave of absence to commissioned officers in the cases herein prescribed; and every officer who shall be absent from his command twelve months, without leave of the commanding officer of his brigade, shall be considered as having vacated his office, and a new election shall be held, without delay, to fill the vacancy so created. [ Title 2d, § 38, Militia Law of 1854. ] 81. Commandants of Brigades may grant leave of absence for four months beyond the time contemplated by the foregoing regulation, but in no case will such leave be granted when a regimental district shall be left without a commissioned field officer in command. 82. When an officer shall design to be continuously absent from his command for the period of four months, or longer, at any one time, he shall apply for leave of absence to the Commander-in-Chief, if he be a general officer, or upon the staff of the Commander-in- Chief, or the staff of a division ; and if he be not, then to the com- mandant of his brigade. If such application be granted, and the person so applying is a commanding officer, the officer next in rank entitled to such command shall be placed in command ; and all orders shall thenceforth be issued to and by the officer so placed in tempo- 16 GENERAL REGULATIONS Abtenee — Sptcifled Duty — FurlougTu rary command, until the officer absent shall report himself for duty. 83. No such leave will be granted, unless the Commandant of the regiment, if the applicant be a field or company officer, shall consent tliereto ; and in the case of subaltern officers, the Commandant of the company, and the officer next in rank below the officer who may obtain such leave, must be forthwith notified thereof by the officer granting such leave. 84. In no case will leaves of absence be granted, so that a company be left without one of its commissioned officers, or that a gan-isoned post or camp be left without two commissioned officers and compe- tent medical attendance ; nor shall leave of absence be granted to an officer during the season of active operations, except on urgent necessity. 85. Whenever an officer on duty is detached for the performance of a specified duty, that service being performed, he will return to his previous station, unless otherwise directed, and report immediately to the Commanding Officer. FURLOUGHS. 86. Every Colonel or other officer commanding a regiment, may give furloughs to non-commissioned officers, musicians and privates, in such numbers and for so long a time as he may deem proper, but the Commanding Officer of the force may prohibit the granting of furloughs. 87. Soldiei*s on furlough will not be permitted to take tlicir arms or accoutrements. 88. If a soldier fail to rejoin his regiment, company or troop on the expiration of his furlough, and no satisfactory reason be rendered for his continued absence, he shall be returned for disobedience of orders, and in case of war , as a deserter, and proceeded against accordingly. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 17 Form of Furlough — Chaplains — Religious Services. FORM OF FURLOUGH. Head-Quarters, 1 • 18 . ) ( , ) of Company ( — ), Captain ( ) ( ) Regiment, has leave of absence from the ( ) day of ( instant^ at o'clock^ A. M.,) until the ( day of instant, at — o'clock P. M. ), he having received a furlough for that time; at which last period he will rejoin his company, and report himself to these head-quarters. Signature of officer ) giving furlough. ) . ARTICLE XIII. CHAPLAINS, 89. The rank of Chaplain in a regiment shall be that of Captain. 90. When required he will visit the sick, in hospital or in quarters, in order to afford religious advice and instruction ; also to perform such other duties of his office as may be imposed upon him by his Commanding Officer. 91. Officers in command of camps are recommended to provide for the religious duties of the Sabbath, by holding services upon that day, and if no Chaplain be present, by attending with their officers and men on divine worship, whenever a neighboring church or reli- gious congregation may offer a proper opportunity ; but no officer or private shall be compelled to attend upon any place of worship con- trary to his conscientious scruples. 92. The men are to attend service with their side arms, and they are to be marched with the utmost regularity to and from the church or place where service is performed, without music. Military. 2* 18 GENERAL REGULATIONS Sutlers — IHscharffm — Arregt9 and Oovjlnementa. SUTLERS. 93. Sutlers shall be appointed and may be removed by the Com- mandants of regiments and camps. 94. Officers in command of camps or posts will make all necessary orders for the regulation and control of Sutlers ; and no Sutler, or any other person acting for him, shall be permitted to bring any spiritous liquor, cards or gaming materials within any camp grounds. ARTICLE XIV. DISCHARGES. 95. The Commanding Officers of regiments will grant all discharges authorized by law to non-commissioned officers, musicians and pri- vates, on the presentation of a certificate of the Commanding Officer of the company to which they belong, showing them to be entitled to such discharge. 96. All discharges of commissioned officers, with a view to their exemption, under the law, from military service, will be granted by the Commander-in-Chief, who will furnish certificates thereof, upon such returns, to the Adjutant-General's office, by the Commandants of divisions and brigades, as will show such officers entitled to a discharge. 97. The Adjutant-General will provide and furnish to Command- ants of divisions, brigades, regiments and companies, all necessary blanks for returns and certificates under this article. ARTICLE XV. ARRESTS AND CONFINEMENTS. 98. All officers have power to part and quell quarrels, frays and disorders, though the persons concerned should belong to another regiment, troop or company; and either to order officers into arrest, or non-commissioned officers, or musicians and privates into con- flucment, and immediately acquaint their proper superior offiv^ers FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 19 Arrests and Confineinenta. thereof; and whosoever shall refuse to obey such officer (though of an inferior rank), or shall draw his sword upon him, shall be amena- ble to trial by court martial. 99. An arrest is the suspension of the military functions of an officer, non-commissioned officer, musician or private, by the direction of some officer having authority to order such arrest. 100. A formal arrest is made by communicating to the person arrested the order of the officer directing the arrest. 101. A forcible arrest is only warranted when necessary to place the person arrested under guard or in confinement, as authorized by law. 102. None but Commanding Officers have power to place officers under arrest, except for offences expressly designated in the first sec- tion of this article. 103. Officers will not be put in arrest for light offences. For these, the censure of the Commanding Officer will, in most cases, answer the purposes of discipline. 104. Any person under guard or in confinement may have such limits assigned him as his Commanding Officer shall direct. Close confinement will not be resorted to unless under aggravated circum- stances. 105. In ordinary cases, where inconvenience to the service would result from it, a Medical Officer will not be put in arrest until the court martial for his trial convenes. 106. The arrest of an officer, or confinement of a soldier, will, as soon as practicable, be notified to his immediate Commander. 107. All prisoners under guard, without written charges, will be released by the officer of the day, at guard-mounting, unless orders to the contrary be given by the Commanding Officer. 108. On a march, company officers and non-commissioned officers in arrest, when present, will follow in the rear of their respective com- 20 GENERAL REGULATIONS Courts Martial. panics, unless otherwise particularly ordered. Field Officers, com- missioned and non-commissioned Staff Officers, under the same cir- cumstances, will follow in the rear of their respective regiments. 109. An officer under arrest will not wear a sword, or visit officially his Commanding or other superior officer, unless sent for ; and ia case of business, he will make known his object in writing. 110. Individuals placed under arrest may be released, without being brought before a court martial, by the authority ordering the arrest, or by superior authority. ARTICLE XVI. OF COURTS MARTIAL FOR TfTE TRIAL OF COMMISSIONED OFFICERS. 111. The officer empowered to order a court martial, and wishing to do so, will issue an order, directing that a court martial shall as- semble at a certain time and place, specifying the names of the members of the court and the object for which it is organized. 112. A copy of such order, and a copy of the charges and si)ecifi- cations, shall in all cases be served on the officer accused, either per- sonally, or by leaving the same with some person of suitable age and discretion at his place of business or abode, at least ten days before the day named in such order for the convening of the court. 113. "No officer arrested shall be brought to trial, unless a copy of the cliarges and specifications, certified by the officer ordering the arrest, shall be delivered to him or left at his usual place of abode within three days after his arrest ; nor, unless the officer orderinsz such court martial shall have ordered the same within thirty days after receiving notice of the arrest and a copy of the charges and specifications ; nor until ten days after a copy of a list of the names of the officers detailed to form the court shall have been delivered to the officer arrested or left at his usual place of abode." [Militia Laws of April 17, 1954, tit. 7, art. 1, § 6. ] FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 21 Courts Martial. 114. It shall not be necessary to designate the President of the court io the order; and in case the President is not designated in the order, the highest in rank has the right to preside. In case the President is named in the order, and he shall be challenged and set aside or otherwise prevented from attending, the court can- not proceed until the officer ordering the court designate another officer to supply the vacancy. 115. " If the officer accused shall have .any cause of challenge to any member of such court, he shall, within a reasonable time after receiving a copy of the charges and a list of the members, deliver his cause of challenge, in writing, to the officer ordering such court, ■who shall, thereupon, determine as to the validity of such challenge • and if, in his opinion, the causes are sufficient, he shall appoint another member of such court." [ Militia Laws of April IT, 1854, tit. 7, art. 1, § S. ] 116. Such challenges shall be submitted on proofs, which may be affidavits, duly sworn to, before any officer authorized to administer judicial oaths, or the oral testimony of witnesses sworn before the officer trying such challenges. No challenge to the President of a court martial can be made, except to the officer ordering the court. The causes of such challenges will be the same as are herein provided in cases of other challenges. 117. At the place and on the day appointed, the members of the court will assemble ; but they cannot proceed to any business except to adjourn, unless the Judge Advocate be present. If the Judge Advocate does not appear, the President of the court may appoint a special Judge Advocate. Each of the members will then report to the Judge Advocate the date of his commission and his office, who will prepare a roster, according to rank, previous to calling the several members for organization. 118. The Judge Advocate will then read aloud the order for hold- ing the court ; he will also call over the names of the members, com- 22 GENERAL REGULATIONS GourU Martial. mencing witli the President and descending to the youngest, and the members will take their scats according to rank on the right and left of the President. The Judge Advocate will take his seat opposite the President. Staff rank, when actually held, will be as available as lineal rank in military courts. 119. The Judge Advocate will then call the prosecutor, if there be one, who will take his station on the left ; and the accused, who will take his station on the right of the Judge Advocate ; who will then, standing up, read again the order for assembling the court, and administer the oath prescribed by law to the President, who cannot at this stage of the proceedings be challenged. 120. If the number of members present be below the minimum prescribed by law, they can do no business except to adjourn from time to time to await the arrival of absent members, or to com- municate the fact to the officer ordering the court, in order that their places may be filled. 121. The President will appoint, under his hand and seal, a Mar- shal ; and when all, or a sufficient number of members are present at the calling of the roll of their names by the Judge Advocate, they may at once proceed to organize for business. 122. Accommodation should be afforded for the accuser and the accused; also, for any friend or legal adviser of the accused or prosecutor, the benefit of whose assistance they may respectively desire during the trial. But the Judge Advocate and the accused only, will bo permitted to address the court ; it being an admitted maxim in military courts, that counsel are not to interfere in the pro- ceedings, or to offer any remarks, or to discuss or argue any question. 123. The Judge Advocate will then demand of the accused wh^her he has any exceptions or cause of challenge against any of the members present, other than the President, not known to him in time to deliver them to the officer ordering the court, as required by law ; and if ho has, ho is required to state the cause of such challenge, confining the same to one member at a time. Peremptory challenges FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 23 Court* Martial. are not allowed at a court martial ; the party must, therefore, assign his cause of challenge, which is to be regularly entered on the pro- ceedings. 124. The accused may also object, at this stage of the proceedings, to the authority of the court, for any cause, to proceed to trial. And all he will be deemed to admit, by not objecting, is, that the court is a legal court. The privilege of challenges extends to the accused, to the prosecutor and to the Judge Advocate. 125. Sufficient causes of challenge are : 1 . Having expressed or formed an opinion as to the guilt or in- nocence of the accused ; 2. Having been a member of a court which gave an opinion in the case ; or, of another court martial in which the subject-matter was investigated and decided ; 3. Prejudice, malice or any like cause, which would disqualify a juror in a civil case. And when a member of the court is challenged, the court shall be cleared, and the member challenged will retire, and the court will determine the challenge. 126. When the facts constituting the cause of challenge are not admitted by the opposite party, the same shall be established by proof; and the members of the court only, who are not challenged, shall participate in the trial and decision of the challenge. 127. In all cases where the vote is equally divided on a challenge, the decision shall be deemed to be in favor of the party challenging. 128. If, in consequence of challenges, the court shall be reduced below the legal number, all further proceedings in the case must be suspended, and the matter reported to the officer ordering the court ; who may order a new court, or designate additional members of the same court ; in which case the trial will be recommenced, allowing the like privilege of challenge to any such new court or additional member. 24 GENERAL REGULATIONS Oourt$ Martial. 129. " After the court shall be assembled, and after all challengiBS, if any are made, shall have been determined, the Judge Advocate, whether commissioned or special, shall administer to each member the following oath : * You, , do swear that you will faithfully discharge the duties of a member of a court martial now assembled, according to the best of your ability.' " [Militia Laws of April 17, 1S54, tit. T, art. 1, § 9.] 130. After the members of the court have been sworn by the Judge Advocate, the President of the court shall administer the like oath to the Judge Advocate, if he has been specially appointed as such. 1-81. The court being thus regularly constituted, the President will order the Marshal to open the court, which may be done by procla- mation, as follows: Hear ye ! Hear ye ! Hear ye ! All persons having any business to do before this court martial, here assembled, lot them draw near, give their attention and they shall be heard. Subsequent adjournments may be proclaimed in the following form : Hear ye! Hear ye! Hear yo! All persons having any further business before this court martial, here assembled, let them depart hence and return to-morrow, at o'clock, noon, to which time the court stands adjourned. 132. Applications to put off or to suspend the trial may he urged before a court martial at any time subsequent to swearing its mem- bers. But all applications to delay the assembling of a court martial, ft-om the absence or indisposition of a witness, the illness of the parties, or other cause, must be made to the authority ordering the court. 183. The court will always sit with open doors, except while deliberating, when the President will order the court to be cleared for deliberation, or for any incidental discussion, at the instance of any member or the Judge Advocate. 184. After a court martial has once assembled, it sits in pursuance of law ; and neither the Commander-in-Chief nor the authority by FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 25 Courts Martial. ■which it was convened can in any manner interfere with its proceed- ings. The court exists until it be dissolved by the authority which appointed it, or a higher authority, after its decision shall have been approved or disapproved by the officer ordering it. But should the court deem it proper to refer to the officer ordering the court, for instructions, any reply which he may make, or any consideration which he may think proper to lay before the court, in answer to this reference, will always be entitled to a respectful con- sideration, though it is in no way incumbent on the court to be gov- erned thereby. 1 35. The organization of the court being completed, by all tho members taking the oath required, the Judge Advocate will then proceed to read the charges and specifications ; and to ask the accused, separately, on each charge and specification, if he be guilty or not guilty of the charge ( or specification ) just read, 136. The charges must state clearly and distinctly some military offence, of which the accused is alleged to be guilty, so that he may know precisely the offence of which he is accused. 137. The specifications to the charge must allege certain specified acts done by the accused, which are supposed to constitute tho general offence named in the charge. 138. Both charges and specifications must be so distinctly alleged that neither the accused nor the court can have any difficulty in knowing what is the precise object of the investigation. 139. After the charges and specifications have been approved by the proper authority, and ordered to be investigated, neither the Judge Advocate nor any other person is competent to change them, except in the case of a plea in abatement, without the consent of such authority. 140. All charges shall be preferred in the name of the People of the State of New- York, and may be made : 1. On the relation of a Commissioned Officer; Military. 3 2G GENERAL REGULATIONS Oimrt$ Martial. 2. On the report of a Court of Inquiry ; 3. On the official return or report of an Inspecting Officer or officei of the Adjutant-General's department. Where, on the relation of an officer, the caption of the charges shall contain the name and office of the relator, who shall be considered as the prosecutor. 141. Charges, when made by a Commissioned Officer, shall be sub- scribed by him ; and when made on the report of a court or officer, or other official return, they shall be subscribed by the Judge Advo- cate. And all copies of charges, served on the accused, shall be certified by the officer ordering the arrest, 142. The accused must be properly described in the charges by his name and office; stating the division, brigade and regiment to' which he belongs. 143. The specifications must always charge the accused by name, and tlie addition of his office, held at the time of the alleged offence, with having at such a time, and at such a place, done certain acta which amount, or are alleged to amount, to the offence stated in the charge. 144. Time and place must be stated in each specification ; but if a doubt exist as to the precise time and place, it may be set forth that the fact occurred on or about such a time, and at or near such a place. The court will then judge what latitude of time and place may bo covered by this form of expression ; and when the offence charged consists of language used, the precise words should be stated. 145. Officers and soldiers will be held amenable to the military law and tribunals for offences committed by them while on duty, whether in uniform or not ; and they will be deemed to be on duty during the performance of any service which may be lawfully required of them, and while going to and returning from the performance of such service. 14G. Commissioned officers will also be amenable to the military courts upon charges for unofficcr-like conduct, when such conduct FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 27 Courts MariiaU has reference to, or connection with the military duties, in the dis- charge of which the accused, or the accuser may be, or may have been,engaged. 147. Militai-y courts will also exercise jurisdiction, upon the pro- per charges, of unofficer-like conduct or disrespect to a superior officer, when the offence is committed by an officer while wearing his uniform or any part of it, though he may not be on duty. 148. No person shall be liable to be tried and punished by a court martial for any offence which shall appear to have been committed more than two years before the issuing of the order for such trial j unless the person, by reason of having absented himself from the state, or some other impediment, shall not have been amenable to justice within that period. 149. Where an officer, in commission, shall be proceeded against for an offence committed within two years before the commencement of the proceedings, a discharge or resignation, subsequent to the committing of such offence, shall not bar such proceedings. 150. When the charges and specifications are read to the accused, by the Judge Advocate, and he is asked whether he be guilty or not guilty, the accused must plead thereto, either: 1. Guilty; or, 2. To the jurisdiction ; by alleging that the offence with which he is charged is not, by law, cognizable by the court ; or, that he is not subject by law to be tried by a court martial ; or, 3. In abatement ; for misnomer, or a wrong or false addition to his name; in which case he is bound to state what his real name or addition is, and the court may then amend the charges and specifica- tions to meet the objection, and proceed to the trial ; or, 4. In bar; a former trial, and acquittal or conviction, for the same offence before a military court having competent jurisdiction ; or any other plea assigning sufficient reason why he ought not to answer or be put on his trial ; or, 28 GENERAL REGULATIONS Covrts Martial. 5. He may demur; by pleading that if the facts stated in the specification were true, they would not amount, as stated, to the oflfeuce charged; or, 6. He may plead not guilty. 151. fn case the charges which have been served upon the accused are altered, a certified copy of them, as so altered, shall be served upon the accused ten days before the day of trial, by direction of the oflScer ordering the court, except as provided in paragraph 150. 152. The accused cannot plead in bar that he has not been furnished with a correct copy of the charges and specifications ; but in such case the court will adjourn, so as to admit of proper service. 153. There need not be any special form in making these pleas. When a plea other than guilty or not guilty, is pleaded, it shall be suflicient for the accused to state verbally, or in writing, that he objects to being tried on such a charge or such a specification, for such and such reasons, and that he, therefore, requests the court to dismiss the same at once. The plea of guilty or not guilty may be to the whole or any part of any charge or specification. 154. The accused may, in all cases, introduce evidence to support his preliminary pleas; so, also, may the Judge Advocate, in like manner, rebut the allegations of the pleas. 155. When iho specifications do not amount to any offence cog- nizable by a military court, the accused may either take advantage of it by a demurrer, or by a plea to the jurisdiction, or under tho plea of not guilty. 156. Though the accused may have made any or all of the pre- liminary pleas, he is yet at liberty, if they be not sustained by tho court, or after a plea of abatement, if the charges be amended, to plead not guilty. 157. If, fVom obstinacy or design, the accused docs not answer at all, or answers foreign to the purpose, he will be regarded as standing FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 29 Courts Martial. mute ; and, in all such cases, and also whenever the accused neglects or refuses to appear for trial, the court will proceed to trial and judgment as if he had regularly pleaded not guilty. 158. If the accused plead guilty to all the charges and specifica- tions, the court will proceed to determine what punishment shall bo awarded, and pronounce sentence thereon accordingly. But, on motion of the accused, they may examine witnesses to ascertain more fully the nature of the offence, before passing sentence. If he plead guilty to only a part of the charges or specifications, the court will proceed with the trial upon the residue, and reserve the sentence until the trial is finally closed. 159. When the accused pleads not guilty, and the trial is ready to proceed, the witnesses should be ordered out of court, and the Judge Advocate then opens the case by making a general statement to the court, previous to the examination of witnesses, of the facts which he intends to prove, and the order in which he intends to prove them. 160. After the Judge Advocate has opened the case of the prose- cution, and previous to the examination of any witnesses, the accused shall be permitted, if he desire it, to make to the court a statement of his theory of the case, and of what he expects to be able to prove, and what he will insist upon as repelling the charges and specifica- tions, or as constituting his defence. 161. Reference is made to art. 4, tit, 7, of Militia Laws, passed April 17, 1864, where the manner of enforcing the attendance of wit- nesses and swearing them will be found. 162. A witness may not only be subpoenaed to appear, but also to bring with him any documents in his possession or under his control ; and any person present in court may be required to give evidence, though not previously summoned. It shall be the duty of all mili- tary ofllcers to obey all subpoenas issued by a court martial, when duly served on them ; and the refusal to do so, without suflScient reason, will be treated as a military offence. Military. 3* 30 GENERAL REGULATIONS Cowte Martial. 163. It shall be the right of either party to insist that all witnesses, except the one under examination, shall leave the court during such examination ; and if either party apply for such an order, it will not be competent for the court to refuse it. No person who has been present at the examination of a witness, shall, himself, be afterwards examined as a witness, unless by special order of the court. 164. It is also a matter of right for either party to have a witness out of court, while a discussion of a legal question is going on as to his testimony ; and either party is allowed to take exceptions to the competency of a witness ; but these must be stated in open court and recorded in the proceedings, after which the court will decide on their validity. 165. The President must administer the oath to the witnesses, and it will be in the following form, if on the Gospels : " You do solemnly swear, in the presence of Almighty God, that," &c. If with uplifted hand: " You solemnly swear, by the ever-living God, that" &c. If the witness affirms : " You do solemnly, sincerely and truly declare and affirm, that the evidence you shall give in the case now in hearing, between the People of the State of New- York and the accused now on trial, shall be the truth, the whole truth and nothing but the truth. So help you God." 166. When a witness has been sworn, he will be examined in chief by the party calling him ; and upon such examination leading ques- tions will not be allowed to be put to him. 167. Before a court martial, all questions to a witness must bo proposed in writing, and recorded by the Judge Advocate, before being propounded to the witness ; and when recorded, they cannot be erased. If objected to, the objection must be recorded, and after hearing any pertinent remarks from the objector, and ft-om the party putting the question, the court should be cleared for deliberation, with closed doors, its decision recorded, and the court reopened, the decision made known to the parties, and the trial proceeded with. FOR THE MILITAEY FORCES. 31 Courts Martial. 168. The examination of witnesses must, invariably, be in the presence of each member of the court. The appearance and manner of a witness add to or take away from the weight of his testimony ; and all evidence whatever should be recorded in the proceedings, in the order in which it is received by the court. 169. When a witness, examined in chief, by his conduct shows himself decidedly adverse to the party calling him, it will be in the discretion of the court to allow him to be examined as if he w^ere on cross-examination. 170. The prosecution having closed the examination of a wit- ness, the accused has the right to cross-examine him, or he may, by the custom of courts martial, defer his cross-examination until all the prosecutor's witnesses have been examined. The cross- examination need not be confined to matters alleged in the accusation, or to matters already stated in the evidence on behalf of the prosecu- tion. If the cross-examination of the witness is deferred by the accused, he shall himself produce the witness for cross-examination, and in case he shall fail to do so, or to cross-examine him when pro- duced, he shall be deemed to have waived the cross-examination. 171. Leading questions will be allowed on a cross-examination, in which greater latitude will be given to parties than in the original examination. The form of the cross-examination, however, should depend, in some degree, like that of an examination in chief, upon the bias and disposition evinced by the witness under examination ; and leading questions should not be put to a witness clearly in the interest of the party cross-examining him. 172. Questions will not be allowed to be put, as to any distinct collateral fact, for the purpose of discrediting the witness, by calling other testimony to contradict him ; nor should it be assumed that the witness has made statements in chief, which he has not made ; nor should questions be put which assume a fact not in proof, excepting where the opinion of the witness is competent evidence. 32 GENERAL REGULATIONS Oourt« Martial. 173. After the accused has closed his cross-examination, the prose- cutor may reexamine the witness; but this rel^xamination must be strictly and rigidly confined to new matter elicited by the cross- examination, unless by special permission of the court. 174. If a party examine a witness as to anything which may have been said by the adverse party, such adverse party shall have the right to call out all that was said by him in the same conversation ; provided, only, that it relate to the subject matter of the trial. 175. The party calling a witness will not be allowed to give general evidence that he is not to be believed under oath ; but may prove the facts by other witnesses, notwithstanding the contrary statements of any witness whom he may have called. 176. Courts martial should be cautious in receiving evidence as to opinion, exce[)t where matters of skill and judgment are involved ; then, witnesses conversant with a particular trade or profession, and scientific persona, may give their opinion on matters of their profes- sion or trade. In all other cases the witness should only speak of facts within his own knowledge. 177. Documentary evidence, before it can be received, must be duly authenticated, or proved to be genuine, unless admitted to be so. 178. A witness may refer to a memorandum, in order to refresh his memory ; and if he can then speak to the facts from recollection of them, his testimony as to such facts shall be received. 179. A witness cannot be compelled to answer any question which has a tendency to expose him to any criminal prosecution. In such case, the witness must be allowed to judge for himself, and if he says on oath that he cannot answer without criminating himself, he should not be compelled to answer. 180. Military courts, will take notice of all laws and published rules and regulations established by the Commander-in-Chief, without the same being otherwise proved; and are governed in their pro- ceedings, first, by the written military laws and regulations, and next FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 33 Cmirts Martial. by the customs of war. They will, therefore, disregard any dis- cordant or unsuitable axioms or rules of civil courts, but will con- form to the rules of evidence obtaining in such courts. 181. After all the evidence on the part of the prosecution has been produced, the accused will enter upon his defence. If he desire it, a reasonable delay will be allowed him to arrange and prepare his case. Ho may, if he choose, before calling his witnesses, make a general statement to the court of the evidence he proposes to ofFer and its bearing upon the case. In his defence he need not confine himself to rebutting the evidence on the part of the prosecution ; he may produce in evidence any matter whatsoever which tends to exculpate himself or palliate his conduct. 182. In case the accused has introduced new matter in his defence, the prosecution may call witnesses to disprove or rebut the same. 183. Before any witness leaves the court, the record of his testimony should be read over to him, so that, if erroneous, he may correct or explain the same ; but no erasure or obliteration will be admitted. Any remarks or explanation must be entered in the proceedings, in addition thereto; when the same is complete, the witness should sign it. 184. Should the accused, having closed his cross-examination, think proper subsequently to recall a witness for the prosecution in his defence, the examination will be held to be in chief, and the witness subject to cross-examination by the prosecution. 185. The parties having closed the evidence in the case, if the accused has called witnesses in his defence, the Judge Advocate will have a right to address the court, and to recapitulate and methodize the evidence and strengthen the case by argument, or show the weak- ness or insufficiency of the defence. 186. To this address, on the part of the prosecution, the court will permit the accused to reply. And the court is also bound to hear whatever address, in his defence, the accused may think fit to offer, 84 GENERAL REGULATIONS Courts Martial. not being in itself contemptuous or disrespectful. And the court may also permit the Judge Advocate to rejoin. 187. If the accuser be not an officer, he cannot appear in court as a prosecutor, but merely as an informant; and, in that case, the Judge Advocate alone conducts the prosecution ; the informant being allowed merely to be present as an assistant, but not allowed to pro- pose any questions or make any observations whatever. He may, however, make suggestions to the Judge Advocate ; and when he is a witness, he must first be examined, or else excluded from the court until called to testify. 188. The closing address of the accused shall be in writing, and if he find himself unequal to the task of reading his address to the court, from any cause, the Judge Advocate or any friend of the ac- cused, named by him, may be allowed to read it for him. 189. The court will be particularly guarded in adhering to the custom which obtains, of resisting any attempt on the part of counsel to address them. A lawyer, as such, is not recognized by a court martial, though his presence may be tolerated as a friend of the accused, to assist him by advice in preparing questions for witnesses, in taking notes and shaping his defence. 190. The Judge Advocate and the accused having laid their case before the court, the accused, the prosecutor and the witnesses will be dismissed and the court closed. The court then proceeds to make up their finding. Each specifica- tion must bo separately considered and each allegation qxhaustedt and the court must declare how far each is proved. 191. The Judge Advocate at this stage of the proceedings will simply act as register, and to advise the court on legal points when tiis opinion is required. He must carefully abstain from making any remark by which his judgment, as to the guilt or innocence, may be remark by which his judgment, as to the guilt or innocence of the accused, may be ascertained. 1 02. Military tribunals must uphold dtsnph'ne at all hazards. They will, however, always justify the disobedience of an order which is FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 35 Courts Martial. dearly shown to he illegal ; and, also, will severely punish him who issues an order contrary to law ; but will never inflict disgrace on the subordinate who obeys it, unless it be evident that the accused well knew that, in conforming to it, he was violating law. 193. In a charge of disobedience of orders, it is requisite to show that the communication was an order from a superior to an inferior, in terms sufficiently explicit to disclose the intention of such superior that the inferior should, or not, do some certain act. 194. In a charge of violence, &c,, against a superior on duty, it is requisite to show that the accused is to be presumed to have known the other party to be his superior ; either by his uniform, knowledge of his person, or in some other manner. 195. When there are distinct and separate charges, the members of the court will deliberate separately on each charge and specifica- tion ; discussing, in free and open conversation, the import of the evidence, and allowing its full weight to every argument or presump- tion in favor of the accused. 196. The question of the guilt or innocence of the accused should be put by the Judge Advocate to the members of the court, com- mencing with the youngest : " From the evidence given for and against the accused, and from what he has said in his defence, are you of the opinion that he is guilty or not guilty of the charge ( or specification ) preferred against him V 197. If a majority of the members are for a conviction, the Judge Advocate will enter the decision of the court, finding the accused guilty of the charge ( or specification ), or of such part of the charge ( or specification ) as the court shall find him guilty. If a majority of the members are for acquittal, he will enter the decision ac- cordingly. If the votes are divided equally, the accused will be acquitted. 198. The finding of the court need not be a general finding of guilt or acquittal. The accused may be found guilty of some portions of the charge and acquitted upon others. A portion of a specificatiou 36 GENERAL REGULATIONS Courts Martial. may be found and the rest negatived ; or, the entire circumstances set forth may be found to be proved, and yet the accused be declared to be without guilt. So also the finding may be special in regard to the facts ; and the court may pass upon the motive with which an act was done, and find or negative criminality in such motive. 199. If the court should find the accused guilty upon a specification or part of a specification under a charge, while they acquit him of the whole charge, the accused should be acquitted. But where the ofience named in the charge admits of lesser degrees of criminality, the court may find the specification to amount only to one of the lesser degrees of the same crime ; and if the court convict the accused upon the spe- cification, or so much of it as relates to such lesser ofience and of the charge, or so much of it as embraces the lesser degree of the crime charged, the conviction will be proper. This will not, however*, au- thorize the finding a higher oflTence than is charged ; and the court will well define the degi-ee of guilt of which the accused is convicted, whether it relate to the whole or a part of the charges, and state distinctly of what he is found guilty and of what acquitted. 200. If the court shall be of opinion that the accused is not guilty of the offence charged, it may acquit the accused, and such acquittal may be a simple finding of not guilty ; or the court may acquit him fully, or fulhj &nd honorably ; though the word "honorably" should never be used in acquiting the accused of charges in which his honor was not implicated. 201. If the court shall find the accused guilty of any or all the charges preferred against him, the Judge Advocate will proceed to take the opinion of the members on the punishment to be awarded, by putting to each member, beginning with the youngest, this ques- tion : ** The court having found the accused guilty of such an offence, in your opinion what punishment ought to be awarded 1" Each member of the court will stato the sentence which he thinks should bo given. 202. If a majority of tne court have concurred in the same sen- tence, that is then recorded as the sentence of the court. If not, the FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 37 Courts Martial mildest of the sentences proposed will be first considered and put to the vote, and, if not adopted, then the next mildest, and so on until one is found which unites a majority of the votes. 203. If the same identical act is alleged against the accused, under several distinct charges or specifications, as constituting as many separate offences, the court shall be careful to inflict only one penalty upon the accused, in case of his conviction, and the sentence of the court should in all cases conform as nearly as may be to the language of the statute provided in such cases. 204. An officer convicted of having signed a false certificate rela- tive to the absence or pay of either officer or soldier, should be sentenced to be cashiered, and disqualified from holding any military office. An officer convicted of making a false return of the state of the forces under his command, or of the arms, ammunition or stores thereto belonging, should be sentenced to be cashiered, and disquali- fied from holding any military office. An officer convicted of having embezzled or wilfully misapplied any public money with which he may have been entrusted for any purpose, should be sentenced to be cashiered, and disqualified from holding any military office, and fined in a sum not exceeding one hundred dollars ; and where such misapplication is not found to bo wilful, he should be sentenced to pay a fine not exceeding one hun- dred dollars, Au officer convicted of being found drunk on duty should be sentenced to be cashiered. 205. For other offences, the court may inflict any punishment not cruel or unusual, which may seem required by the nature of the case tried and authorized by law ; and whenever a specific punish- ment is imposed by law for any offence, the court will have a care to conform to such provision of law. 206. Cashiering is the depriving an officer of his commission, breaking him of his office, and taking from him his military character. Military. 4 38 GENERAL REGULATIONS Oin*rtt Martial 207. Dismissal is a disgraceful discharge, depriving the officer of his military character. 208. Discharging an officer is another mode of depriving an officer of his military character, but the same ideas of disgrace do not attach to his sentence as cashiering or dismissal. 209. Suspension from rank and pay, for a specified time, deprives an officer of his military character, and suspends his functions and pay for a definite time, during which time he cannot rise by seniority. 210. Suspension from command leaves an officer in the full enjoy- ment of all rights and eligibility, depending on rank, excepting that he can exercise no military command whatever during the suspension. 211. Reprimand. The court may sentence an officer to be publicly reprimanded (which is done in orders), or to be privately repri- manded, which is done by the Commanding Officer, without the presence of witnesses. 212. Admonition. In some instances of trivial faults, courts mar- tial may sentence officers to be admonished, or to be privately admonished. 213. The court may combine any of these punishments, which are not inconsistent with one another or contrary to law, in their sentence. 214. " The sentence of any such court martial shall be according to the nature and degree of the offijnce, and according to military usage ; but shall not extend farther than cashiering the officer con- victed, and disqualifying him from holding any office in the Militia of this state, and imposing a fine not exceeding one hundred doUai'S." [Militia Laws of April 17, 1S54, Ul. 7, arU 1, $ 11. ] 215. The sentence recorded must not give any intimation of the* majority by which it was pronounced, or how the members of the court stood on the question, and should avoid all argument or special voasous in its justificatioa. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 39 Courts Martial. 216. " Every Judge Advocate, whether commissioned or special, and every member of a court martial, shall keep secret the sentence of the court, until the same shall be approved or disapproved, according to law ; and shall keep secret the vote or opinion of any particular member of the court, unless required to give evidence thereof by a court of justice." [ Militia Laws of April 17, 1854, tit. 7, art. 1, § 10. ] 217. The sentence cannot be carried into effect until after the pro- ceedings shall have been laid before the officer ordering the court martial, who is required by law to approve or disapprove of the same, within fifteen days thereafter. If he shall disapprove of the same, he may for good reasons send back the proceedings for revision. 218. In case the officer ordering the court be dead, or have resigned or otherwise vacated his office, these returns shall be laid before the Commanding Officer of the forces for the time being, who shall proceed thereon as though he was the officer ordering the court martial. 219. Proper causes for revision are : 1. When the sentence ( being discretionary ) is such that, in the particular circumstances of the case, it cannot be executed. 2. Illegality in the sentence, whether from being contrary to law or military usage, or whether from being found in consequence of the admission of illegal or the rejection of legal testimony. 3. Manifest incongruity between the finding and the sentence. 4. When the sentence is such that, from motives of public or military policy, it is not advisable to have it executed. 220. No witness can be examined on revision, nor can any illegality in the composition or constitution of the court, or in the charges, be cured. If the court be a legal court, which has acted illegally, the accused cannot be again tried. If it be an illegal court, all its proceedings are null and void, ah initio^ and there has been no trial, and the accused may again be brought to trial before a legal court. 40 GENERAL REGULATIONS Omtrta Martial. 221. The court, on revision, may amend the finding and sentence, or either of them, in whole or in part, or correct them in any way to conform to the provisions of law or the justice of the case, or they may substitute a new finding or sentence in place of the former ones. In ca.se of a new finding or sentence, the officer ordering the court may send the proceedings back for a second revision. If the court, on such second revision, should adhere to the judgment pronounced by it, the finding and sentence must be either approved or disapproved. If disapproved, the effect will be to nullify the sentence, but not to the extent of exposing the accused to a second trial. 222. After the record of the proceedings in a military court is once made up, it cannot in any manner be altered, but additions may be made to it. In conformity to this rule, the original finding and sentence of a court martial cannot, on revision, be expunged. The revised finding and sentence should merely be added to the original record. No expunging, altering or otherwise amending any part of the original record will be tolerated. 223. " The proceedings and sentence of every such court martial shall, without delay, be delivered to the officer ordering the court, who shall approve or disapprove thereof within fifteen days there- after, and shall give notice of his approval or disapproval to the President of such court martial and to the arresting officer, and ho may, at his discretion, publish the sentence, as approved or dis- approved, in Orders ; but no part of such sentence shall be executed until after the time allowed for appeal has expired." 224. " ITo shall also transmit such proceedings and sentence, and his approval or disapproval thereof, to the Adjutant-General, to be kept in his office." 225. "The right of appeal to the Commander-in-Chief, as it now exists by military usage, is reserved ; but no appeal .shall be received, unless made within twenty days after the decision appealed from i» made known to the person ai)pcaling." FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 41 Courts Martial. 226. " The President of such court martial shall issue his warrant for the collection of all fines imposed by said court, directed to the sheriflf of the county in which the court was held ( or in which the delinquent resides ), whose duty it shall be to collect such fines in the same manner as he is authorized to collect any debt upon civil process, together with lawful costs and the amount of fine, to be paid into the state treasury." [ Militia Laws of AprU 17, 1854, tit. T, art. 1, §§ 12, 13, 14, 15. ] 227. Notice of every sentence of a court martial shall be officially communicated to the person having been on trial, by the officer ordering the court, within three days after said officer shall have finally approved or disapproved of such sentence. Such notice shall be served on the person so tried, either personally or by leaving the same, at his place or last place of business or abode, with some person of suitable age and discretion ; or by inclosing it In a wrapper, and depositing it ( postage paid ) in the post-office, directed to such per- son at his place or last place of residence. The officer ordering the court shall also, within three days after such decision, transmit to the Adjutant- General the proceedings of said court, with a statement showing the date of such approval or disapproval, and the time and manner of giving such notice. 228. On the hearing of all appeals, the officers appealed to will include in their examination and decision all challenges of members of the court, made on the part of the accused ; and if, on the final appeal, the officer appealed to shall set aside the proceedings of the court for errors, in disallowing such challenges, the trial and deci- sion of the court shall not be a bar to another trial by a court martial legally constituted. 229. The officer hearing an appeal from a decision of a court-mar- tial shall in all cases determine the same according to the law and justice of the case, without regarding formal or technical omissions, or any errors or defects in the proceedings before the court, which could not affisct the merits. Military. 4* 42 GENERAL REGULATIONS Courts Martial. 230. An appeal suspends the execution of tlie sentence until the final decision of such appeal, the accused meanwliile remaining iu arrest; and the Adjutant-General will immediately notify the officer ordering a court, of any appeal to the Commander-in-Chief from the proceedings and sentence of such court. 231. The proceedings of all courts of inquiry will be transmitted to the Adjutant-General, in the same manner as the proceedings of courts martial. RULES APPLICABLE TO REGIMENTAL AND CERTAIN BRIGADE COURTS MARTIAL. 232. So far as these rules and regulations are applicable to regi- mental courts martial, they shall be so applied. Except that no other charges or specifications shall be necessary for the trial of delin- quents and deficiencies, than the return of the proper officer in regard to such delinquents or deficiencies ; nor upon any such trial shall the attendance of a Judge Advocate be necessary. 233. Whenever any appeal shall be made from the sentence of any court martial to the officer ordering the court, such appeal shall be in writing, and specify distinctly the several grounds of appeal, and a copy of such appeal shall, without delay, be served oy the appellant upon the President of such court martial, and also upon the Com- mandant of the military district for which such court martial shall have been held. 234. The officer to whom an appeal shall be made from the sentence of any court martial, shall, without delay, by order, fix a time and place when and where such appeal will be heard, and cause a copy of such order to be served at least ten days before the time of such hearing, upon the appellant and the President of such court, and on the Commandant of the military district for which said court may have been held. 235. " Whenever the sentence of any court martial shall be appealed from, the officer hearing the appeal shall require the court, FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 43 Duties in Camp and Gart-ison. or the President thereof, to furnish him forthwith with a statement of the case, and of the evidence touching the same ; which statement and evidence shall, in case of an appeal to the Commanding Officer of the brigade, be forthwith, on notice of such appeal, transmitted to him." 236. " Such statement being furnished, the officer hearing the appeal may hear such further evidence, by affidavit or otherwise, as the nature of the case may require, and for that purpose he shall have power to administer the usual oaths to witnesses produced before him, except in cases where trials may have been had upon charges preferred." 237. " The last two sections shall extend to appeals made from the order of an officer approving the sentence of a court martial." [ Militia Laws of April 17, 1S54, tit. 7, art. 4, §§ 50, 51, 52. ] 238. These rules and regulations, and also the provision of title 7 of the Militia Laws of this state, passed April 17, 1854, relating to regimental and battalion courts martial, so far as the same can be made applicable, shall apply to the brigade courts martial for the trial of delinquencies and deficiencies of Commissioned Officers and non-commissioned Staff Officers, provided for by § 35 of the act " In relation to the First Division and Fifth Brigade," passed April 14, 1855 ; but no arrest need be made of any officer brought to trial before said courts, nor shall any charges or specifications be necessary for the trial of such delinquencies and deficiencies, other than the return of the proper officer in regard to such delinquencies and deficiencies; nor shall the attendance of a Judge Advocate be necessary upon any such brigade court martial. ARTICLE XVII. DUTIES IN CAMP AND GARRISON. 239. The duties in camp and garrison are to be conducted, as far as practicable, in the same manner and on the same principles. 44 GENERAL REGULATIONS Hours of Service and RoU^OaUs — Signals. 240. The Reveille is the signal for the men to rise and the sentinel to leave off challenging. 241. The Troop is to sound or beat at — o'clock in the morning for the purpose of assembling the men for duty and inspection at guard- mounting. 242. The Retreat is to sound or beat at sunset, for the purpose of warning the oflScers and men for duty, and reading the orders of the day. 243. The Tattoo is to be beat at — o'clock in the evening, after which no soldier is to be out of his tent or quarters, unless by special leave. 244. Peas-vpon-a-irencher, the signal for breakfast, is to sound or beat at — o'clock in the morning. 245. Roast beef, the signal for dinner, is to sound or beat at — o'clock ; at other times it is the signal to draw provisions. 246. The Surgeon's call is to sound or beat at — o'clock, when the sick, able to go out, will be conducted to the hospital by the First Sergeants of companies, who will hand to the Surgeon a report of all the sick in the company, other than in hospital. The patients who cannot attend at the dispensary will be immediately after, if not before, visited by the Surgeon, 247. The General is to beat, only when the whole army is to march, and is the signal to strike the tents and prepare for the march. 248. The Assembly is the signal to form by company. 249. To the color is the signal to form by battalion. 260. The March, for the whole to move. 251. The Long roU is the signal for getting under arms, in case of alarm, or the sudden approach of the enemy. 252. The Parley is to desire a conference with the enemy. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 45 Hours 0/ Service and Roll^CalU — Signals'— Roll-Calls. HOURS OF SERVICE AND ROLL-CALLS. 253. In garrison, reveille will be at 5 o'clock in May, June, July and August ; at 6 in March, April, September and October, and at half-past 6 in November, December, January and February; re- treat at sunset ; the troop^ surgeon's call, signals for breakfast and dinner at the hours prescribed by the Commanding Officer, according to climate and season. In the cavalry, stable-calls immediately after reveille, and an hour and a half before retreat; water-calls at the hours directed by the Commanding Officer. 254. In camp the Commanding Officer prescribes the hours of reveille, reports, roll-calls, guard-mounting, meals, stable-calls, is- sues, fatigues, &c. SIGNALS. 255. 1, To go for fuel — 'poing stroke and ten-stroke roll. 2. To go for water — two strokes and a flam. 8, For fatigue party— 2?tontfer'5 march. 4. Adjutant's cd\\— first part of the troop. 5. First Sergeant's call — one roll and four taps. 6. Sergeant's call — one roll and three taps. 7. Corporal's call — one roll and two taps. 8. For the drummers — the drummer's call. 256. The drummer's call shall be beat by the drums of the police guard five minutes before the time of beating the stated calls,when the drummers will assemble before the colors of their respective regiments, and as soon as the beat begins on the right, it will be immediately taken up along the line. ROLL-CALLS. 257. There shall be daily, at least three stated roll-calls ; viz., at re- veille, retreat and tattoo. They will be made on the company parades by the First Sergeants, superintended by a Commissioned Officer of the company. The Captains will report the absentees, without leave, to the Colonel or Commanding Officer. 46 GENERAL REGULATIONS MiUtary Honors, 258. Immediately after reveille roll-call (after stable-duty in the cavalry), tlie tents or quarters, and the space around them, will be put in order by the men of the companies, superintended by the chiefs of squads, and the guard-house or guard-tent by the guard or prisoners. 259. The morning reports of companies, signed by the Captains and First Sergeants, will be handed to the Adjutant before eight o'clock in the morning, and will be consolidated by the Adjutant within the next hour, for the information of the Colonel ; and if the consolidation is to be sent to higher authority, it will be signed by the Colonel and the Adjutant. ARTICLE XVIII. HONORS TO BE PAID BY THE TROOPS. 260. The President or Vice-President of the United States, and the Commander-in-Chief of this State, are to be saluted with the highest honors; all standards and colors dropping, officers and troops sa- luting, drums beating and trumpets sounding. 261. A General^ commanding -in- chief , is to be received — by cavalry, with sabres presented, trumpets sounding the march, and all the officers saluting, standards dropping ; by infantry, with drums beating the march, colors dropping, officers saluting and arms presented. 262. A Major- General is to bo received — by cavalry, with sabres presented, trumpets sounding twice the trumpet-flourish and officers saluting; by infantry, with three ruffles, colors dropping, officers saluting and arms presented. 263. A Brigadier- General is to be received — by cavalry, with sabres presented, trumpets sounding once the trumpet-flourish and officers saluting ; by infantry, with two ruffies, colors dropping, offi- cers salutirig and arms presented. 264. An Adjutant- General or Inspector- General, if under the rank of a General officer, is to be received at a review or inspection FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 41 Military Honors. of the troops under arms : by cavalry, with sabres presented, ofScera saluting; by infantry, officers saluting and arms presented. The same honors to be paid to any field-officer authorized to review and inspect the troops. When the inspecting officer is junior to the officer commanding the parade, no compliments will be paid; he will be received only with swords drawn and arms shouldered. 265. All guards are to turn out and present arms to General officers^ as often as they pass them, except the personal guards of General officers, which turn out only to the Generals whose guards they are, and to officers of superior rank. 266. To Commanders of regiments, garrison or camp, their own guard turn out and present arms once a day; after which, they turn out with shouldered arms. 267. To the Members of the Cabinet, to the Chief Justice^ the Pre- sident of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives of the United States, to the Lieutenant-Governor of this State, and to Governors of other States and Territories, the same honors will be paid as to a General commanding-in-chief. 268. Officers of the Army and Navy of the United States will be received with the honors due to their rank. 269. Officers of a Foreign Service may be complimented with the honors due to their rank. 270. American and Foreign Envoys or Ministers will be received with the compliments due to a Major-Geueral. 271. The Colors of a regiment passing a guard are to be saluted, the trumpets sounding and the drums beating a march. 272. "When General officers, or persons entitled to salute, pass in the rear of a guard, the officer is only to make his men stand shoul- dered, and not to face his guard about or beat his drum. 48 GENERAL REGULATIONS MUtarjf Honon. 273. When General officers, or persons entitled to a salute, pass guards while in the act of relieving, both guards are to salute, receiv- ing the word of command from the senior oflScer of the whole. 274. All guards are to be under arms when armed parties approach their posts ; and to parties commanded by commissioned officers, they are to present their arms, drums beating a march and officers saluting. 275. No compliments by guards or sentinels will be paid between retreat and reveille^ except as prescribed for grand rounds. 276. All guards and sentinels are to pay the same compliments to the officers of the Army and Navy of the United States, as are directed to be paid to the military officers of this state, according to their relative ranks. 277. It is equally the duty of non-commissioned officers and sol- diers, at all times and in all situations, to pay the proper compli- ments to the officers of the Army and Navy, and to officers of other regiments, when in uniform, as to officers of their own particular regiments and corps. 278. Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline. Respect to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but will be extended to all occasions. It is always the duty of the inferior to accost or to offisr first the customary salutation, and of the superior to return such complimentary notice. 279. Sergeants, with swords drawn, will salute by bringing them to a present; with muskets, by bringing the left hand across tho body, so as to strike the musket near the right shoulder. Corporals out of the ranks, and privates not sentries, will carry their musketa at a shoulder, as Sergeants, and salute in hke maimer. 280. When a soldier without arms, or with side-arms only, meets an officer, he is to raise his hand to tho right side of the visor of his cap, palm to the ft-ont, elbow raised as high as tho shoulder, looking FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 49 Salutes, at the same time in a respectful and soldier-like manner at the officer, who will return the compliment thus offered. 281. A non-commissioned officer or soldier being seated, and with- out particular occupation, will rise on the approach of an officer and make the customary salutation. If standing, he will turn toward the officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the same place or on the same ground, such comiilimeuts need not be repeated. SALUTES. 282. The National salute is determined by the number of States composing the Union, at the rate of one gun for each State. 283. The President of the United States and Governor of this State, will receive a salute of twenty-one guns. 284. The Vice-President is to receive a salute of seventeen guns. 285. The Heads of the great Executive Departments of the National Government, the General Commanding the Army of the United States, the Lieutenant- G&vernor of this State, and the Governors of other States and Territories, fifteen guns. 286. A Major- General, thirteen guns. 287. A Brigadier- General, eleven guns. 288. Foreign Ships of Wa/r will be saluted in return for a similar compliment, gun for gun, on notice being officially received of such intention. If there be several posts in sight of, or within six miles of each other, the principal only shall reciprocate compliments with ships passing. 289. Officers of the Army and Navy will be saluted according to rank. 290. Foreign Officers, invited to visit a fort, post or camp, may be saluted according to their relative rank. 291. Envoys and Ministers of the United States and foreign powers are to be saluted with thirteen guns. Military. 5 60 GENERAL REGULATIONS Ikc<»^ of Honor — Fwnerai Honors. 292. A General officer will be saluted but once in a year at each post, and only when notice of his intention to visit the post has been given. 293. Salutes to individuals are to be fired on their arrival only. 294. A National salute will be fired at meridian on the anniversary of the Independence of the United States, at each military post and camp provided with artilleiy and ammunition. ESCORTS OP HONOR. 295. Escorts of honor may be composed of cavalry or infantry, or both, according to circumstances. They are guards of honor for the purpose of receiving and escorting personages of high rank, civil or military. The troops for this purpose will be selected for their sol- dierly appearance and superior discipline. 296. The escort will be dra^^^l up in line, the centre opposite to the place where the personage presents himself, with an interval between the wings to receive him and his retinue. On his appear- ance, he will be received with the honors due to his rank. When he has taken his place in the line, the whole will be wheeled into platoons or companies, as the case may be, and take up the march. The same ceremony will be observed, and the same honors paid, on his leaving the escort. 297. When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from the point where he is expected to be received, as, for instance, whore a court yard or wharf intervenes, a double line of sentinels will be posted from that point to the escort, facing inward, and the sentinels will successively salute as he passes 298. An officer will bo appointed to attend him, to bear such com- munications as he may have to make to the Commander of the escort. FUNERAL HONORS. 299. On the receipt of official intelligence of the death of the President of ike United States, or the Governor of this state^ the FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 51 Fwneral Honors. Commanding officer of every regiment provided with artillery and ammunition, shall, on the following day, cause a gun to be fired at every half hour, beginning at sunrise and ending at sunset. 300. On the day of the interment of a General commanding-in- chief, a gun will be fired at every half hour, until the procession moves, beginning at sunrise. 301. The funeral escort of a General commanding-in-chief shall consist of a regiment of infantry, a squadron of cavalry, and six pieces of artillery. 302. That of a Major- General, a regiment of infantry, a squadron of cavalry, and four pieces of artillery. 303. That of a Brigadier- General, a regiment of infantry, on© company of cavalry, and two pieces of artillery. 304. That of a Colonel, a regiment. 305. That of a Lieutenant- Colonel^ six companies. 806. That of a Major, four companies. 307. That of a Captain, one company. 308. That of a Subaltern, half a company. 309. The funeral escort shall always be commanded by an officer of the same rank with the deceased ; or if none such be present, by one of the next inferior grade. 310. The funeral escort of a non-commissioned staff officer, shall consist of sixteen rank and file, commanded by a Sergeant. 311. That of a Sergeant, of fourteen rank and file, commanded by a Sergeant. 312. That of a Corporal, of twelve rank and file, commanded by a Corporal ; and, 313. That of a private, of eight rank and file, commanded by a Corporal. 52 GENERAL REGULATIONS Ihmeral Honors. 814, The escort will be formed in two ranks, opposite to the quar- ters or tent of the deceased, with shouldered arms and bayonets unfixed ; the artillery and cavalry on the right of the infantry. 815. On the appearance of the corpse, the officer commanding the escort will command, Present — Arms! when the honors due to the deceased will be paid by the drums and trumpets. The music will then play an appropriate air, and the coffin will then be taken to the right, where it will be halted. The music will take post on the left. The Commander will next order, 1. Shoulder — Arms ! 2. By company {or platoon) , left wheel. 3. March ! 4:. Reverse — Arms! 5. Column, forward. 6. Guide, right. 7. March! The arms will be reversed at the order, by bringing the firelock under the left arm, butt to the front, barrel downward, left hand sus- taining tlie lock, the right steadying the firelock behind the back ; swords are reversed in a similar manner under the right arm. The officers in the usual positions, as in any other column, left in front. The band and field music will precede the column. 316, The column will be marched in slow time to solemn music, and, on reaching the grave, the column will take such a direction that the guides shall be next to the grave. When the centre of the column is opposite to the grave, the Commander will order, 1, Column. 2, Halt! 3. Right into line, wheel. 4. March! The coffin is then brought along the front, to the opposite side of the giave, and the Commander then orders, 1. Shoulder — Arms! 2. Present — Arms! And when the coffin reaches the grave he adds, 1. Shoulder — Arms! 2. Rest on — Arms FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 53 Funeral Honors. The rest on arms is done by placing the muzzle on the left foot, both hands on the but, the head on the hands or bowed, right knee bent. 817. After the funeral service is performed, and the coffin is lowered into the grave, the Commander will order, 1. Attention I 2. Shoulder — Arms! 3. Load at will. 4. Load! when three rounds of small arms will be fired by the escort, taking caro to elevate the pieces. 318. This being done, the Commander will order, 1. By company {or platoon), right wheel. 2. March! 3. Column forward. 4. Guide left. 6. Quick — March! The music will not begin to play until the escort is clear of the inclosure. 319. When the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the escort may march in common time and in column of route, after leaving the residence or quarters of the deceased, and until it approaches the burial ground. 320. The pall-bearers, six in number, will be selected from the grade of the deceased, or from the grade or grades next above or below it, 321. At the funeral of an officer, as many in commission of the division, brigade or regiment, according to the rank of the deceased, as can conveniently attend the same, will join in procession, in uniform and with side-arms. The funeral of a non-commissioned officer or private will be attended, in like-manner, by the non-commissioned officers or privates of the regiment or company, according to the rank of the deceased, with side-arms only. 322. Persons joining in the procession follow the coffin in the in- verse order of their rank. Military. 5* 54 GENERAL REGULATIONS Inspection of the Troops. 323. The usual badge of military mourning is a piece of black crape around the left arm, above the elbow, and also upon the sword- hilt ; and will be worn when in full or in undress. 324. The drums of a funeral escort will be covered with black crape or thin black serge. 325. Funeral honors will be paid to deceased officers, without mili- tary rank, according to their assimilated grades. ARTICLE XIX. INSPECTION OF THE TROOPS. 326. The inspection of troops, as a division, regiment or other body composing a garrison or command, not less than a company, will generally be preceded by a review. 327. There will be certain periodical inspections, to wit : 1. At the annual parade or encampments. 2. Biennially, by the Inspector-General or by any other officer ordered for such duty by the Commander-in-Chief. 3. At other parades specially ordered for inspection. 328. Besides these inspections, frequent visits will be made by the Commanding Officer, Company and Medical Officers, while in camp or garrison, to the men's quarters, the hospital, guard-house, &c. FORM OF INSPECTION. 829. The present example embraces a battalion of infantry. The Inspecting Officer and the Field and Staflf Officers will be on foot. 330. The battalion being in the order of battle, the Colonel will cause it to break into open column of companies, right in front. He will next order the ranks to be opened, when the color-rank and color- guard, under the direction of the Adjutant, will take post ten paces in front, and the band ten paces in rear of the coIumD. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 55 Inspection of the Troops. 331. The Colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will command, 1. Officers and Sergeants^ to the front of your companies. 2. March ! The officers will form themselves in one rank, eight paces, and the non-commissioned officers in one rank, six paces in advance, along the whole fronts of their respective companies, from right to left, iu the order of seniority ; the pioneers and music of each company, in one rank, two paces behind the non-commissioned officers. 332. The Colonel will next command, Field and Staff, to the front — March! The commissioned officers thus designated will form themselves in one rank, on a line equal to the front of the column, six paces in front of the colors, from right to left, in the order of seniority ; and the non-commissioned staff, in a similar manner, two paces in rear of the preceding rank. The Colonel, seeing the movement executed, will take post on the right of the Lieutenant-Colonel and wait the approach of the Inspecting Officer. But such of the Field Officers as may be superior in rank to the Inspector will not take post in front of the battalion. 333. The Inspector will commence in front. After inspecting the dress and general appearance of the field and commissioned staff under arms, the Inspector, accompanied by these officers, will pass down the open column, looking at every rank in front and rear. 334. The Colonel will now command, 1. Order arms. 2. Rest ! when the Inspector will proceed to make a minute inspection of the several ranks or divisions, in succession, commencing in front. 835. As the Inspector approaches the non-commissioned staff, color-rank, the color-guard and the band, the Adjutant will give the necessary orders for the inspection of arms, boxes and knapsacks. The colors will be planted firm in the ground, to enable the color- bearers to display the contents of their knapsacks. The non- 66 GENERAL REGULATIONS Inspection of the Troops. commissioned staff may be dismissed as soon as inspected ; but the color-rank and color-guard will remain until the colors are to bo escorted to the place from which they were taken. 336. As the Inspector successively approaches the companies, th» Captains will command, 1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Inspection — Arms! The Inspecting Officer will then go through the whole company and minutely inspect the arms, accoutrements and dress of each soldier. After this is done, the Captain will command, Open — Boxes! when the ammunition and the boxes will be examined, 337. The Captain will then command, 1. Shoulder — Arms ! 6. To the rear, open order. 2. Close order. 7. March! 3. March! 8. Front rank — About — Face! 4. Order — Arms! 9. Unsling — Knapsacks. 5. Stack — Arms! 10. Open — Knapsacks, 838. The Sergeants will face inward at the 2d command, and close upon the centre at the 3d, and stack their arms at the 5th command ; at the 6th command they face outward, and resume their positions at the 7th. When the ranks are closed, preparatory to take arms, the Sergeants will also close upon the centre, and, at the word, take their arms and resume their places. 339. The knapsacks will bo placed at the feet of the men, the flaps ft-om them, with the great-coats on the flaps, and the knapsacks leaning on the great-coats. In this position the Inspector will examine their contents, or so many of them as he may think necessary, commencing with the non-commissioned officers, the men standing at attention. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 51 JnspeeUon of Vu Troops. 340. When the Inspector has passed through the company^ tho Captain will command, Repack — Knapsacks / when each soldier will repack and buckle up his knapsack, leaving it on the ground, the number upward, turned from him, and then stand at rest. 341. The Captain will then command, 1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Sling — Knapsacks. At the word sling, each soldier will take his knapsack, holding it by the inner straps and stand erect ; at the last word he will replace it on his back. The Captain will continue, 4. Front rank — About — Face! 8. Shoulder — Arms! 5. Close order. 9. Officers and Sergeants, to G. March ! your posts. 7. Take — Arms! 10. March I nnd will cause the company to file off to their tents or quarters, except the company that is to refiscort the colors, which will await the further orders of the Colonel. 342. In an extensive column, some of the rearmost companies may, after the inspection of dress and general appearance, be per- mitted to stack arms until just before the Inspector approaches them, when they will be directed to take arms and resume their position. 343. The inspection of the troops being ended, the field and staff will next accompany the Inspector to the hospital, magazine, arsenal, quarters, sutler's shop, guard-house and such other places as he may think proper to inspect. The Captains and subalterns repair to their companies and sections to await the Inspector. 844. The hospital being at all times an object of particular interest, it will be critically and minutely inspected. 68 GENERAL REGULATIONS 345. The men will be formed in the company quarters in front of their respective bunks, and on the entrance of the Inspector the word Attention! will be given by the senior non-commissioned officer present, when the whole will salute with the hand, without uncovering. 346. The Inspector, attended by the Company Officers, will examine the general arrangement of the interior of the quarters, the bunks, bedding, cooking and table utensils, and such other objects as may present themselves ; and afterwards the exterior. 347. The inspection of cavalry and artillery will conform to the principles laid down in the foregoing paragraphs, regard being had to the system of instruction for those arms of service respectively. ARTICLE XX. MUSTERS. 348. Musters will be made by the Inspecting Officer present, and in the absence of such officer the muster will be made by an officer specially designated by the Commander of the forces on duty. 349. When one Inspecting Officer cannot muster all the troops himself on the day specified, the Commanding Officer will designate such other competent officers as may be necessary, to assist him. 360. All stated musters of the troops shall be preceded by a minute and careful inspection in the prescribed mode; and if the command be more than a company, by a review, before inspectioD. 861. The Mustering Officer having inspected the companies in succession, bcgiiming on the right, returns to the first company to muster it. The company being at ordered arms, with open ranks, as when inspected, the Captain will, as the Mustering Officer approaches, command, 1. Attention. 3. Shoulder — Arms! 2. Company. i. Support — Arms I FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 69 Forms of Parade. The Mustering Officer will then call over the names on the roll, and each man, as his name is called, will distinctly answer, Here ! and bring his piece to a carry and to an order. 352. After each company is mustered, the Captain will order it to be marched to the company parade, and there dismissed to quarters to await the Inspector's visit. 353. After mustering the companies, the Mustering Officer, attended by the Company Commanders, will visit the guard and hospital, to verify the presence of the men reported there. 354. The muster rolls will be made on the printed forms furnished from the Adjutant-General's office and according to the directions given on them. On the muster-roll, companies are designated by the name of the Captain, whether present or absent. 355. One copy of each muster-roll will be transmitted by the Mustering Officer to the Adjutant-General's office within thirty days after the muster. ARTICLE XXI. FORMS OF PARADE, 356. On all parades of ceremony, such as reviews, guard-mount- ing, at troop or retreat parades, instead of the word ^'Eest,^' which allows the men to move or change the position of their bodies, the command will be " Parade — Rest !" At the last word of this com- mand, the soldier will carry the right foot six Inches in rear of the left heel, the left knee slightly bent, the body upright upon the right leg ; the musket resting against the hollow of the right shoulder, the hands crossed in front, the backs of them outward, and the left hand uppermost. At the word " Attention !" the soldier will resume the correct position at ordered arms. In the positions here indicated, the soldier will remain silent and motionless ; and it is particularly en- joined upon all officers to cause the commands above given, on the part of the soldier, to be executed with great briskness and spirit. 60 GENERAL REGULATIONS Drew Parade 357. Officers on all duties under arms are to have their swords drawn, without waiting for any words of command for that purpose. I. DRESS PARADE. 358. There will be, daily, when troops are on duty, at least one dress parade, at troop or retreat, or both, as the commanding officer may direct. 359. A signal will be beat or sounded, half an hour before troop or retreat, for the music to assemble on the regimental parade, and each company to turn out under arms on its own parade, for roll-call and inspection by its own officers. 360. Ten minutes after that signal, the Adjutant's call will be given, when the Captains will march their companies ( the band playing ) to the regimental parade, where they take their positions in the order of battle. When the line is formed, the Captain of the first company, on notice from the Adjutant, steps one pace to the front, and gives to his company the command, " Order — Arms ! Parade — Rest !" which is repeated by each Captain in succession to the left. The Adjutant take.s post two paces on the right of the line ; the Sergeant-major two paces on the left. The music will be formed in two ranks on the right of the Adjutant. The Pioneers, or Sappers and Miners, four paces on the right of the music. The Colonel or senior officer present wiJl take the command of the parade, and will take post at a suitable distance in front, opposite the centre, facing the line, when the music begins to beat off, and at the same time the Lieutenant-Colonel and Major will take their positions in order of battle. 301. When the companies have ordered arms, the Adjutant will order the music to heat off, when it will commence on the right, beat in front of the lines to the left, and back to its place on the right. 362. When the music has ceased, the Adjutant will step two pace* to the front, face to the left, and command, 1. Attention! 4. Prepare to open ranks ! 2. Battalion. 6. To the rear, open order f 8. SJioulde^' — Arms! 6. March! FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 61 Dreis Parade. At the sixth command, the ranks will be opened according to the system laid down in the Infantry Tactics, the Commissioned Officers marching to the front, the Company Officers four paces, Field Officers six paces, opposite to their positions in the order of battle, where they will halt and dress. The Adjutant, seeing the ranks aligned, will command Front ! and march along the front to the centre, face to the right, and pass the line of Company Officers eight or ten paces, where he will come to the right-about, and command, Present — Arms! when arms will be presented, officers saluting. 363. Seeing this executed, he will face about to the Commanding Officer, salute, and report, "^iV, the parade is formed.'' The Adjutant will then, on intimation to that eflfect, take his station three paces on the left of the Commanding Officer, one pace retired, passing round his rear. 364. The Commanding Officer, having acknowledged the salute of the line by touching his hat, will, after the Adjutant has taken his post, draw his sword, and command, 1. Battalion. 2. Shoulder — Arms! and add such exercises as he may think proper, concluding with Order — Arms ! then return his sword, and direct the Adjutant to receive the reports. 365. The Adjutant will now pass round the right of the Command- ing Officer, advance upon the line, halt midway between him and tho line of Company Officers, and command, 1. First Sergeants, to the front and centre. 2. March ! At the first command, they Avill shoulder arms as Sergeants, march two paces to the front, and face inward. At the second command, they will march to the centre and halt. The Adjutant will then order, 1. Front — Face! 2. Report. Military. 6 62 GENERAL REGULATIONS Dreas Parade. At the last word, each, in succession, beginning on the right, will salute by bringing the left hand smartly across the breast to the right shoulder, and report the result of the roll-call previously made on the company parade. 366. The Adjutant again commands, 1 . First Sergeants, outward — Face ! 2. To your posts — March ! when they will resume their places and order arms. The Adjutant will now face to the Commanding Officer, salute, report absent officers and give the result of the First Sergeants' reports. The Command- ing Officer will next direct the orders to be read, when the Adjutant will face about and announce, Attention to Orders. He will then read the orders. 367. The orders having been read, the Adjutant will face to the Commanding Officer, salute and report; when, on an intimation from the Commander, he will face again to the line and announce, Parade is dismissed. All the officers will now return their swords, face inward, and close on the Adjutant, he having taken position in their line, the Field Officers on the flanks. The Adjutant commands, 1 . Front — Face ! 2. Forward — March ! when they will march forward, dressing on the centre, the music playing, and when within six paces of the Commander, the A(\jutant will give the word, Halt/ The officers will then salute the Commanding Officer by raising the hand to the cap, and there remain until he shall have communicated to them such instructions as ho may have to give or intimates that the ceremony is finished. As the officers disperse, the First Ser- geants will close the ranks of their respective companies and march FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 63 Review of Battalion. them to the company parades, where they will be dismissed, the band continuing to play until the companies clear the regimental parade. 368. All Field and Company Officers and men will be present at dress parades, unless especially excused, or on some duty incompati- ble with such attendance. 369. A dress parade, once a day, will not be dispensed with, except on extraordinary and urgent occasions, by troops on duty, II. REVIEW OF A BATTALION OF INFANTRY. 370. Preparatory to a review, the Adjutant will cause a camp- color to be placed 80 paces, or more or less, according to the length of the line, in front of and opposite to where the centre of the bat- talion will rest, where the Reviewing Officer is supposed to take his station ; and, although he may choose to quit that position, still the color is to be considered as the point to which all the movements and formations are relative. 371. The Adjutant will also cause points to be marked, at suitable distances, for the wheelings of the divisions; so that their right flanks, in marching past, shall only be about four paces from the camp-color, where it is supposed the Reviewing Officer places himself to receive the salute. 372. The battalion being formed in the order of battle, at shoul- dered arms, the Colonel will command, 1. Battalion, prepare for review / 3. March! 2. To the rear, open order. At the word March, the Field and Staflf Officers dismount ; the Com- pany Officers and color- rank advance four paces in front of the front rank, and place themselves opposite to their respective places, in the order of battle. The color-guard replace the color-rank. The Staff Officers place themselves, according to rank, three paces on the right of the rank of Company Officers, and one pace from each other ; the music takes post as at parade ; the Pioneers, or Sappers and Miners, 64 GENERAL REGULATIONS Review o/ Battalion. on the right of the music. The non-commissioned staff take post one pace from each other and three paces on the right of the front rank of the battalion. 373. When the ranks are aligned, the Colonel will command, Front ! and place himself eight paces, and the Lieutenant-Colonel and Major will place themselves two paces in front of the rank of Company Officers and opposite to their respective places, in the order of battle, all facing to the front. 374. When the Reviewing Officer presents himself before the centre, and is fifty or sixty paces distant, the Colonel will face about and command. Present — Arms ! and resume his front. The men present arms, and the officers salute, so as to drop their swords with the last motion of the firelock. The non-commissioned staff salute by bringing the sword to a poise, the hilt resting on the breast, the blade in front of the face, inclining a little outward. The music will play and all the drums beat accord- ing to the rank of the Reviewing Officer. The colors only salute such persons as, from their rank, and by regulation (see Article XVIII) are entitled to that honor. If the Reviewing Officer be junior in rank to the Commandant of the parade, no compliment will be paid to him, but ho will be received with arms carried, and the officers will not salute as the column passes in review. 376. The Reviewing Officer having halted and acknowledged the salute of the lino by touching or raising his cap or hat, the Colonel will face about and command, Shoulder — Arms ! when the men shoulder their pieces ; the officers and non-commis- sioned staff recover their swords with the last motion and the Colonel faces to the front. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 65 Review of Battalion. 376. The Reviewing Officer will then go toward the right, the whole remaining perfectly steady, without paying any further compliment, while he passes along the front of the battalion and proceeds round the left flank and along the rear of the file-closers to the right. While the Reviewing Officer is going round the battalion, the band will play, and will cease when he has returned to the right flank of the troops. If the Reviewing Officer be accompanied by a staflf or attendants, they will, in passing from the right along the front of the regiment, be formed in ranks four paces in the rear and to the right of the Reviewing Officer. 377. When the Reviewing Officer turns off to place himself by tho camp-color, in front, the Colonel will face to the line and command, 1. Close order. 2. March ! At the first command the Field and Company Officers will face to the right-about, and at the second command all persons, except the Colonel, will resume their places in the order of battle ; the Field and Staflf Officers mount. 378. The Reviewing Officer having taken his position near the camp- color, the Colonel will command, 1. By company, right whed. 4. Column, forward. 2. Quick — MarchI 5. Guide right. 3. Pass in review. 6. March I The battalion, in column of companies, right in front, will then, in common time and at shouldered arms, be put in motion; the Colonel four paces in front of the Captain of the leading company ; the Lieu- tenant-Colonel on a line with the leading company ; the Major on a line with the rear company ; the Adjutant on a line with the second company ; the Sergeant-Major on a line with the company next pre- ceding the rear, each six paces from the flank ( left ) opposite to the Reviewing Officer ; the Staff Officers in one rank, according to the order of precedency, from the right, four paces in rear of the column ; the music, preceded by the principal Musician, six paces before the Military. 6* 66 GENERAL REGULATIONS Beview of Battalion. Colonel ; the Pioneers, or Sappers and Miners, preceded by the Ser- geant, four paces before the principal Musician ; the Quartermaster- Sergeant two paces from the side, opposite to the guides and in line with the pioneers. 379. All other officers and non-commissioned officers will march past in the places prescribed for them in the march of an open column. The guides and soldiers will keep their heads steady to the front in passing in review. 380. The color- bearer will remain in the ranks while passing and saluting. 381. The music will begin to play at the command to march, and after passing the Reviewing Officer, wheel to the left out of the column, and take a position opposite and facing him, and will con- tinue to play until the rear of the column shall have passed him, when it will cease and follow in the rear of the battalion, unless the battalion is to pass in quick time also, in which case it will keep its position. 382. The officers will salute the Reviewing Officer, if he be superior to the officer in command, when they arrive within six paces of him, and recover their swords when six paces past him. All officers, in saluting, will cast their eyes toward the Reviewing Officer. 383. The Colonel, when he has saluted at the head of the bat- talion, will place himself near the Reviewing Officer, and will remain there until the rear has passed, when he will rcjom the battalion. 384. The colors will salute the Reviewing Officer, if entitled to it, when witliin six paces of him, and be raised when they have passed by him an equal distance. The drums will beat a march or niffle, according to the rank of the Reviewing Officer, at the same time that the colors salute. 385. When the column has passed the Reviewing Officer, the Colonel will direct it to the ground it marched from, and command. Guide left, FOR THE MILITARY FORGES. 67 Revievk of Tux> or More Battalions. in time for the guides to cover. The column having arrived on its ground, the Colonel will command, 1. Column. 2. Halt! 3. Left, into line — Wheel. 4. MaechI When the line is formed in order of battle, the ranks will be opened, the officers taking post in front, and the review will terminate by the whole saluting as at the begimiing. 386. If, however, instructions have been previously given to march the troops past in quick time also, the Colonel will, instead of changing the guides, halting the column and wheeling it into line, as above directed, give the command, 1. Quick time. 2. March I In passing the Reviewing Officer again, no salute will be offered by either officers or men. The music will have kept its position oppo- site the Reviewing Officer, and, at the last command, will commence playing, and as the column approaches will place itself in front of and march off with the column, and continue to play until the bat- talion is halted on its original ground of formation. The review will terminate in the same manner as prescribed above. 387. The Colonel will afterward cause the troops to perform such exercises and manoeuvres as the Reviewing Officer may direct. 388. When two or more battalions are to be reviewed, they will be formed in parade order, with proper intervals, and will also perform the same movements that are laid down for a single battalion- observing the additional directions that are given for such move- ments when applied to the line. The Brigadier-General and his Staff, on foot, will place themselves opposite the centre of the brigade ; the Brigadier-General two paces in front of the rank of Colonels; his Aid, two paces on his right, and one retired; and the other Brigade Staff Officers, those having the rank of Field Officers, in the rank of Lieutenant-Colonels and Majors ; and those below that rank in the rank of Company Officers. G8 GENERAL REGULATIONS Review of Two or More Battaliom* 389. In passing in review, a Major-General will be four paces in front of the Colonel of the leading battalion of his division; and the Brigadier-General will be on the right of the Colonels of the leading battalions of their brigades ; Staff Officers on the left of their Generals. 390. When the line exceeds two battalions, the Reviewing Officer may cause them to march past in quick time only. In such cases the mounted officers only will salute. 391. A number of companies less than a battalion will be reviewed as a battalion, and a single company as if it were with the battalion. When required, the companies may pass in column of platoons. 392. If several brigades are to be reviewed together, or in one line, this further difference will be observed: the Reviewing Personage, joined by the General of the division, on the right of his division, will proceed down the line, parallel to its front, and when near the Brigadier-Generals respectively, will be saluted by their brigades in succession. The music of each, after the prescribed salute, will play while the Reviewing Personage is in front or in rear of it, and only then. 393. In marching in review, with several battalions in common time, the music of each succeeding battalion will commence to play when tnc music of the preceding one has ceased, in order to follow its battalion. When marching in quick time, the bands of the regi- ments will remain with the column; and the music will begin to play when the rear company of the preceding battalion has passed the Reviewing Officer. ( See par. 1648, et seq. ) 894. When several battalions pass successively in review, the officer commanding the whole will alone join the Reviewing Officer, and will place himself on his right, 895. The battalions will take, in marching, intervals between them of forty paces. In line, the intervals are twenty-two paces. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 69 Guard-Mounting. 396. The Reviewing Officer or Personage will acknowledge the salute by raising or taking off his cap or hat, when the Commander of the troops salutes him; and, also, when the colors pass. The remainder of the time occupied by the passage of the troops, he will be covered. The Staff, or attendants of any Reviewing Officer will be posted, in one or more ranks, four paces in the rear, and to the left of such officer. 397. The review of Cavalry and Artillery will be conducted on similar principles, and according to the systems of instruction for those arms of service. III. GUARD-MOUNTING. 398. Camp and garrison guards will be relieved every twenty-four hours, and oftener if the Commanding Officer shall so direct. The guards at outposts will, ordinarily, be relieved in the same manner ; but this must depend on their distances from camp, or other circum- stances, which may sometimes require their continuing on duty several days. In such cases, they must be previously warned, to provide themselves accordingly. 399. At the first call for guard-mounting, the men warned for duty turn out on their company parades for inspection by the First Sergeants ; and, at the second call, repair to the regimental or garrison parade, conducted by the First Sergeants. Each, detach- ment, as it arrives, will, under the direction of the Adjutant, take post on the left of the one that preceded it, in open order, arms shouldered and bayonets fixed ; the supernumeraries five paces in the rear of the men of their respective Companies ; the First Sergeants in rear of them. The Sergeant-Major will dress the ranks, count the files, verify the details, and when the guard is formed, report to the Adjutant, and take post two paces on the left of the front rank. 400. The Adjutant then commands Frmt ! when the officer of the guard takes post twelve paces in front of the centre ; the Sergeants, in one rank, four paces in the rear of the officers ; and the Corporals, in one rank, four paces in the rear of the Sergeants, all facing to th© front. The Adjutant then assigns their places in the guard. 10 GENERAL REGULATIONS dhiard'Mounting. 401. The Adjutant will then command, 1. Officers and Non-commissioned 2. About — Face! Officers. 3. Inspect your guards — Mabch ! The Non-commissioned Officers then take their posts. The Com- mander of the guard then commands, 1. Order — Arms I 2. Inspection — Arms I and inspects his guard. When there is no Commissioned Officer on the guard, the Adjutant will inspect it. During inspection the band will play. 402. The inspection ended, the officer of the guard takes post as though the guard were a company of a battalion, in open order, under review ; at the same time, also, the officers of the day will take post in front of the centre of the guard ; the old officer of the day tliree paces on the right of the new officer of the day, one pace retired, 403. The Adjutant will now command, 1. Parade— Rest \ 2. Troop — Beat off/ when the music, beginning on the right, will beat down the line in front of the officer of the guard to the left, and back to its place on the right, where it will cease to play. 404. The Adjutant then commands, 1. MterUionI 2. Shoulder— Ar^s I 3. Close order — UarcbI At the word " Close order," the officer will face about ; at " March," resume his post in line. The Adjutant then commands, Present — Arms 1 at which he will face to the new officer of the day, salute, and report, " Sir, the guard is formed." The new officer of the day, after acknow- ledging the salute, will direct the Adjutant to march the guard in review, or by flank, to its post. But if the Adjutant be senior to the officer of the day, he will report without saluting with the sword then, wr when marching the guard in review. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 71 Guard-MounUng. 405. In review, the guard march past the officer of the day, accord- ing to the order of review, conducted by the Adjutant, marching on the left of the first division ; the Sergeant-Major on the left of the last division. 406. When the column has passed the officer of the day, the officer of the guard marches it to its post, the Adjutant and Sergeant-Major retiring. The music, which has wheeled out of the column, and taken post opposite to the officer of the day, will cease, and the old officer of the day salute, and give the old or standing orders to the new officer of the day. The supernumeraries, at the same time, will be marched by the First Sergeants to their respective company parades, and dismissed. 407. In bad weather or at night, or after fatiguing marches, the ceremony of turning off may be dispensed with, but not the inspection. 408. Grand guards and other brigade guards are organized and mounted on the brigade parade by the Staff Officers of the parade, under the direction of the Field Officer of the day of the brigade, according to the principles here prescribed for the police guard of a regiment. The detail of each regiment is assembled on the regimental parade, verified by the Adjutant, and marched to the brigade parade by the senior officer of the detail. After inspection and review, the officer of the day directs the several guards to their respective posts. 409. The officer of the old guard, having his guard paraded, on the approach of the new guard, commands, Present — Abms I 410. The new guard will march, in quick time, past the old guard, at shouldered arms^ officers saluting, and take post four paces on its right, where, being aligned with it, its commander will order, Present — Abms I The two officers will then approach each other and salute. They will then return to their respective guards, and command, 1. Shoulder— A^TA^l 2. Order— Arms I 72 GENERAL REGULATIONS Ouard-MovmUng. 411. The officer of the new guard will now direct the detail for the advanced guard to be formed and marched to its post, the list of the guard made and divided into three reliefs, experienced soldiers placed over the arms of the guard and at the remote and responsible posts, and the young soldiers in posts near the guard for instruction in their duties, and will himself proceed to take possession of the guard-house or guard-tent, and the articles and prisoners in charge of the guard. 412. During the time of relieving the sentinels and of calling in the small posts, the old conmiander will give to the new all the in- formation and instruction relating to his post. 413. The first relief having been designated and ordered two paces to the front, the Corporal of the new guard will take charge of it, and go to relieve the sentinels, accompanied by the Corporal of the old guard, who will take command of the old sentinels, when the whole are relieved. 414. If the sentinels are numerous, the Sergeants are to be em- ployed, as well as the Corporals, in relieving them. 415. The relief, with arms at a support, in two ranks, will march by a flank, conducted by the Corporal on the side of the leading front-rank man ; and the men will be numbered alternately in the front and rear rank, the man on the right of the front rank being No. 1. Should an officer approach, the Corjwral will command, Carry armSj and resume the support arms when the officer is passed. 416. The sentinels at the guard-house or guard-tent will be the first relieved and left beliind ; the others are relieved in succession. 417. When a sentinel sees the relief approaching, he will halt and face to it, with his arms at a shoulder. At six paces, the Corporal will command, 1. Relief I 2. Halt! when the relief will halt and carry arms. The Corporal will then add, "No. 1," or "No. 2," or "No. 3," according to the number of the post, ^rWM — PORTl FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 13 Ouard-Mowntf/ng. The two sentinels will, with arms at port^ then approach each other, when the old sentinel, under the correction of the Corporal, will whisper the instructions to the new sentinel. This done, the two sentinels will shoulder arms, and the old sentinel will pass, in quick time, to his place in rear of the relief. The Corporal will then com- mand, 1. Support — Arms! 2. Forward. S.March! and the relief proceeds in the same manner until the whole are re- lieved. 418. The detachments and sentinels from the old guard having come in, it will he marched, at shouldered arms^ along the front of the new guard, in quick time, the new guard standing at presented arms ; officers saluting, and the music of both guards beating, except at the outposts. 419. On arriving at the regimental or garrison parade, the Com- mander of the old guard will send the detachments composing it, under charge of the non-commissioned officers, to their respective regiments. Before the men are dismissed, their pieces will be drawn or discharged at a target. On rejoining their companions, the chiefs of squads will examine the arms, &c., of their men, and cause the whole to be put away in good order. 420. When the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the officer of the new guard will order his men to stack their arms, or place them in the arm-racks. 421. The Commander of the guard will then make himself acquainted with all the instructions for his post, visit the sentinels, and question them and the non-commissioned officers relative to the instructions they may have received from other persons of the old guard. Military. 7 V4 GENERAL REGULATIONS Guards. ARTICLE XXIL GUARDS. 422. Sentinels will be relieved every two hours, unless the state of the weather or other causes should make it necessary or proper that it be done at shorter or longer intervals. 423. Each relief, before mounting, is inspected by the Commander of the guard or of its post. The Corporal reports to him, and pre- sents the old relief on its return. 424. The countersign or watchword is given to such i)ersons as are entitled to pass during the night, and to officers, non-commissioned officers, and sentinels of the guard. Interior guards receive the coun- tersign only when ordered by the Commander of the troops. 425. The parole is imparted to such officers only as have a right to visit the guards and to make the grand rounds, and to officers commanding guards. 426. As soon as the new guard has been marched oflf, the officer of the day will repair to the offic<» of the Commanding Officer and report for orders. 427. The officer of the day must see that the officer of the guard is furnished with the parole and countersign before retreat. 428. The officer of the day visits the guards during the day, at such times as he may deem necessary, and makes his rounds at night, at least once after twelve o'clock. 429. Upon being relieved, the officer of the day will make such remarks in the report of the officer of the guard as circumstances require, and present the same at head-quarters. 430. Commanders of guards leaving their posts to visit their senti- nels, or on other duty, are to mention their intention, and the pro- bable time of their absence| to the next in command. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 75 O'uards. 431. Tlie officers are to remain constantly at their guards, except while visiting their sentinels, or necessarily engaged elsewhere on their proper duty. 432. Neither officers nor soldiers are to take off their clothing or accoutrements while they are on guard. 433. The officer of the guard must see that the countersign is duly communicated to the sentinels a little before twilight. 434. When a fire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in a garrison, all guards are to be immediately under arms. 435. Inexperienced officers are put on guard as supernumeraries, for the purpose of instruction. 436. Sentinels will not take orders or allow themselves to be relieved, except by an officer or non-commissioned officer of their guard or party, the officer of the day or the Commanding Officer ; in which case the orders will be immediately notified to the Commander of the guard by the officer giving them. 437. Sentinels will report every breach of orders or regulations they are instructed to enforce. 438. Sentinels must keep themselves on the alert, observing every- thing that takes place within sight and hearing of their post. They will carry their arms habitually at support, or on either shoulder, but will never quit them. In wet weather, if there be no sentry-box, they will secure arms. 439- No sentinel shall quit his post or hold conversation not neces- sary to the proper discharge of his duty. 440. All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are required to observe respect toward sentinels. 441. In case of disorder, a sentinel must call out, The guard! and if a fire takes place, he must cry " FireP'' adding the number of his post. If, in either case, the danger be great, he must discharge his firelock before calling out. 76 GENERAL REGULATIONS Chtardt. 442. It is the duty of a sentinel to repeat all calls made from posts more distant from the main body of the guard than his own, and no sentinel will be posted so distant as not to be heard by the guard, either directly or through other sentinels. 443. Sentinels will present arms to General and Field Officers, to the officer of the day, and to the Commanding Officer of the post. To all other officers they will carry arms. 444. When a sentinel, in his sentry-box, sees an officer approach- ing, he will stand at attention^ and, as the officer passes, will salute him, by bringing the left hand briskly to the musket, as high as the right shoulder. 445. The sentinel, at any post of the guard, when he sees any body of troops, or an officer entitled to compliment, approach, must call, " Turn out the guard P' and announce who approaches. 446. Guards do not turn out, as a matter of compliment, after sunset; but sentinels will, when officers in uniform approach, pay them proper attention, by facing to the proper front and standing steady at shouldered arms. This will be observed until the evening is so far advanced that the sentinels begin challenging. 447. After retreat (or the hour appointed by the Commanding Officer), until broad daylight, a sentinel challenges every person who approaches him, taking, at the same time, the position of arms port. He will suffer no person to come nearer than within reach of his bayonet, until the person has given the countersign. 448. A sentinel, in challenging, will call out " Who comes there V* If answered " Friend, with the countersign" and he be instructed to pass persons with the countersign, he will reply : " Advance, friend, with the countersign." If answered " JFVieruf*," he will reply : ** Hcdt, friends! Advance, one, with the countersign." If answered "Relief," ''Patrol," or ''Grand rounds," he will reply: "Hahf Advance, Sergeant {or Corporal), voith the countersign," and satisfy himself that the party is what it represents itself to be. If he have no authority to pass persons with the covmtersign, if the wrong FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. Guards — Grand Rounds. countersign be given, or if tlie persons have not the countersign, he will cause them to stand, and call, " Corporal of the guard T^ 449. In the daytime, when the sentinel before the guard sees the officer of the day approach, he will call, " Turn out the guard! Offi- cer of the dayT' The guard will be paraded, and salute with pre- sented arms. 450. When any person approaches a post of the guard at night, the sentinel before the post, after challenging, causes him to halt, until examined by a non-commissioned officer of the guard. If it be the officer of the day, or any other officer entitled to inspect the guard and to make the rounds, the Non-commissioned Officer will call, " Turn out the guard P^ when the guard will be paraded at shouldered arms, and the officer of the guard, if he thinks necessary, may demand the countersign and parole. 451. The officer of the day, wishing to make the rounds, will take an escort of a non-commissioned officer and two men. When the rounds are challenged by a sentinel, the sergeant will answer: " Grand rounds P^ and the sentinel will reply: " Halt, grand rounds! Advance, Sergeant, with the countersign !^* Upon which the Sergeant advances and gives the countersign. The sentinel will then cry : ** Advance, rounds!^'' and stand at a shoulder till they have passed. 452. When the sentinel before the guard challenges, and is answered "Grand rounds,^' he will reply, "Halt, grand rounds! Turn out the guard; grand rounds .'" Upon which the guard will be drawn up at shouldered arms. The officer commanding the guard will then order a Sergeant and two men to advance ; when within ten paces, the Sergeant challenges. The Sergeant of the grand rounds answers, *' Grand rounds!" The Sergeant of the guard replies, "Advance, Sergeant, with the countersign .'" The Sergeant of the rounds advances alone, gives the countersign, and returns to his round. The Sergeant of the guard calls to his officer, " The countersign is righl /" on which the officer of the guard calls, "Advance, rounds!" The officer of the rounds then advances alone, the guard standing at shouldered arms. The officer of the rounds passes along in front of the guard Military. 7* 78 GENERAL REGULATIONS Forma of G-uard Report. to the officer, who keeps his post on the right, and gives him the parole. He then examines the guard, orders back his escort, and, taking a new one, proceeds in the same manner to other guards. 453. All material instructions given to a sentinel on post, by persons entitled to make grand rounds, ought to be promptly notified to the Commander of the guard. 454. Any General Officer, or the Commander of a post or garrison, may visit the guards of his command, and go to the grand rounds, and be received in the same manner as prescribed for the officer of the day. FORM OF GUARD REPORT. Report of a Guard mounted at — -, on the and relieved on the — . Parole. a a c B a 3 1 a i s 1 si > 1 1 1 < Articles in Charge. IsL^ Ck>unter8ign. - - Received the going articl A. B- Lieut. Is Regimen Detail. __ LIST OF THE GUARD. Reliefs, and when posted. Where posted. l8t Relief. From — to — and — to—. 2d Relief. From — to — and — to — . 8d Relief. From — to — and — to — . Remarks. No. Name. Co. Rt Name. Co. Rt Name. Co. Rt. G'd House Magazine. Q'r Store. 1 2 8 CD. E. F. G. H. A. B. C. 1st 4th 6lh I.J. K. L. M. N. D. E. F. 8.1 2d 5th P. n. G. H. I. 8th 9th 10th 1 9 3 Sergea Corpoi Corpor nt-W any al Y ^V.. .X., z. Co. A., Co. B., Co. C., Ret jimei « it. < Serg'tQ'd. Corp'l " FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 19 Orders and Correspondence. LIST OF PRISONERS. c Confined. No. Names. A Charges. Sentences. When. By whom. 1 2 8 4 6 Remarks. A. B. C, Lieut. 1st Regt. N. Y. S. M. Commanding th.e Guard. ARTICLE XXIIL ORDERS AND CORRESPONDENCE. 455. All orders emanating from the Commander-in-Chief will be styled orders from general head-quarters. 456. The orders of Commanders of armies, divisions, brigades and regiments, are denominated orders of such army, division, &c., and all orders are either general or special. Orders are numbered, general and special, in separate series, each beginning with the year. 457. General orders provide for the organization, discipline, instruction and movement of the troops ; announce the hours for roll- calls and duties ; the number and kind of guard, and the time when they shall be relieved; police regulations, and the prohibitions required by circumstances and localities ; returns to be made, and their forms; laws and regulations for the forces; promotions and appointments ; eulogies or censures to corps or individuals, and, generally, whatever it may be important to make known to the whole command. 458. Special orders are such as do not concern the troops generally, and need not be published to the whole command ; such as relate 80 GENERAL REGULATIONS Orders e subscribed by the Commandant of the regiment or company, or the keeper of such arsenal ( as the case may be), and will be exhibited upon the requisition of any Inspecting Officer, or other officer or person authorized to examine such armory or arsenal, together with the arms, equipments and property deposited in such armory or arsenal. 714. The keepers of all arsenals and armories are expressly forbidden to loan or hire out any arms or property of the state, deposited therein or in their custody, to any person whatever ; or to suffer such arms to be taken from the arsenal or armory except by the order of the proper officer. 715. All officers are prohibited from loaning to or suffering to be used by any i)erson, not belonging to their commands, any arms, ammunition or equipments furnished by the state for the use of the military forces. 716. The keepers of the several arsenals, and the armorers or keepers of all armories, will observe the directions contained in these regulations ( see article Companies ) for the keeping, preservation and cleaning of ordnance, arms and equipments, and the care of ammu- nition. ARTICLE XXXIV. FLAGS, COLORS, STANDARDS, GUIDONS NATIONAL FLAG. 717. The national flag is made of bunting, thirty-six feet fly, and twenty feet hoist, in thirteen horizontal stripes of equal breadth, alternately red and white, beginning with the red. In the upper quarter, next the staff, is the Union composed of a number of white stars, equal to the number of States, on a blue field, one-third the FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 129 Colors of Artillery, Infantry and Rifle Regiments — Camp Colors, length of the flag, extending to the lower edge of the fourth red stripe from the top. The storm flag is twenty feet hy ten feet. The state flag is made of white bunting, twelve feet fly by ten feet hoist, bearing in the centre the arms of the State of New- York. COLORS OF ARTILLERY REGIMENTS. 718. Each regiment of Artillery shall have two colors. The first, or the national color, of stars and stripes, as described for the national flag, and may be either of silk or bunting, with red cord and tassels. The second or regimental color, to be of yellow silk, with the arms of the State of New- York embroidered in silk on the centre, over two cannon crossing, with the number of the regiment above and the letters N. Y. S. M. below their intersection. The cannons regimental number and letters to be in gold embroidery, fringe gold or yellow silk four inches deep. Each color to be six feet six inches fly, and six feet deep on the pike. The pike, including the eagle and ferule, to be nine feet ten inches in length. Cords and tassels, red and yellow silk intermixed. COLORS OF INFANTRY AND RIFLE REGIMENTS. 719. Each regiment of infantry or rifles shall have two colors. The first, or the national color, of stars and stripes, as described for the national flag, and may be either of silk or bunting, with red cord and tassels. The second, or regimental color, to be of blue silk, with the arms of the State of New-Nork embroidered in silk on the centre. The number and name of the regiment, and the letters N, Y. S. M., in gold embroidery underneath the arms. The size of each color to be six feet six inches fly, and six feet deep on the pike. The length of the pike, including the eagle and ferule, to be nine feet ten inches. The fringe gold or yellow silk, four inches deep ; cord and tassels, blue and white silk intermixed. CAMP COLORS. 720. The camp colors are of silk or bunting, eighteen inches square ; white for infantry or rifles, and red for artillery, with the number of the regiment on them. The pole eight feet long. 130 GENERAL REGULATIONS General Officert. STANDARDS AND GUIDONS OF MOUNTED REGIMENTS. 721. Each regiment will have a silken standard, and each company a silken guidon. The standard to bear the arms of the State of New- York, embroidered in silk on a blue ground, with the number and name of the regiment, and the letters N. Y. S. M. in gold embroidery underneath the arms. The flag of the standard to be two feet five inches wide, and two feet three inches on the lance, and to be edged with gold or yellow silk fringe. 722. The flag of the guidon is swallow-tailed, three feet five inches from the lance to the end of the swallow-tail ; fifteen inches to the fork of the swallow-tail, and two feet three inches on the lance. To be half red and half white, dividing at the fork, the red above. On the red, the letters N. Y. S. M. in white; and on the white, the letter of the company in red. The lance of the standards and guidons to be nine feet long, including spear and ferule. 723. Every pike-pole or staff to which the flags, standards, guidons or colors above provided are to be attached, will be surmounted with a gilt eagle. ARTICLE XXXV. GENERAL OFFICERS. 724. To the General Officers entrusted with the command of divi- sions and brigades, the Commander-in-Chief will look, not only for the discipline of the uniformed forces therein, and their constant preparation for active service, but likewise, in case of insurrection, invasion, call in aid of the civil authorities, or other emergency, for the immediate and most advantageous disposal of every force placed under their control 726. With a view to these objects, it is necessary that officers in these important commands should be well instructed in their duties, and that they should carefully select comi>etent Staff Officers to aid them in the staff departments and upon the field. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 131 Oeneral Officers. 726. General Officers in command will be expected to render them- selves competent to manoeuvre their commands in the evolutions of the Line, and to instruct their officers in the duties of their stations and the tactics of the arm to which they belong. They will also be expected to understand the details of duty in camp and on marches, and the method of handling troops in the field, so as to develop the highest efficiency of the various arms. 727. As part of their duty, they will make themselves acquainted with the force and range of artillery and small arms, the principles applicable to the construction of field fortifications and defensive works, the composition and duties of guards, outposts, pickets and light troops, and the quantity of military stores required for the use of the troops when on duty. 728. Officers in command of division and brigade districts will also keep themselves well informed of the number and description of the uniformed forces of the militia in their respective districts, so as to be able to afford to the Commander-in-Chief promptly, at any time, a correct statement of the strength, discipline, equipment and prepara- tion for immediate service, of any corps in their command. 729. General Officers, in command of districts on the frontiers and sea coast, will also obtain an accurate military knowledge of the features of the country in their respective districts ; of its means of defence and assailable points; of all fortified places therein, and positions which may be advantageously fortified or strengthened; and of every particular which may increase the power of acting against an enemy. 730. Brigadier-Generals, on disbanding any company in their respective brigades, will report the fact to the Adjutant-General's office, specifying in such report the letter of the company and the number of the regiment, and the names of the officers of such company. 731. Commandants of brigades, before they approve of the organi- zation of companies, will cause them to be inspected and mustered 132 GENERAL REGULATIOXS GenercU Staff. by the Brigade Inspector of the brigade, or other oflBcer to be desig- nated by the Brigadier-General. The muster roll will show the age, residence and nativity of each volunteer, and whether he is a citizen or belongs to any other military organization- Such muster roll will be appended to the application for organization, and transmitted to the Adjutant-General. 732. General Officers in command will transmit to the Adjutant- General copies of all general orders, issued by them respectively, within five days after such issue. {See paragraph 474.) 733. Notice of all encampments for instruction and annual parades, by brigade or regiment, of the uniformed military forces of the state, shall be given by the officer ordering the same to the Commandant of the division, at least fifteen days prior to such encampment or parade. ARTICLE XXXVI. GENERAL STAFF. 734. The General Staff comprises all the officers concerned in regu- lating the details of the service and furnishing the forces with tho means necessary for their subsistence, comfort, mobility and action. These officers act in the name of tho Commanders under whom they are placed, or perform their functions according to the rules and regulations for the government of their respective departments. 735. The General Staff is : 1. The Adjutant-General's Department. 2. The Inspector-General. 3. The Commissary-General's Department. 4. The Department of Engineers. B, The Judge- Advocate's Department. 6. The Medical Department. 7. The Quartermaster's Department. 8. The Pay Department. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 133 Theory of the Staff — Summary of its Duties. THEORY OF THE STAFF SUMMARY OF ITS DUTIES. 736. The General Staff may be considered the central point of military administration. 737. It is the source whence proceed all general orders for the forces, the orders of detail, of instruction, of movement; and whence issue the general regulations for the service. 738. The source likewise of all general measures relative to the construction of fortifications. 739. For providing and distributing all ttie various articles under the denomination of ordnance, ordnance stores, small arms and mill, tary equipments. 740. For providing medical supplies. 741. For the supply of quarters, of fuel, and the transportation required for the forces ; and finally 742. For all supplies requisite for the use of the military service and the land defence. 743. The officers of the General Staff accordingly embrace that Class of commissioned officers who are appointed to perform such duties pursuant to the laws and regulations governing the military service, and devolving on each respectively according to their rank and the nature of their appointments. 744. Staff Officers, as such, are the organs through which their respective Commanders or Chiefs communicate orders and instruc- tions, either verbally or in writing; and a Staff Officer will add " by order of," or " by command of," such a one, or premise " I am com- manded or instructed by," &c. These forms may be dispensed with if the person to whom the order is addressed be junior to the Staff Officer, and always in mere matters of course, as on parades. This paragraph is applicable to Chiefs of Staffs and to their assistants, also %o Aids-de-Camp and Adjutants. The ofl&cers of the administrative or Military. 12 134 GENERAL REGULATIONS Theory cf the Sinff — Summary of tig Dutiea. disbursing departments of the Staff, as such, are not contemplated by it. 745. The duties of a Chief of Staff, including always his assistants, whatever may be the corps to which he is attached, are active and sedentary. 746. Active duties consist principally in establishing camps, visiting guards and posts, inspecting troops, inspecting guards and detach- ments, forming parades and lines of battle, the conduct or control of deserters and prisoners (from the enemy), making reconnoissances, and in general the performance of such other active duties as may be specially assigned. 747. Sedentary duties, or the business of the bureau, as pub- lishing orders in writing, making up written instructions and the transmission of them, reception of reports and returns, disposing of them, forming tables showing the state and position of the corps or its several parts, regulating details of service, corresponding with the corps, detachments, or individual officers serving under the orders of the same Commander, corresponding with the administrative or disbursing departments relative to the wants of the troops, and finally, the methodical arrangement and care of the records and papers of his office. 748. A Staff Officer, charged with a particular expedition or recon- noissance, accompanied by a detachment, the Commandant of which may or may not be his superior, will, without assuming the command, have a right to require that the latter should make all proper dis- positions of the detachment to protect hira in his opemtions ; and the Commandant of the detachment shall refer to the Staff Officer for the route of march and the periods of halting and of marching, no matter which of them be the superior. 749. All Staff Officers draw their swords and salute at review, both when the battalion is brought to a present, and when passing the Koviewing Officer. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 135 Theory of the Staff— Summary of its Duties. 750. StafF Officers, when not otherwise engaged in the duties of their departments, will attend dress parade and take post and salute as at review with the exception of the Adjutant whose post is already- assigned. 751. In columns of manoeuvre and en route, the Adjutant is the only officer of the regimental staff, and the officers acting as Assist- ant Adjutants-General, and the Aides-de-Camp, are the only officers of the division and brigade staffs who draw their swords. 752. With the exception of the Adjutant, whose place is prescribed, the StafF Officers of a division, brigade or regiment in column, en route, are near their respective Commanders, unless their duties should require their attendance elsewhere ; Medical officers may be required with the sick or their supplies ; Officers of Engineers with their corps, and of the Quartermaster's department with their trains. The senior StafF Officers in each department should be habitually Avith the Commander of a column en route, or of manoeuvre. 753. In a column of manoeuvre for instruction, StafF Officers, when required, will act as aids and assistants in the manoeuvres ; and when not so required, will accompany their respective Commanders, or take such other positions as may be assigned them. 754. StafF Officers, on parades in the streets of a city or town and other occasions of ceremony, where no other position is assigned to them, will take post according to the order of precedence of their departments ; division and brigade staffs, in one or more ranks, two paces in rear of their Generals ; the aids de-camp on the left of the front rank; regimental staffs (with the exception of the Adjutant and Engineer), in the rear of the regiment, in one rank, the chaplain on the left ; the Engineer officer will be in charge of his corps. 755. The Staff Officers of divisions, brigades and regiments, although arranged in departments and liable to be detached for duty in such departments, are considered as officers of their respective divisions, brigades and regiments. Regimental Staff Officers arp therefore entitled to vote at elections for field officers c/ regimen*is. 136 GENERAL REGULATIONS Adjutant'General*« Department — Adjtitant-Oeneral. ARTICLE XXXVIL THE adjutant-general's DEPARTMENT. 1. Adjutant- General. 756. The Adjutant-General is the Cliief of the Staff of the Com- mander-in-Chief. 757. He accompanies the Commander-in-Chief in all his reviews and inspections. Everything relating to the effective state of the troops, to formation, instruction and discipline, and to ordinary or extraordinary and official returns relative to these different matters, falls within the department over which the Adjutant-General presides. 758. He is the regular channel through which Commanders of corps and Chiefs of departments communicate with the Commander-in- Chief ; and all orders, special instructions and general regulations, issued by the Commander-in-Chief relative to the organization, discipline or instruction of the militia, are prepared, addressed to the Commanders of corps, and published by the Adjutant- General conformably to the direction of the Commander-in-Cliief. 759. It is the duty of the Adjutant-General, on or before the fifteenth day of January in each year, to report in writing, to the Commander- in-Chief, the state of the militia, as to its strength in officers, non- commissioned officers, musicians and privates ; the number of companies, regiments, brigades and divisions of the same, and the total strengtli of each ; and the strength of eacli arm, as organized ; and also so as to show whether each corps is doing duty in the arm in which it is organized. He will report, also, the number, character and quality of the arms, accoutrements and other property of the state in the possession of tlie militia, describing the same under the head of the respective division, brigade, regiment and company. 760. He shall also report, in connection therewith, the amount of commutation tax and fines collected in each regimental district of the state, and how the same has been expended, as shall appear from the returns of the Regimental Boards of Auditors and from the reports of the Treasurers of the various counties of the state ; and may make, FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 137 Adjutant-OeneraPs Department — Adjutant'General. generally, such recommendations and suggestions as lie may deem calculated to enure to the benefit of the service. 761. It is the duty of the Adjutant-General, under the laws of the United States, to make a return of the militia, uniformed and ununi- formed, and of their arms and equipments, to the President of the United States on or before the first Monday of January in each year. 762. The Adjutant-General is charged with the duty of prescribing the annual course of military instruction for the military forces of the state, and supervising the execution of the same. He will scrutinize all the reports and returns required to be made to him in respect thereto, and make a statement of all delinquent oflBicers to the Com- mander-in-Chief. Should he deem it desirable, he will give his per- sonal attendance and services at parades and encampments, to advance the improvement of the troops in tactics and discipline, on which occasions he will act as principal Instructor. 763. To the Adjutant- General will be sent, and in his office will be deposited, all bonds for the issue of arms, munitions of war or other property of the state ; all reports and returns of heads of Staff depart- ments and Inspecting Officers ; all returns of elections and appointments to office ; the proceedings of all Courts of Inquiry, Courts Martial and Military Boards ; applications for the organization of companies ; applications and communications from officers, and all other writings and papers which are required to be transmitted to the Commander- in-Chief, or to be returned to or preserved at general head- quarters. 764. The Adjutant-General will prepare and distribute all the proper blanks to be used by officers of the Line or in his own department. 765. It is the duty of the Adjutant- General to prepare and transmit to the various Commissioned Officers of the service their proper commissions, and in a book, which shall be the roster of the militia, to register the same, and to note therein, as they occur, all changes by promotions, resignations, removals, cashiering and deaths ; by con- solidations and disbanding of subdivisions of the forces, or from* any other cause. Military. 12* 138 GENERAL REGULATIONS Adjutant-Generars Department — Adjutant'Generai- 766. The Adjutant-General, in a book to be provided for that purpose, shall preserve in his department a record of all the ordnance, arms, accoutrements and munitions of war issued under the orders of the Commander-in-Chief to the troops, specifying in each case the number and date of tne order of issue, the number and character of the arms, &c., issued, the name of the officer or person to whom issued, the letter of the company, the number of the regiment, brigade or division for which issued, the number, date and penalty of the bond for issue, and the name and title of the bondsmen. 767. The Adjutant-General, before filing any bond for the issue of arms, &c., will require, in every instance, that there be a prox)er surety or sureties thereto, and that the approval thereof by the General of the Brigade in which the arms, &c., are required, or by the Commissary- General, is endorsed thereon, and that such surety or sureties have properly justified. 7G8. The Adjutant-General shall also, in a book to be kept in his department, preserve a record of all the ordnance, arms, accoutrements, munitions of war and other military property belonging to the state in the various arsenals of the state, and shall keep the same current by corrections from the monthly returns of the Commissary-General. 769. The Adjutant-General will, from time to time, as the occasion arises, issue the proper orders for the return of ordnance, arms or military stores, or for the prosecution of bonds given as security for the same, where it shall appear from the records in his office tliat such property is liable to injury or loss, or is not properly secured, or where it is no longer required for tlie purpose for which it was issued. 770. Upon the reception, by the Adjutant-General, of the receipt provided for in } 22 of these Regulations, he shlill forthwith note the same upon the bond given for the safe keeping of the property surrendered under said section, and direct the successor receiving said property to file his bond, with sufficient sureties, approved as pro- vided by law, in the office of the Adjutant-General within twenty days thoreufter. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 139 Inspectors of Divisions, Brigades, and Adjutants of Regiments. 2. Inspectors of Divisions, Brigades and Adjutants of Regiments. 'ill. The Division and Brigade Inspectors are the chiefs of the Division and Brigade Staffs, and they act as Assistant Adjutant-Gene- rals of the respective divisions and brigades in which they serve. As such, they form tlie division or brigade hne; transcribe, issue and serve orders, and keep the order-books and other necessary books, when required ; inspect and form guards ; prepare and keep the neces- sary rosters, and regulate the duties depending upon the roster, under the direction of their respective Generals. In manoeuvres, they are specially charged with the duty of posting the markers, and marking the alignments in evolutions of the Line, and in this duty they will be assisted by the other officers of the Staff, They will also perform such other duties as devolve upon Assistant Adjutant-Generals, according to military usage. 772. Division and Brigade Inspectors make such inspections and inspection returns as are provided for by law or required by regula- tion, or as may be ordered, from time to time, by the Commander- in-Chief, the Commandants of the divisions or brigades to which they are attached, or the Adjutant-General or Inspector-General. 773. As the duty is devolved on the Adjutant- General, by the laws of the United States, to make a return of the Militia, with their arms, accoutrements and ammunition, to the President of the United States, on or before the 1st Monday of January in each year, the several Brigade Inspectors will be prompt in making full returns at the earliest practicable day, on or before the first day of December in each year, to enable him to comply with the provisions of said laws. 774. In case of the absence of the proper Inspector of the Brigade (or other Brigade Inspector specially assigned), from an encampment or annual parade for inspection, the Division Inspector, if present, shall act as Inspector of the Brigade, and if he be not present, it shall be the duty of the Commanding Officer to designate some officer to perform the duties of Brigade Inspector. 140 GENERAL REGULATIONS In»pection$— Generally. 775. The Adjutants of regiments are chiefs of the Regimental Staffs, and perform within their regiments the duties required of them, hy the books of tactics and these regulations, in all parades and manoeu- vres, and in the forming of guards, &c. They will also attend to such duties in the regiment as are imposed upon officers of the Adjutant- General's department attached to divisions and brigades; and do such other service as may be ordered by the Commandant of the regiment, or a superior officer in the department, consistent with the nature of the office. INSPECTIONS GENERALLY. 776. It is through the Inspecting Officers that the Commander-in- Chief is to be made acquainted with the actual state and condition of the forces, and, more especially, the character and proficiency of the officers. 777. It being an object of the highest importance to the efficiency of the service that the Inspecting Officer should make a complete and thorough examination of the uniform, arms, equipments, num- bers and discipline of the forces, Commanding Officers will see that he has every facility for such examination afforded to him. 778. The Inspecting Officer should have an intimate acquaintance with the regulations and rules of the service, especially those relating to his own functions ; and an accurate and familiar knowledge of tactics. He should conduct liimself with firmness, discretion and independence ; but while rigidly scrutinizing all matters directed to be inspected, it is indispensable also that he have a sensitive regard to the rights of others. He will not, therefore, assume to himself, a command of the forces inspected, or censure any officer or soldier upon the field ; but will make a fearless, frank and impartial report of the results of the inspection to the officer by whom it was ordered, or to whom returns are required to be made. It is obvious, from the nature of the duties required of the Inspect- ing Officer, that the office is one of peculiar delicacy and resjionsibility ; and Officers in command, and Inspecting Officers, are expected to FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 141 TJie In»pector- General. manifest those qualities of courtesy and forbearance wMch should always characterize the officer and gentleman. ARTICLE XXXVIII. OF THE INSPECTOR-GENERAL. 779. It shall be the duty of the Inspector-General to visit, at least once in every two yeare, each regimental district in the state. He shall critically inspect, as often as he may deem necessary, every branch connected with the military service, including armories, arsenals and military store-houses ; and he shall also attend to the organization of the militia, and report to general head-quarters the improvement in discipline and tactical instruction of the uniformed forces. 780. Commandants of regiments and companies shall furnish to the Inspector-General, such information as he may require as to the number and kind of arms, equipments and military property of the state issued to their respective regiments and companies ; and, at the conclusion of the inspection of any armory, arsenal or military store- house, if he find the property which ought to be kept therein, or any part of it, missing, injured, unfit for use or deficient in any respect, he shall forthwith report the facts in respect thereto to the Com- mander-in-Chief. 781. It shall be his duty, after the first day of November in each year, to inspect the tents and camp equipage belonging to the state, and report any deficiency therein, to the Commander-in-Chief, on or before the first day of January thereafter. 782. In his annual report he shall state what General and Field Officers have been in command of parades or encampments, what changes of General or Field Officers have been made, and what degree of improvement has been attained by both officers and men, and whether the general regulations have been observed, together with such suggestions as he may see fit to make. 783. To the Inspector-General will be referred, by order of the Commander-in-Chief, such matters as require an examination at a 142 GENERAL REGULATIONS TJie Inspector- General, distance from the general head-quarters, for the information of the Commander-in-Chief ; and it will be the duty of the Inspector-Gene- ral, upon such reference, to report upon the qualifications of persons named to the Commander-in-Chief, for appointment to military office, and also upon the possession of the necessary requisites by the appli- cants for the organization of companies. 784 The Division and Brigade Inspectors, whenever required by the Inspector-General, shall report to liim the condition of their respective divisions or brigades- 785. To ascertain whether the troops have been properly instructed in the exercises and evolutions of the field, the Inspector- General will cause them to be exercised in the manoeuvres required to be practiced during the year, as prescribed by regulations ; and he will give his instructions, as to the exercises, to the Commanding Officer, who will issue all necessary orders and directions to the troops for their exe- cution. 786. The Inspector-General shall, at least once in every two years, examine the book of proceedings of the Board of Auditors of each regiment, and the accounts filed with the Secretary of such Board during the two years previous, or since the last examination made by the Inspector-General ; and he shall carefully compare the book of proceedings with the accounts. He shall also examine the warranto drawn by the Board of Auditors, in the possession of the County Treasurer ; and he shall specially report to the Commander-in-Chief whether the proceedings of the Board of Auditors are regularly and properly entered ; and whether the warrants are in due form ; and whether any military funds have been drawn from the county trea- sury for improper purposes, or by persons not entitled thereto ; and the amount paid into the county treasury for commutations and fines during the two years previous, or since the last preceding report of the Inspector-General. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 143 The Commisssary-General. ARTICLE XXXIX. OF THE commissary-general's DEPARTMENT. 787. The duties of the Commissary-General, as defined by law, embrace in part the duties of the ordnance department, and in part those of the Quartermaster's department, as such duties are pre- scribed by the regulations for the army of the United States. 788. He is specially charged with the preservation, issue and trans- portation of the arms, equipments and other military property belonging to this state. 789. It is his duty, by authority of the Commander-in-Chief, to issue arms, equipments, camp equipage and ammunition, from the several arsenals and armories under his charge, and to make monthly reports, of all issues made by him, to the general head- quarters. 790. The Commissary-General shall take receipts for arms, equip- ments and property issued by him ; and officers to whom the same shall be delivered are enjoined to execute and promptly transmit the proper receipts to the Commissary-General. 791. The Commissary-General will transmit to the Commander-in- Chief duplicates of his statements of accounts, as audited from time to time by the Comptroller of the state, within ten days after they shall have been thus audited. He shall also transmit to the Com- mander-in-Chief statements of the sales of old arms and military stores, and of the sums received therefor, within ten days after any such sales, 792. It is also his duty, when ordered by the Commander-in-Chief, to cause prosecutions to be instituted upon bonds given for arms or other military property, whenever there shall be a refusal or neglect to obey the order for the return of the same ; and he shall report all prosecutions, commenced by him upon any such bond, to the Com- mLander-in-Chief. 793. He may also employ counsel or attorneys to conduct such prosecutions, in the name of the people of this state, and may com- promise the claim upon such bonds, or discontinue the prosecution thereof, with the consent of the Commander-in-Chief. 144 GENERAL REGULATIONS The Commisaory- General. 794. He shall also take the proi)er measures to recover the posses- sion or the value of arms, or other military property of this state, in the hands of any person or persons who shall not have given bonds for the same. 795. No arms or equipments shall be issued to any officer, i)er8on or body of men, not belonging to the uniformed and organized militia of this state, unless, 1. In cases of invasion or insurrection, or imminent danger thereof. 2. To arm a guard for the protection of a jail or prison, or to arrest, detain or have in safe keeping a prisoner or prisoners, or to enforce the judgment or decree of a court. 3. In cases of riot or resistance to process, or apprehension of imminent danger thereof. 796. All applications from others than tne organized militia, made in pursuance of any law, for arms or military equipage, shall be made to the Commander-in-Chief, and shall specify the particular exigency or cause of such application, and the purpose for which, and the person for whom, the same are required ; and such appli- cation shall be verified on oath of the person making the 797. Arms and equipage issued or loaned to any person or persons, other than the uniformed and organized militia, shall be returned, to the arsenal or place from whence they were issued, within ninety- days from such issue, unless otherwise specially ordered by the Com- mander-in-Chief, for additional periods of ninety days each. 798. The Commissary-General shall keep a correct roster of all officers of the Quartermaster's department, attached to divisions, brigades and regiments, and may correspond with thom and require the performance by thom of such duties connected with his office, within the commands to wlxich they are attached, as are imposed by these regulations. 799. The Commissary-General shall also keep in his office a book containing a correct roster of the several Commandants of divisions. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 146 The Commissary-General. brigades, regiments and uniformed companies of the militia of tMs state, and in the same shall note the quantity and kind of arms and equipments issued to each officer, when they were issued, and where they are deposited or kept ; and the Commandants of brigades shall, from time to time, as changes shall take place in the command of regiments and companies in their brigades, report the same to the Commissary-General, with the name, rank and residence of the person who shall be elected or appointed to fill any vacancy, as Commandant of a regiment or company. 800. If any change in command shall take place in any regiment oi company furnished with arms or equipments belonging to this state, the Commissary-General shall immediately require a renewal of the bond given therefor ; and, unless a new bond shall be given, approved according to law, for such arms or equipments, within ninety days thereafter, he shall order the return thereof forthwith to such arsenal or officer as he may designate. But this paragraph shall not apply to cases where a city or incorporated village of this state shall have become surety for such arms or equipments. 801. The Commissary-General shall also, in like manner, require bonds given for arms or equipments to be renewed whenever the surety thereto shall die or become insolvent, or remove out of the state, and shall forthwith give notice to the Commander-in-Chief of the making of such requirement. 802. All commissioned officers to whom any arms or military pro- perty of this state shall be issued, or who shall come into command of any regiment or company to which the same may have been issued, or otherwise in the possession thereof, shall make reports to the Commissary-General, in respect thereto, at such times and in such manner as he shall require. 803. The officers to whom tents and camp equipage shall be issued for any encampment, or for other special purpose, shall, unless other- wise ordered, at the close of the encampment or special service for which they were issued, deliver the same to the officer and at the Military. 13 146 GENERAL REGULATIONS The CommUaary-General. place designated by the Commissary-General ; and unless otherwise 8i)ecially ordered, such tents and camp equipage shall be returned to the Commissary-General forthwith, at the close of such encampment. 804. In case of invasion or insurrection, or whenever the military forces are called to aid the civil authority, the Commissary-General is authorized to issue, upon the requisition of the Commandant of the military forces on duty, such arms, equipments and ammvmition as may be required by such Commandant for the use of the military forces so on duty during such emergency. The Commissary-General will take a receipt for the property of the state so issued, and imme- diately report such issue to the Commander-in-Chief ; and he will require the arms and equipments so issued, and such of the ammunition issued as shall not have been required for use by the troops, to be returned to him immediately upon the ceasing of the exigency upon which they were issued. It will be the duty of the Commandant of the troops to see that such return is promptly and accurately made. 805. The Commissary-General is also authorized to issue ammu- nition for the practice of the troops under these limitations : 1. To the Artillery, annually, for practice, three kegs of gun- powder and twenty balls for each gun, for batteries of four pieces or less ; and two kegs of powder and fifteen balls for every gun exceeding four, in batteries of more than four guns. Where cartridges are made up for Artillery, the cost of making will be deducted — the cartridges furnished will be about forty for six pounder guns. The Commandants of companies will make the requisitions upon the Commissary-General for ammunition for the Artillery. 2. To the Infantry and Riflemen, annually, for practice, twenty rounds of blank cartridge, or ten rounds of ball cartridge, or ten of blank and five of ball, for each man. The requisitions for ammuni- tion for the Infantry and Rifles will be made by the Commandants of regiments upon the Commissary-General, and will specify the number of men, duly uniformed and equipped, belonging to and doing duty iu such regiment. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 147 Engineerti' Departm-ent. 3. If more ammunition is required for use or practice by the troojis than is above authorized to be issued by the Commissary-General, application must be made to the Commander-in-Chief. 806. The Commissary-G-eneral will see that no issue or loan of arms, equipments, ammunition or other military property of the state, is made from any arsenal, armory or storehouse in his charge, except as provided in the two preceding sections, without the special order of the Commander-in-Chief. 807. To a section of light artillery, when duly organized and uniformed, will be issued by order of the Commander-in-Chief, two pieces of artillery, with the other proper arms and equipments, upon the giving of the required security. ARTICLE XL. DEPARTMENT OF ENGINEERS. 808. This department consists of the Engineer-in- Chief, Division Engineers, Brigade Engineers, Regimental Engineers, and one Sergeant and nine Sappers and Miners to each regiment. 809. The duties of this department comprise reconnoitering and surveying for military purposes ; the planning, laying out and super- intending works for attack and defence of places ; for the passage of rivers ; for the movements and operations of armies in the field ; the laying out of camp grounds ; the collection, arrangement and pre- servation of all reports, memoirs, plans and drawings relating to these specific duties, or any other duties which may be assigned to them. 810. It is recommended that all appointments of Division, Brigade or Regimental Engineers be made from those only who are practical Engineers or otherwise competent to perform all the duties which may be imposed upon or expected of them. 811. The Engineer intrusted with the laying out of any camp or the construction of any works, where the same is practicable, shall make a plan or diagram thereof, embracing a topographical view of 148 GENERAL REGULATIONS Engineers'' Department. the surrounding country, whicli plan or diagram shall be delivered to the Commanding Officer, if of a camp, previous to such encamp- ment, or otherwise as soon as it can be completed ; and shall, within thirty days thereafter, make a copy of such plan or diagram, with explanatory notes, and forward the same to the Engineer-in-Chief, at his place of residence. 812. The Sappers and Miners, attached to the command in which the service is required, shall be under the direction of the senior Engineer in charge, subject, however, to the orders of the Commanding Officer. 813. Officers and men in the Engineer department may be required to do duty previous and preparatory to encampments for discipline and instruction ; and also to attend meetmgs for instruction and improvement, in the various duties of their department ; as well as at the parades, encampments and drills provided by law, when so ordered by the Commandant of the brigade or force to wliich they are attached, or the Officer of Engineers of the brigade or regiment to which they belong. These duties are in addition to other duties which may be required in active service. 814. The superior Officer of Engineers, serving with an army, corpg, division, brigade or smaller body, will receive his orders from the Commandant thereof, and will communicate to him any orders he may receive from a superior officer in his own department. If the Engineer Officer be acting under orders from his department, issued by authority of a Commanding Officer, on duty, superior in rank to that of the Commandant of the force with which such Engineer is serving, it will be the duty of such Commandant to make such dispositions of his forces, to aid the Engineer Officer in the performance of the duty required of him, as may be necessary. 815. An Officer of Engineers, directed to superintend any works to be constructed by troops, will point out what is to be done and how .it is to bo done, and will maintain such a supervision as will enable him to see that it is done correctly. It will be the duty of the officer FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 149 Engineers'' Department. having charge of the detachment to execute the work accordingly. The command of the troops will be with the Officer of the Line, unless otherwise specially ordered, according to the nature of the case. The detail of troops, for works to be carried on under the superintendence of Officers of Engineers, will be furnished on the requisition of the senior Engineer, addressed to the Officer in command of the troops. The requisition will specify the number of men required for labor, the time and place of assembling for service, and the duration of such service. 816. When connected with a force in the field, Engineers engaged in surveys and reconnoissances will report their operations therein, and also the execution of all other duties, to their immediate superior of the department at the head-quarters of the force, and such superior will report directly to the Commanding officer. 817. The Chief of the Corps of Engineers, or any superior officer of said corps, may require from a junior officer thereof reports of any particular service upon which such junior may be or may have been engaged. 818. Orders for the Engineers may be transmitted from general head-quarters, by the Chief of the department, to any subordinate officer therein, by direction of the Commander-in-Chief. 819. The Officers and men of the Engineer Corps require, for the proper discharge of their duties, a careful course of instruction in the general principles of engineering, as applied to the military service, in the construction of fortified places, field works, bridges and roads ; the attack and defence of military posts, towns, villages, &c. ; and also, as a special duty required of them in peace, the proper and practical laying out of camps of instruction and discipline, including any particular duties, connected therewith, that may be required of them. The superior Officer of Engineers, in each brigade and regi- ment, will be responsible for the instruction of Ms corps and its efficiency. MiLITART. 13* 150 GENERAL REGULATIONS The Jvdge-Advocate. 820. The men of the Engineer Corps should be selected with a reference to their intelligence, activity and skill in the arts connected with the duties of the corps. 821. The tools and implements of each regimental corps of Sappers and Miners will be, four axes, two saws and two pickaxes. The Commandants of regiments will see that provision is made for the furnishing of the Engineer Corps with these tools and implements, and that they are kept in a safe place, at all times ready for immediate use. 822. The Engineer-in-Chief, on or before the 15th day of December, in each year, shall report to the Commander-in-Chief the operations of his department for the preceding year, together with such suggestions relative to its affairs as he may deem expedient ; to which he shall append all the maps, plans, diagrams, profiles, projections, or other sketches, which may have been forwarded to him, by the various officers of his department, during the year. Should he vacate his office by resignation, or otherwise, previous to his annual report, he will deliver all maps, plans, sketches, diagrams, &c., as shall then be on file in his department, together with all books, papers and other property pertaining to such office, and a record of all the official transactions of his department, to his successor, if he shall have been appointed, who is required to make such annual report. If no successor shall have been appointed, then he shall forward the same to the Adjutant-doncrarb department. ARTICLE XLI. THE judge-advocate's DEPARTMENT. 823. The duties of the Judge- Advocate are so intimately connected with the administration of justice as to require, on the part of the person filling such office, intelligence, experience, impartiality and firmness. Therefore, it is recommended that no person be appointed to this office whose education has not fully qualified him to discharge these high and important duties. 824. Whenever a Judge-Advocate shall receive his commission, he is roqiiired, without delay, to make himself acquainted, by diligent FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 151 TJie Judge-Advocate. study, with the settled principles of judicial procedure, the" military laws and regulations governing the service, and the customs which have been established therein. 825. He is to direct all prosecutions provided for ; and his conduct will be the subject of scrutiny and observation by those to whom the law has committed the revision of the proceedings of military courts. 826. He is to furnish the accused with a copy of the charges and specifications which are to be exhibited against him, a copy of the order constituting and convening the court, together with a detail of the members, and notice of the time and place where the court will meet for the trial, when required so to do by the officer ordering the court. 827. He will correct and arrange the testimony that may be required, and present the evidence before the court in a succinct and connected manner. 828. He wiU counsel the court as to the form of its proceedings and the nature and limits of its authority. 829. He will admonish the accused, and guard him in the exercise of his legal rights. 830. As the Law Officer of the court, he must on no account inti- mate his opinion as to the guilt or innocence of the accused. 831. He may point out in what manner the evidence applies to the facts in issue ; but this should be done in an address delivered in open court, so that the accused may have an opportunity to reply. 832. He is to have the preparation, care and disposition of the re- cords, and the custody and safe keeping of all papers connected with the trial. 833. It is his duty, previous to the ordering of a court martial, when required so to do, to prepare and correct the charges and specifi- cations against all persons to be tried, stating the offence in an accurate 152 GENERAL REGULATIONS Tha Judge-Advoeate. and specific manner, carefully giving the dates and places ; and while all superfluous matter should be excluded, the specifications must be made to support the charge. 834. The Judge- Advocate will take down the proceedings of the court in writing. In this record he must inscribe the order consti- tuting the court, the time of its assembly, the names of members present, the introduction of the accused, the fact that he was asked if he had any objection to any of the members, his answer thereto, and the action of the court thereon ( if any ), the fact that the members of the court were sworn in his presence, that the accusation was read to him, the plea to each specification and charge, the action of the court on the special pleas, the introduction of each witness, and the fact that he was sworn. All the evidence must be recorded as given ; and any incidental questions raised, and the decision of the court thereon, must appear, and the finding and sentence of the court must also be recorded. 835. After the adjournment of a court-martial, at the close of the business of each day, and before the next meeting of the court, the Judge- Advocate shall make a fair copy of the proceedings, which he shall continue thus regularly to engross till the conclusion of the trial, when the whole shall be read over by him to the court, before the members proceed to deliberate and form their opinions. 836. The record, duly authenticated by the signature of the Presi- dent and Judge-Advocate, he will transmit without delay to the Officer ordering the court. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 153 The Judge-Advocaie. MANNER OF SITTING AT A COURT MARTIAL.=* 837. The following form will hereafter be observed in recording the proceedings of courts martial of the militia of this state. Proceedings of a court martial held at in the county of in the State of New- York, by virtue of tho following order, viz : [ Here insert a copy of the order instituting the court. ] * This diagram is prepared for a court martial, for the trial of General Officers, and composed of five members. 154 GENERAL REGULATIONS The JudgO'AdDOcate. Albany, jlprU The court met pursuant to the above order. Present : 1. General of the Brigade, President. 2. Colonel of the Regiment, )j^^^^^ 3. Colonel of the Regiment, f Colonel Judge Advocate. Marshal. The court then proceeded to the trial of Colonel A. B., of the regiment brigade division of the militia of this state, who, being called into court, and having heard the order read, was asked if he had any objection to any of the members named in the order, to which he replied in the ( affirmative or negative. )* The court was then duly sworn, in the presence of the accused, who was arraigned on the following charges and specifications, viz : [ Here insert the charges and si>ecifications. ] To which the accused pleaded, as follows : Not guilty, to the first specification. Not guilty, to the second specification. Not guilty, to the charge. All persons required to give evidence were directed to withdraw, and remain in waiting until called for. Lieut. A. B. , of the regiment, a witness for the prosecution, being duly sworn, says^: That on the day of &c., &c. Question by the Judge Advocate ? Answer . Question by the accused ? Answer . * [ If any member of the court be challenged, state which one, and the groanda thereof, and proceedings, and dispoaitiou of the challenge. ] FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 155 The Judge-Advocate. Question "by the court ? Answer . The prosecution was here closed and the accused produced the following evidence : Capt. C. D., of the regiment, a witness for the defence, being duly sworn, says : That on the day of , &c., &c. Question by the accused ? Answer . Question by the Judge Advocate ? Answer . Question by the court ? Answer . The accused having no further testimony to offer, requested to be indulged with days to prepare his final defence. The court granted his request, and adjourned to meet again at o'clock, A. M., on the day of , 18 . SECOND DAY. Wednesday^ The court met pursuant to adjournment. Present : [ Here insert the names of those who are present. J The proceedings having been read over to the court by the Judge- Advocate, the accused, A. B., made the following address in hia defence : [ Here insert the defence, or, if it be too long, it may be marked and annexed. ] The court then closed, and proceeded to deliberate on tne testimony adduced, and pronounced the following 156 GENERAL REGULATIONS TVie Judge-Advocate. SENTENCE. The court having maturely weighed and considered the evidence in support of the charges against the accused, Colonel A. B., of the — regiment of , and also his defence, and the evidence adduced iu support of it, is of opinion and finds that, &c., and does therefore, &.c. Signed, , President. [Here insert the number of days' service for each member and offi- cer of the coui-t, certified by the president of the court.] 838. All officers, to whom an allowance is to be made from the treasury fbr services rendered in attending courts martial or courts of inquiry, are directed to observe the following regulations : The bills of all the members of the court, and also of the Judge- Advo- cate and Marshal, must be made out by the Judge-Advocate, in terms of days' service, and, where it is practicable, on the same paper, and be certified by the presiding officer. The order appoint- ing the court, or a certified copy thereof, must be attached to the bill, together with a receipt, or an order on the treasurer, signed by all the persons interested. Directions to whom the money is to be transmitted must in all cases be given. The bill will be inclosed by the Judge- Advocate to the Adjutant-General. 839. No charge being allowed for mileage or travel, the bills should embrace the time actually employed on duty, at the rate of two dol- lars for each day so employed. 840. Each Division and Brigade Judge-Advocate shall annually, on the first day of December in each year, make a report to the Judge- Advocate-Qeneral of all courts martial (other than Regimental and Brigade Courts for the trial of delinquencies, &c.) ordered by the Commandants of their respective districts, the names of the members composing the same, the names of the persons accused, the nature of ihfS charges preferred against them, and the result of the trial. 841. The Judge- Advocate-General shall, on the fifteenth day of December in each year, make his annual report to the Commander- in-Chief, through the Adjutant-General's department, of all courts FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 157 The Medical Department. martial ordered and held within the state, which may have been reported to him, or at which he shall have acted as Judge- Advocate, stating by whom such military courts were ordered, when and where held, the names of the person or persons accused, the nature of the charges preferred, and the result of the trial, accompanied with such suggestions and recommendations as to him may seem fit and proper ill regard to the nature and character of the proceedings, and whether any, and (if any) what legislation or further regulations may be necessary to a full and fair administration of justice. ARTICLE XLII. THE MEDICAL DEPARTMENT. 842. The health an i lives of the officers and soldiers are too impor- tant to be committed to those unskilled in their profession. In the appointment or promotion, therefore, of any person in the Medical Staff, the appointing power will rigidly scan the pretensions of such person, taking into consideration his physical qualifications and moral habits, as well as his professional acquirements and education. 843. The Surgeon- General Is charged with the administrative details of the Medical department, and general oversight and charge of all the officers belonging to it ; and will issue the necessary instruc- tions, from time to time, relating to their professional duties. 844. He may also require, from time to time, reports from Medical Directors, Surgeons of divisions, brigades and regiments, relative to the condition of the forces in service under their charge, with such remarks as may be necessary to explain the nature of the disease or injury claiming their attention, and the probable cause thereof, and the treatment adopted. 845. He will, as often as required, or as often as he shall deem necessary, make such report to the Commander-in-Chief as will explain the condition of the department under his charge, with suggestions of such improvements in practice and police, clothing, subsistence, &c., of the forces, as may seem to be required for the MlLITABY. 14 168 GENERAL REGULATIONS The Medical Department. preservation of health, the comfort and recovery of the sick, and the good of the public service. 846. The senior Medical Officer, on duty with any corps in the field or any encampment or annual parade or other service, unless othenvise specially ordered by the Commandant of such forces, will be, ex officio, the Medical Director ; and will have the general control of the Medical Officers, and the supervision of the hospitals under their charge. 847. The senior Medical Officer, when on duty as specified in the preceding section, will, with the approbation of the Commanding Officer, select a suitable site for the erection of a hospital or hospital tent ; and upon him will devolve the responsibility for order, regu- larity and cleanliness, the diet and care of the patients, and the general conduct and economy of the whole establishment. 848. The Medical Director will inspect the hospitals under his charge, ascertain the manner in which each subordinate performs his duty, see that the necessary supplies are provided for the sick, that they are of good quality and properly expended, and enforce the general rules and regulations given for the government and direction of the Surgeons and Assistant Surgeons. 849. Commanding Officers are enjoined to furnish such military assistance as may be necessary for the attainment of these objects ; and all Commissioned Officers, and others, placed in the hospital, are commanded to yield the most implicit obedience to the instructions they may receive from the Medical Director, and to enforce in every instance the observance of the hospital regulations. 850. The Surgeons of regiments will obey the instructions of the Medical Director, be responsible for the order and neatness of the hospital, for the manner in which the Assistant Surgeon and Attendants perform their respective duties, and for the comfort and convenience of those sick in quarters. 851. They will receive written morning reports, of any wno are sick, from the Orderly Sergeant of each company, who will see that those FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 159 The Medical Department. reported present themselves at the place appointed by the Surgeon, and be present himself at their examination, 852. They will immediately report all cases of feigned sickness to the Commanding Officers of companies, prescribe for those who are able to remain in quarters, and send those whose cases may require other accommodations where the same may be obtained. 853. They will at all times be within call in case of accident, and have the necessary medicines, instruments and di-essings ready at hand to attend to the sick and wounded. 854. The Assistant Surgeons will accompany the Surgeon in his morning visits, make out the proper entry in a prescription book, attend to the preparation and distribution of the medicine, see that the diary of the weather and other noticeable incidents be properly kept, assist in making out the proper reports and returns, see that the nurses are attentive to the sick and regularly administer the medicine prescribed, and that all regulations are strictly attended to. 855. When medical or surgical aid may be required at any encamp- ment, annual parade, or upon other service, and no competent Surgeon or Assistant Surgeon of the military forces is on duty, or in case the Commanding Officer deem it necessary, he may appoint any physician to discharge such duties as are required of a Surgeon or Medical Director. 856. Whenever cases arise, making it advisable, in the opinion of the Commanding Officer, that any sick or wounded should be removed to safer or more comfortable quarters, he shall direct such removal. 857. Surgeons and Assistant Surgeons, and Physicians acting as such, will attend all Officers, Non-commissioned officers. Musicians, Privates and other persons who may be on duty or connected with the command in which the service is required. 858. No certificate of a private physician or surgeon, as to the sick- ness or inability of any Officer, Non-commissioned Officer, Musician or Private of any of the military forces in this state, shall excuse such 160 GENERAL REGULATIONS QuartermasUr'a DepartmtnU, person from the performance of military duty or exempt him from enrolment therefor ; but the certificate of the commissioned Surgeon of the forces will be presumptive evidence of the facts stated therein. ARTICLE XLIII. rmaster's depa 859. The objects of this department are, to insure an efficient system of supply for the troops, and to give facility and effect to the move- ments and operations of a force in service. 860. This department will have charge, at encampments, in the field and on marches, of all tents and camp equipage and baggage trains ; of all laborers and persons serving in camp or with the trains ; of the transportation of the troops and military stores, and the providing of quarters, forage, fuel, straw and stationery for service in camp, garrison and in the field. 861. The Quartermaster-General is the head of this department; but, for certain purposes herein prescribed, the officers of this depart- ment will act under the directions of the Commissary-General, and perform such duties, witliin the divisions, brigades and regiments with which they respectively serve, as he may be authorized to require of them. 862. Except when otherwise herein provided, officers of the Quar- termaster's department will be subject to the orders of the Com- mandants upon whose staffs they respectively serve. 863. In all matters connected with the discharge of thoir duty, while serving with troops in camp or in the field, and preparatory thereto, and for instruction in their duties. Quartermaster's will obey the direction of the senior officer of the department present on duty, wlio will himself act under the orders of the Commanding Officer of the force or camp. 864. In the procuring, distribution and disposal of fuel, straw and forage for encampments for instruction (excepting encampmenta ordered by the Commander-in-Chief), the Regimental Quartermasters FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 161 Quariermcuter^a Department, . will act for tlieir respective regiments, and under the directions of the Commandants thereof. 865. All expenses incurred by the Quartermaster's department, in the discharge of their duties at any encampment or annual parade required by law, not properly chargeable to the Commissary-General's department, shall be paid by the regiment, for whose benefit the same were incurred, out of the regimental funds, as part of the incidental expenses of such encampment or parade ; and all moneys received by a Quartermaster, from the sale of any articles purchased with the regimental fund, not used at such parade or encampment, shall be paid by him forthwith to the proper county treasurer, to the credit of the regimental fund of the regiment for whose use such articles were purchased. 866. Regimental Quartermasters shall receive, distribute and safely keep all tents and camp equipage furnished to their respective regiments for encampment, subject to the control and responsibility of the officer to whom the same were issued ; and shall cause the same to be promptly returned to the place designated by the Commis- sary-General, and pursuant to his order. Brigade and Division Quartermasters shall perform the like duties at brigade and division encampments. 867. Quartermasters will carefully examine all tents and camp equipage which they may so receive, before using the same, and supply any deficiency in tent poles, pins or cords required for the use thereof, and may also cause any necessary repairs to be made to such tents ; and the charges proper therefor shall be paid by the Commissary- General, upon the certificate of the Commanding Officer of the camp or force. All articles supplied pursuant to this paragraph sliall belong to the state, and shall be returned to the Commissary-General with the camp equipage received from him. 868. The officers of the Quartermaster's department, serving on regimental staffs, will annually inspect the regimental and company armories in the regimental district, and the arms and equipments Military. 14* 162 GENERAL REGULATIONS Quartermagter'e Department. issued to the regiment or any company therein ; and, on or before the first day of November in each year, make, subscribe and forward to the Commissary -General a report of the condition and quantity of such arms and equipments, stating the place or places where the same are kept, and whether such place or places are proper and safe armories ; the name and residence of the armorer or armorers ; the name of the officer to whom such arms or equipments were issued, and whether he is still in command, and, if not, the name, rank and residence of his successor ; and particularly whether any of the arms or equipments originally issued by the Commissary-General are missing or injured, and, if so, the description and quantity of the property so missing or injured ; and also whether there are any arms or other military property of the state, in his regimental district, which are in the possession of any person or body other than the regularly organized Militia belonging to such regiment. 869. In case of a vacancy in the office, or disability of the Quarter- master of any regiment, the Commandant of the regiment shall designate some competent officer to perform the duty above required of the Regimental Quartermaster ; and such Commandant shall be respon- sible for its performance. 870. The Third Sergeant of each company, or other Sergeant desig- nated by the Commandant of the company, shall be charged with the duties of a Sub-Quartermaster Sergeant, in camps for instruction and for other service, when required by the Commanding Officer, and the Sub-Quartormasti»r Sergeant in each company shall take care of the baggage of such company, and of the transportation and proper distribution thereof, subject to the orders of the Quartermaster of the regiment. 871. In camps for instruction, and upon other service wlien required, the Quartermaster Sergeant of the regiment, or other non- commissioned officer acting as such, shall have the immediate control over the Sub-Quartermaster Sergeants, and the particular care and custody of the baggage and baggage trains of the regiment, subject to the direction of the Quartermaster or acting Quartermaster of the FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 163 Paymaster's Department — Special Services- regiment. He will be responsible for the distribution of tlie baggage among the respective companies. 872. Tlie Quartermaster Sergeant and Sub- Quartermaster Ser- geants shall be instructed by the Quartermaster in their respective duties, and may be required to attend meetings for that purpose, and may be put on duty previously and preparatory to a parade or encamp- ment, or other service of troops, and held to duty after such parade, encampment or other service is terminated, for the discharge of the duties cast upon them, as connected with the department. ARTICLE XLIV. paymaster's department. 873. When the militia are called into service in time of war, the officers of the pay department, on duty with the troops, shall observe the regulations for the government of the pay department of the United States army. 874. Officers of the pay department, at encampments, parades or while the troops are on special service, may be required by the Com- manding officers of the force with which they serve to perform duty in the Quartermaster's department, and they may also be charged with providing and distributing provisions and other duties of com- missaries of subsistence in the United States army, and may be required to act as the fiscal agents of the corps in which they serve. ARTICLE XLV. special services. 875. The military forces of the state may be required to aid the civil authorities, " in case of breach of the peace, tumult, riot, or resistance to process of this state, or apprehension of imminent danger of the same." The following regulations are designed to guide Commanding Officers in the performance of the delicate and highly responsible duties devolving upon them at such times ; and also to determine and define their powers while so acting, as far as the Commander-in-Chief is authorized so to do. 164 GENERAL REGULATIONS Special Services. 876. The military officers, while acting in aid of the civil authori- ties, will themselves retain the command of the troops, and enforce the most exact subordination and discipline. Thej* will impress upon their commands the necessity of coolness and self possession, and enjoin, absolutely, the rule that no man shall fire without orders from his proper military sujierior. 877. They may cause the troops to arrest all rioters and other persons found in open resistance to the civil authorities, and are empowered and required to overcome such resistance, and secure and keep the peace, by the use, if necessary, of their arms and all the power which they possess. But they are not authorized to punish any person for an offence, however amenable he may be to punish- ment, and they will always endeavor, by a firm and judicious conduct, and the moral ft)rce of their presence, to establish the public order, if possible, without a resort to arms. To have accomplished this result, will be the best evidence of their skill and the excellence of their measures. 878. The officer in command of military forces will, upon a call of the civil authorities, cause the troops to be supplied with the required ammunition. For this purpose he will make a requisition upon the Commissary-General, or other officer in charge of any arsenal or other place where ammunition of the state is deposited ; and it will be the duty of the officer upon whom such requisitiou is made imme- diately to comply therewith. 879. If ammunition cannot be procured in time by this method, it may be purchased ; and in either event the cost of the same will be a charge against the city, or county, or state, according to the source from whence the call to service emanated. 880. But the furnishing of the requisite ammunition will not be a condition of obedience to their Commanding Officer, on the part of the troops, who may be held to duty, although, for any reason, the ammunition is not procured. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 1C5 Special Sermicea. 881. The military Commander will ordinarily look to the officer who has called to his aid the military force, for directions, as to when the force shall be used. If, however, after a lawful call into service, no instructions arc given to him, by reason of the sickness, absence, inability or death of such officer, or for any other cause ; or if there shall be a conflict of jurisdiction between public officers authorized to call to their aid the military force, and who shall make such call; or if contradictory, inconsistent or unlawful directions shall be given by such officer or officers, the military Commander will, if the occa- sion shall require the use of a military force, himself so direct the troops, as to secure the public peace and the due observance of law, agreeably to the call made upon him by the civil authority. 882. The civil officer making the call, communicates directly with the superior officer in the chief command of the military force. He does not interfere otherwise with the force or its conduct. Subordi- nate military officers look to their military superior for their orders. 883. The instructions of the civil officer are given in general terms, directing the military officer to accomplish a particular purpose, as to disperse rioters, or clear a place, or defend a building, and the mode and means by which the specified purpose is to be attained, are directed by the military Commander. 684. The troops, when ordered to disperse a tumult or riotous assemblage, will, unless special exigencies should intervene, observe the following method of proceeding : On approaching the place where the mob is congregated, or the riot is progressing, the military officer ill command will request the civil officer to give notice, in a loud tone of voice, requiring all persons so assembled to disperse forth- with. Unless such notice is given by the civil officer, the military officer will himself cause such notice to be given. After waiting for a suitable time, to allow the mob or rioters to disperse, the troops will advance and attempt to clear the place or disperse the rioters. In this eflfort they will obtain, if possible, the active aid of the civil force, and especially the personal presence and authority of the magistracy. If the troops shall then be attacked or resisted, so as to 166 GENERAL REGULATIONS Special Services. be unable otherwise to clear the ground or disperse the rioters, they may fire, or use any other means necessary to attain the end designed, but in no case will they fire without the orders of their pro^jer military Commander. 885. The order to fire will be communicated to the troops by the superior military officer in command on the spot. It is impossible to specify, in advance, the particulars or nature of each case of resist- ance or attack, by rioters or persons engaged in a breach of the peace, which will justify the troops in taking life. The Commander must himself examine the scene of disorder, and then, in view of all the circumstances, exercise a sound discretion as to the measure of force demanded. His honest and reasonable judgment, in a case of apparent necessity, is all that is required by the law ; and his lawful command will be a sufficient protection to all who are subject to his orders. The statute law and general rule applicable to the subject, are given in the following sections. 886. By the laws of the land, homicide or the taking of human life, is justifiable, when necessarily committed by public officers, and those acting under their command, in their aid and assistance, in overcoming resistance to the execution of legal process, or to the discharge of any other legal duty ; and it is also justifiable, when necessarily committed by any person in attempting, by lawful ways and means, to apprehend any person fbr any felony committed, or in lawfully suppressing any riot, or in lawfully keeping and preserving the peace. 887. It will bo an axiom for the guidance of military Commanders, acting in aid of the civil authorities, to use no uimccessary violence, but to employ as much force, and of such a kind, as will suffice to accomplish the object for which their services have been required. 888. The rule of law is, that all persons who, by their presence, give countenance to a riot, are principals, whether they engage in acts of violence or not, especially after notice given to disi>erse. Yet it often happens that a largo proportion of a mob arc, in the first instance, mere spectators or idlers, not meaning to aid in a breach of the FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 167 Special Servicea. peace. For this reason officers are enjoined, unless the exigencies of the case should render it impracticable, or, as otherwise provided, to give the required notice and opportunity to disperse, before pro- ceeding to extremities, to the end that all those who are well disposed may retire in safety ; and, as far as practicable, in every case of firing, pains will be taken to make the fire efiective only as against those who are actually engaged in the riot. 889. To guard against danger to innocent persons at a distance, the troops will be instructed not to fire over the mob or in the air. If the mob are close to the troops, to avoid the effect of the rising of the shot at short distance, the aim should be taken not higher than the centre of the body. 890. Experience having shown the evil results of firing with blank cartridge, in the first instance, to suppress a riot, such firing is pro- hibited. 891. Officers in command of troops in the circumstances contem- plated, will be cautious not to weaken their main force too much by detachments ; and always to have on hand a sufficient body to act with energy and decided effect, when their services shall be seriously required 892. Cavalry being comparatively powerless when not in active motion, this force should not be exposed in a riot, except when it can charge. The charge should be at a brisk trot or gallop, with the horses well in hand. If the ground is much broken, cavalry cannot be used to advantage. 893. When the design is to clear a street or place by a charge of cavalry, provision should be made for the return of the cavalry or its support, and the immediate occupation of the street or place, by troops of the other arms. 894. Although it is desirable that the first fire of the troops should be as effective as possible, it is of paramount importance that they always have the opportunity of checking a sudden onset by a renewal of the fire. Therefore, if the fire is delivered while in line, it will be 168 GENERAL REGULATIONS Special Scrvicca. by rank, wing or company; and particular care will be taken to see that the fire of the alternate rank, wing or company, is not delivered until the rank, wing or company, first firing, has reloaded. The fire by rank is preferable, as completely protecting the front. The fire in column will be specially provided for in the regulations following. 895. The Commander of the military force, will be cautious not to allow any persons to become intermingled with the troops, or to close upon them, so as to interfere with the manoeuvres; also not to advance into any riotous or tumultuous assemblage by a fiank move- ment, and especially to guard the command against being entangled with or disarmed by rioters while marching, or waiting for orders to march, to the scene of disturbance. 896. Artillery placed at the heads of columns, or in commanding positions, is most effective for the clearing of streets, and will be used if other means shall fail. While the guns are being conducted to their position, for opening the fire, it will generally be desirable to mask them with infantry or cavalry. Case shot, canister and grape, by reason of their shorter range and greater execution, will be employed in preference to round shot, unless the object is to destroy barricades or buildings. The artillery should always be supported by an adequate force of the other arms. 897. Light troops may be employed advantageously to make arrests, to enter houses, and to guard the fianks of columns. The sappers and miners will parade with their implements (which maybe of service in forcing entrances and destroying obstructions ) as well as their arms. 898. The troops arc authorized to defend from attack or aggression their persons, their arms, and any place or building in which they may be stationed. In case of any sudden onset on the troops, or any place or building occupied by them, or other urgent circumstances requiring instant attack or resistance, the notice and other measures preliminary to the action of the troops may be dispensed with. The order to fire, in this case, will be given by the military Commandant on the spot. But it is not for every slight attack that the troops FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 169 street Mring — LigM Infantry. will be authorized to fire. There must appear to be a necessity for for so doing, and that other less dangerous measures will not suflSce to secure the safety of the troops. 899. The foregoing rules apply more especially to disturbances in which there is no armed or organized force opposing the constituted authorities. When an insurrection exists, or armed assemblages are to be met, such measures of attack or defence will be resorted to as the nature of the case may reauire. STREET FIRING LIGHT INFANTRY. 900. A battalion of light infantry may be formed, for street firing, into column, at half distance, by division, company or platoon, accord- ing to the width of the place to be occupied. The present example will suppose a battalion of eight companies in column by company, right in front. By a suitable change of commands the example can be made applicable to a formation by division or platoon, and the principles will apply equally to a column of any number of sub- divisions. 901. Preparatory to the movement, the companies must be care- fully equalized and numbered, in odd and even files, from the right of companies.* If there be more odd than even files, the surplus men will be thrown into the rank of file closers. The men of the odd and even files will be charged to bear in mind their respective numbers, as the accuracy of the movement is dependent upon such remembrance. 902. The Colonel, having first caused arms to be loaded and shouldered, and wishing to conduct a fire advancing, the column will be halted at the point where the movement is to commence^ and the Colonel will command, 1. As Light Infantry. 2. Street firing advancing. 3. By the left, double files. 4. March J 6. Commence firing. See 1 Hardee's Tactics, « Company," § 5. Military. 15 110 GENERAL REGULATIONS street Firing — LigM Infantry, At the second command the Captain of the first or leading company will caution his company to stand fast, and both the Captain and First Sergeant will take their proper posts for firings. At the fourth command, the first company will stand fast, and all the other com- panies ( except the eighth or rear company ) will form double files, by the left. To execute this movement, the front rank men of each of the even files will stand fast ; the rear rank men of such files will each step back so as to allow the front rank men of the odd files to step in front of them, leaving the proper intervals between the ranks ; the front rank men of the odd files will, by an oblique step to the left and rear, place themselves in rear of the front rank men of the even files, in the spaces just made by the movement of the rear rank men of those files ; at the same moment, the rear rank men of the odd files will step obliquely to the left and rear, so as to place themselves at proper distances behind the rear rank men of the even files. The Captain of each company (excepting the first and eighth ), will place himself in front of one of the even files, near the centre ; and the first and second sergeants will step in front of the even files on the right and left, respectively, of the company. The file closers will close to rank distance, and throw themselves in the rear of the nearest even files. The intervals which were occupied by the odd files will be carefully preserved. 903. At the fifth command, the Captain of the first company will command, 1 . First company. 2. Ready. 8. Aim. 4. Fire. Immediately after firing, and without waiting for any order, the com- pany will shoulder arms, and the Captain will promptly command, \. First company. 2. By the right, dovhle files. 3. March! This movement will be executed with the utmost rapidity ; the fVont rank men of the odd files will stand fast ; the rear rank men of those files will step backward so as to allow the front rank men of the even files to occupy their places ; the front rank men of the even files will FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. lYl Street Mring — Light Infantry. step obliquely to the right and rear, so as to place themselves between the front and rear ranks of the odd files ; and the rear rank men of the even files will, by a similar step, throw themselves at the proper distance in the rear of the rear rank men of the odd files. The Captain will post himself in rear of a central odd file ; the first and second sergeants in rear of the right and left odd files ; the file closers will close upon the rear of the nearest odd files. The intervals which were occupied by the even files will be preserved 904. As soon as the first company has fired, the Captain of the second company will command, 1. Second company. 2. Forward, adding 8. March ! at the instant the first company has doubled files. The second com- pany will pass, in quick time, through the intervals in the first company; and when the company has passed through, the Captain will step into the interval on the right of his central file, and allow his company to pass him, and command, 1. Second company. 2. Halt ! The second command will be given when the company has reached half distance in advance of the first company; and the company will, at the moment of halting, undouble files. To do this, the men of the odd files, at the second command, will promptly step obliquely to the right and front, into their places in line. The rear rank men of the even files will close upon the front rank. The first and second Sergeants will quickly take their posts for the firings, and the captain will promptly cause the company to fire and form double files by the right, as prescribed for the first company, changing the com- mands to conform to the number of the company. 905. As soon as the second company has passed through the inter- vals in the first company, the Captain of the first company will cause his company to load and shoulder arms. 906. The third company will follow the advance of the second company, until it enters and occupies the intervals in the first com- 172 GENERAL REGULATIONS street Firing — Light Infantry. pany, when it will halt; companies in rear of the third company, will advance and halt with that company. The third company and the companies in its rear, will carefully preserve the intervals which are to be occupied by their odd files, respectively. 907. When the second company has delivered its fire, the Captain of the third company will immediately put his company in march, and pass through the intervals in the first and second companies, and when he has passed through the second company, and advanced to half distance, he will cause his company to halt, undouble files, and fire ; and again to double files, by the right, as directed for the first and second companies. The second company, when the third has passed through, will load and shoulder arms, and the third will do the same when it is passed by the fourth. The fourth company, and all others in its rear, will follow the directions given for the third company, and those preceding. 908. It will be observed that in advancing to fire, the companies doubled on the left file, will at each halt, rest in the intervals of the companies doubled on the right file, through which they pass. 909. The captain of the first company, immediately after the seventh company passes through the intervals of his company, will command, 1. First Company » 2. Undouhle files. 8. March. 4. By the hft^ double files. 6. March. At the third command the company will undouble files, by the men of the even files stepping obliquely to the left and front into their places in line, the rear rank men of the odd files will retake their proper positions. At the fifth command the files will be doubled by the left, as before directed ; and the company Avill follow the seventh company, at half distance, and execute all the movements above directed, for the other companies in advancing, and firing, and after firing. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 173 Street Firing — Light Infantry. 910. The second company when it is passed by the first, and each other company as it finds itself, in turn, the rearmost of the column engaged in the firing, will promptly execute the movements directed for the first company in the preceding paragraph ; and the firing will be continued without interruption until ordered to cease. 911. The eighth (or rear) company will not double its files, nor will it take part in the firings. At the command, " Street firing advancing," its chief will order it to face by the rear rank, and will march it the distance of its front, to the rear ( to allow the engineers and music to enter the column), and there halt. At each advance of the column in firing, this company will face about, and advance with the column ; keeping however at such a distance from the company next preceding as not to interfere with its movements ; and at each halt of the column, it will also halt, and face to the rear. It will not fire unless the rear of the column is assailed, and then it will fire by rank. To Cease Firing. 912. If the Colonel wishes to cause the firing to cease, he will give the signal or command, to cease firing, immediately after the fire of a company has been delivered. 913. At such command or signal, the company which would have fired next in succession ( that is, the leading company, doubled on the left file), will halt in the intervals of the company which has just fired. The other companies, doubled on the left file, will halt with the leading company, so as to occupy the intervals of the companies doubled on the right file, as far as such companies extend down the column. The company which has last fired will immediately load. The column will then be in a position to renew the fire or to form square To Resume the Firing. 914. If, after the formation directed in the last paragraph, the Colonel desires to recommence the firing, he will give the command to Military. 16* lU GENERAL REGULATIONS Street Firing — Light Infantry. commence firing , at which the companies doubled on the left file will at once advance, and renew the fire according to the method before prescribed. To Advance or Retreat, after Firing. 915. If, after the column has ceased firing, the Colonel shall desire to put it in motion, without firing, he may march it in advance, or retreat in the formation directed to be assumed, after firing, for a distance not to exceed thirty paces. 916. Where one company occupies the intervals of another, the two companies will be regarded for this movement, and also for the formation of square, as one company, and will be commanded by the senior officer. 917. If the Colonel wishes to march the column for a greater aistanco than thirty paces, he will first cause the companies which do not occupy the intervals of other companies to undouble files To Undouble the Companies. 918. The movement by which the companies standing doubled on the right file, in the intervals of the companies doubled on the left file, are returned to the column without passing to its rear, is called the undoubling of companies. 919. If, after the firing has ceased, the Colonel wishes to undouble the companies, he will command : 1. To the front — Undouble Companies. 2. Forward — March At the first command, the Captains of the companies doubled on the left file will caution their companies to stand fast, and the Captains of the companies doubled on the right file will caution their com- panies that they are to advance. At the command, March, the companies doubled on the right file will advance; and when the leading company, doubled on that file, has passed to half distance beyond the leading company doubled on the left file, its Captain will FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 11 5 Street Firing — Light Infantry. cause it to halt and undouble files, and double them again by the left. The other companies doubled on the right files will mark time, while the preceding company doubles on the left files ; and when the movement is completed, those companies will advance through the intervals of the company which has just doubled files by the left ; and the company, now leading, will itself halt at half distance beyond the company which has just doubled, and execute the movements prescribed for that company. And so, in turn, all the companies doubled on the right file, as they have reached half distance in advance of each other, will undouble files, and again double them by the left. 920. If there should not be space enough to undouble the com- panies to the front, the Colonel will command : 1. To the rear — Undouble companies. 3. Column forward. 2. Battalion, about Face ! 4. March ! At the first command, the Captains of the companies doubled on the right file will caution them to stand fast. At the second command, the companies doubled on the left file will face to the rear. At the fourth command, the eighth company', and the companies which have faced about, will march, in common time, to the rear. As soon as the first company, doubled on the right file (at the head of the column ), has its intervals opened, its Captain Avill promptly cause it to undouble files, and double them again by the left, face about, and follow the companies doubled on the left file. When this company has passed through the intervals of the second company doubled on the right file, the Captain of the second company will cause it to execute what is prescribed for the first company doubled on the right file. The other companies doubled on the right file ( if there be any ) will, each in its turn, execute the same movement. When all the companies which were doubled on the right file have thus entered the column, the Colonel will cause it to halt; the companies, before halting, will close to their proper distance, and the Colonel will cause the column to face to the front. 176 GENERAL REGULATIONS Street Faring — Light Infantry. 921. When the companies are undoubled, if the Colonel does not intend to resume the firing immediately, he will cause the files to be undoubled. 922. If the Colonel intends to recommence the firing, the music, and engineers and eighth company will retain the positions assumed for the firing. If he does not so intend, the Colonel will order the eighth company to face by the front rank; when the music and engineers take their posts in column, and the eighth company faces by the front rank and closes to half distance. To Fire in Retreat. 923. The fire in retreat will be conducted on the same general principles as the fire advancing, but with the exceptions following. The Colonel will command, 1. As light infantry. 4. March ! 2. Street firing in retreat. 6. Commence firing. 3. By the left double files. At the second command, the Captain of the leading company will caution his company to stand fast, and he and his First Sergeant will take their posts for the firings. At the fourth command, all the companies, except the first and eighth, will double files, as prescribed for the fire advancing ; and the Captains will throw themselves in rear of the central files of their respective companies. The First and Second Sergeants and file closers of such companies will step in rear of the nearest even files of their companies. At the fifth command, the Cap- tain of the first or leading company will give the proper commands to cause his company to fire, and to double files by the right, as above directed for firing advancing, adding, after tlie files have been doubled, 1. First — Company. 2. About — Face! and will place himself so as to lead the centre file ( the guides and file closers placing themselves so as to lead the nearest files of the company), and immediately command, Forward — March 1 FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 177 Street Firing — Light Infantry. and pass with his company through the intervals in the files of the companies, towards the rear of the column, and cause the company to halt at its proper distance in rear of the last company which is doubled on the left file, face to the front, undouble files, double files again by the left, and load. He will then take his position in rear of the centre file of his company. 924. The Captain of the second company, when the first has passed through his company towards the rear, will command, 1. Second company. 6. Fire ! 2. Undouhle JUes. 7. By the right double jHes. 3. March! 8. March! 4. Ready! 9. About — Face! 5. Aim! 10. Forward — March! and will conduct his company towards the rear of the column, in the manner prescribed for the first company, and there form as directed for the first company, at its proper distance in rear of that company, and load. 925. The other companies will successively, after the company next preceding them has fired and passed through them, execute what has been prescribed for the second company. 926. The companies will shoulder arms after firing, without waiting for any order so to do, and all the movements will be in quick time. 927. In the fire in retreat, the eighth (or rear) company will, at the command, " Street firing in retreat," face by the rear rank and advance, double its front and halt. The music and engineers will take their position in the interval thus made. This company will march in retreat, after each company has fired, half of its front and halt. The company will take no part in the movements of the column for firing, and will itself fire only as directed for the eighth company in the fire advancing. 928. Upon the order or signal to cease firing, the companies which have fired and are passing to the rear will continue their march 178 GENERAL REGULATIONS Street Firing — Infantry. through the intervals, and form in the rear of the column, as above directed. The Colonel may resume the firing from this position ; but if he desire to form a square, or to march or form into line, he will first cause the files to be undoubled. INFANTRY. 929. A battalion doing duty as infantry, may be formed, for street firing, at full or half distance, into divisions, companies or platoons, according to the width of the place, leaving suflSclent space on the flanks to allow the subdivisions, after delivering their fire, to file to the rear. The present example will suppose a battalion formed in column by company, at half distance, right in front. 930. The Colonel having caused arms to be loaded, will halt the column at the place where the movement is to commence. 931. If the front of the column does not fill the whole width of the place, and the flanks should be exposed to attack, one or more com- panies may be detailed to clear the flanks of the column, which being done, they will form, by platoon or section, near the flanks of the first and rear companies ; the flankers in advance will face to the front, and those in the rear, to the rear, and throw as many files into line, on the flanks of those companies, as may be necessary to close the street or cover the battalion. 932. These dispositions being made, the Colonel will command, 1. As infantry. 3. Commence firing. 2. Street firing advancing. At the second command, the Captains and First Sergeants will take their proper posts for the firings. At the third command, the Captain of the first company will immediately command, 1. First company. 8. Aim! 2. Ready! 4. Fire! FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 179 Street Firing — Infantry, On the delivery of the fire, the company will instantly, and without waiting for any order for that purpose, shoulder arms and face to the right ; and the Captain will command, 1. By file right 2. Quick — March! The Captain will conduct the company, in quick time, along the right flank towards the rear of the column, and cause it to halt opposite to the centre of the column, face outward, load and shoulder arms. 933. Immediately after the first company delivers its fire, the Cap- tain of the second company will command. 1. Second company. 2. Forward , adding March when the first company has nearly cleared the front of the second company ; and when his company has advanced once its front, the Captain will cause it to halt, and command, 1. Ready! 2. Aim! 3. Fire! Immediately after firing, the company will instantly, and without any order, shoulder arms and face to the left j and the Captain will command, 1. By file left. 2. QmiVA;— March! and conduct the company along the left flank of the column towards the rear, and cause it to halt at or near the then centre of the column, face outward, load and shoulder arms. 934. When the company next to the eighth (or rear) company in the column shall have passed the left flank of the first company, the Captain of the first company will order that company to face to the left and to file left, and will conduct the company into the column. If the column be at a halt, when he shall have taken his position in column, he will halt the company, face it to the front, and dress it by the left ; and if the company be not at its proper distance, he will take the distance when the column resumes its march. If the column is on the march when the company enters it, the Captain, when the left 180 GENERAL REGULATIONS Street Firing — Infantry. guide of his company is nearly on a line with the left guide of the preceding company, will command, 1. First — Company. 2. By the right flank. and when opposite such guide, 3. March ! adding, after the company has faced to the front, Guide left, and cause it to take the step of the column. 935. When the rear of the column ( excepting the eighth or rear company) has passed the right flank of the second company, the Captain of the second company will cause his company to face to the right and file to the right, into the column. If the column is at a halt,^ he will halt the company when it shall have reached its position in the column, and face it to the front ; and the company will take its proper distance ( if not already at that distance ) when the column is again put in motion, as directed for the first company. If the column is advancing when the company enters the column, the Captain will, at the proper time, cause the company to march by the left flank, the company taking the proper distance, the guide by the left, and the step of the column. 936. The other companies, except the eiglith ( or rear ) company, will follow the advance of the second company, and successively execute what is herein prescribed for the second company ; with this exception, that all the odd companies will, immediately after firing^ face to the right, and be conducted along the right flank of the column, and otherwise conform to the directions given for the first company after the firing, and for coming into column. All the comi)anie8 in the column will advance at each advance of the leading company ; but the eighth (or rear) company will observe the particular direc- tions for the same, hereinafter contained. 937. The Captains of odd companies will be particularly careful to caution their companies that, after firing, the company will, without FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 181 Street Firing — Infantry. waiting for orders, shoulder arms and face to the right ; and the Captains of even companies will caution their companies that, after firing, they will also instantly shoulder arms and face to the left. 938. At the command for street firing, the eighth ( or rear ) com- pany in the column will face by the rear rank, and march the distance of its front and halt. As the column advances after each successive fire, it will face about and follow the columu, keeping, however, at such distance from the company next in advance of it, as to allow the companies which have fired to enter the column at their proper distances. Whenever the column halts, the rear com- pany will also halt and face to the rear. It will take no part in the firing unless the rear of the column is attacked, and then it will fire by platoon, or, if it is flanked, alternately with the flankers. 939. Where flankers are thrown out, those at the head of the column will continue to advance abreast with the leading company, and in case of any attack upon the head of the column after a fire, and before the next company is uncovered, they will cover it by their fire. The flankers in the rear will conform their movements to those of the rear company. 940. The fire in retreat will be conducted in a manner similar to the fire advancing, except that the command will be for firing in retreat, and the fire will be delivered by each company, without advancing, as soon as its front is cleared by the preceding company ; and after the delivery of its fire, each company will march, by the flank, directly to the rear of the column, enter it at the proper distance in rear of the company next to the eighth ( or rear ) company, coun- termarch, and load. 941. In firing in retreat, the eighth ( or rear ) company of the column, at the command to fire in retreat, will face by the rear rank, march double the distance of its front, and halt. As each company delivers its fire, the eighth company will advance a distance equal to half the front of the company, and halt. It will not fire unless the rear of the column should be attacked. The flankers at the head of the column will, as each company retires after delivering its fire, protect MiLITAST ]6 182 GENEKAL REGULATIONS Street Firing — Posts of Music, Engineers, C(c. it, if necessary, by their fire; and when the next company is uncovered, will march in retreat to the flanks of such company, halt, and face to the front. The fire of the flankers, in every case, will be by rank, and the men who fire will immediately reload. 942. The Colonel will cause the firing to cease by the proper com- mand or signal ; and if the column has been firing advancing, and he shall desire to bring the companies on the flanks into column, he will put the column in march, and the companies on the flanks will enter it in the manner above directed. The flankers may, or may not, enter the column as the Colonel shall direct. 943. If the fire has been in retreat^ on the command to cease firing, the companies which have fired will pass to the rear and enter the column, as above directed ; and if necessary the eighth company will take further distance to allow them to do so. 944. If the column is formed at full distance, the second company, and those following it, in the fire advancing, will advance a distance equal to double the front of the company ; and in the fire in retreat the eighth (or rear ) company will take at each fire the distance of its full front. POSTS OF MUSIC, ENGINEERS, AC. 945. At the command for street firing, in advance or retreat, whether as light infantry or infantry, the engineers or pioneers and music, will promptly place themselves between the eighth (or rear ) company, and the company next preceding it in the column. 946. They will form compactly in ranks ; the engineers or pioneers directly behind the seventh company (or company next to the rear company), and the music between them and the eighth (or rear) company. 947. The engineers and music will conform their movements to those of the eighth (or rear ) company, and be careful to preserve sufficient space, in the column, for the companies which are to outer it after firing. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 183 To Form the Battalion after Street Firing. TO FORM THE BATTALION AFTER STREET FIRING. 948. If, after the execution of any of the foregoing movements for street firing, the Colonel shall find any of the companies out of their proper positions, and shall desire to resume the original formation of his battalion, he may form his battalion into line parallel to the left flank of the column, as follows : The Colonel will first cause the column to take full distance, and will then cause the color company to wheel to the left into line, and be aligned by the right against two markers who will be placed before it, two paces from the left flank of the column. After the color company is established, the Colonel will command, 1. Form hattalion. 2. March! ■when each company, conducted by its chief, will march by the flank to the position originally occupied by it in line. The companies will form successively, on the principle of successive formations, each allowing the company whose post is nearer to the color to precede it and be first established. The companies of the right wing will march by the left flank, and those which are to be in the left wing, by the right flank of companies. The companies in the right wing will dress by the left, throwing out their right guides ; those of the left wing will dress by the right, throwing out the left guides; the guides will all face towards the centre; and when the movement is completed, the Colonel will command, Guides — Posts! and all the officers and guides will take their proper posts in line. This movement will be executed in quick time. TO REFORM THE COLUMN AFTER STREET FIRING. 949. If only a few of the companies in column are out of their places, the Colonel may, without forming into line, cause such companies to resume the position originally occupied by them. If tills is desired, upon an intimation of the Colonel, each Captain whoso 184 GENERAL REGULATIONS To Reform the Column after Street Firing. comj)any is to change its place will conduct it by its right flank to its original post in the column, and cause it to countermarch ; and when the companies are posted, if they are not at proper distance, the Colonel will cause the column to take distance, or close it, as may b« desired, and dress by the left, or right, as the column maybe right or left in front. 950. Or if a considerable number of the companies be out of their places, and the Colonel shall not desire to form line, he may continue the movement for street firing ( but without firing ) until the first company shall be on the right of the column. To do this he will, if the firing has been advancing, after the firing has ceased, command, 1. First company to the front. 3. Column forward. 2. Advance without firing. 4. March! At the last command, the companies will continue to execute the movements for the fire advancing ( except the firing and loading ), and when the first company has reached its proper position in the front of the column, it will march forward, followed by the other companies in the column ; and the Captains and First Sergeants will take their proper position in column. 951. In the infantry, the companies on the flanks will take their position in the column as it passes them. 952. In the light infantry, the first company, when it arrives at the head of the column (after passing through the companies doubled on the right file ), will at once undouble its files marching ; and the companies following it will do the same as soon as they have pas.sed through the companies doubled on the right file. 953. In the firing in retreat, the Colonel, to accomplish the same result will, after the fire has ceased, command, 1. First company to the front. 2. By company^ from the rights in retreat. 8. March ! At the command March ! the companies on the right of the column will successively execute the movements for street firing in retreat FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 185 To March in Column^ prepared for Street Firing or to Form Square. (except firing and loading), until the first company has regained its proper position at the head of the column. The eighth company will take distance, so as to allow the companies marching to the rear to enter the column. The movement will cease as soon as the first company has reached the front of the column. The Captains and Sergeants will take their places in column. In the light infantry, the files will be undoubled. 954. When these movements are completed, if the Colonel shall so intend, he will order the eighth company to face by the front rank ; when the music and engineers will take their places in column, and the eighth company will face by the front rank and close to its pro- per distance. TO MARCH IN COLUMN, PREPARED FOR STREET FIRING OR PREPARED TO FORM SQUARE. 955. If a battalion is to be conducted through a dense crowd, near to the place of riot or disorder, it may be marched in column at half distance or in square. 956. The column at half distance will, under these circumstances, be formed according to the principles given for columns prepared to form square {see 2 ScoWs Tactics, ^ 1482, and following ; 1 Har- dee^ § 817, and following), except that the formation will usually be by company, instead of division. 957. The file closers of the rear company, passing by the nearest flank, will throw themselves two paces before the front rank, opposite to their respective places, in line of battle, and face towards the head of the column. The field music will form compactly in ranks, two paces in rear of the centre of the second company (or division). The corps of engineers will be placed behind the centre of the color company. In no case must there be an elongation of the column ; and if the music cannot be placed as above directed with- out increasing the distance between companies, it may be divided and placed behind the other companies. MlLITAKT. 16* 180 GENERAL REGULATIONS '- • Street Firing. 958. The column will then be in a condition to form square or to commence the movement for street firing. In case the column is ordered to commence street firing, the music and engineers will pass rapidly by the flank of the column and place themselves com- pactly in ranks between the rear company and the company next in advance of it in the column ; the engineers leading, and the whole faced to the front. PROM COLUMN FOR STREET FIRING, AS LIGHT INFANTRY ADVANCING, TO FORM SQUARE. 959. If the Colonel shall desire to form square while the column is firing, advancing as light infantry in a column by company, he will first cause the fire to cease ; and when the column has assumed the formation directed after firing {vide ^ 913), he will command, 1. Form Square. ^^ 3. March ! 2. Right and left into line, wheel. At the first command, the Captains of companies formed on the even files, which do not occupy the intervals of other companies, will promptly cause the files to be undoubled. At the second command, the Captain in front of the two companies formed together in double files at the head of the column ( and which will constitute the first front of the square) will caution those companies to stand fast, and place himself in the front rank, in the centre of the two companies (the centre file stepping back so as to allow him to take his place ), and cause the companies to dress by the centre. He will then, if he be the senior officer of the two companies, exchange i)laces with the other Captain, now in the rear. The Captains of all the other com- panies, except the eighth (or rear) company, will caution their com- mands to wheel by platoon to the right and left, into line. The Captain of the eighth (or rear) company will cause his company to face to the front, if not already so faced, and command, 1. Eighth Company , forward. 2. Guide left ^ and place himself two paces outside of the left flank. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 187 Street Firing. 960. At the command, March ! the companies, except those in the first front, and the eighth (or rear) company, will wheel by platoon to the right and left into line, and dress towards the flank resting on the first front. In the companies in which the intervals are occupied by other companies, the right platoons of both companies will wheel, as one platoon, to the right; and the left platoons, in the same man- ner, to the left. The Captains of the companies formed on the odd files will command the platoons wheeling to the right ; and the Cap- tains of the companies formed on the even files, the platoons wheel- ing to the left. In the companies which have undoubled files, the Captains will command the platoons wheeling to the right ; and the First Lieutenants the platoons wheeling to the left. The field and staff officers, engineers and music will enter the square. The eighth com- pany will advance and close the square, and then face to the rear. The right and left files of the first and fourth fronts will face to the right and left, outward. When the movement is completed the Colonel will command, Guides — Posts ! and the chief of the fourth front and the guides will enter the square. 961. The senior Captain in the first front will command that front; the Lieutenant-Colonel will command the second front ; the Major the third front ; and if either be absent, the senior Captain in the front will command. The Captain of the eighth company will command the fourth front. The Commanders of fronts will take post four paces in rear of the centre of their respective fronts. The music and engineers are near to the fourth front 962. The square thus formed will present a four-rank formation on its first front and a portion of the second and third fronts ( if several of the companies shall have fired before the formation of square), and the residue of the square will be in two ranks. The parts of the second and third fronts, which are in two ranks, will be aligned on the front ranks of the portions, in four ranks. The fire of the portions of the square in four ranks will be given as directed for the square in four ranks, as hereafter prescribed. 188 GENERAL REGULATIONS street Firing. 963. In the particulars in which no other direction is given, this formation of square will be conformed to the principles, given in the books of tactics and herein, for the formation of squares ; and such square may advance or retreat, or be formed into column or reduced, in the same manner as other squares. TO FORM SQUARE FROM COLUMN, AS LIGHT INFANTRY. 964. If the column has not been engaged in firing, or if the com- panies have been undoubled, the files will be undoubled, and the square will be formed as directed for the infantry. 965. If the column has hecn firing in retreat, the companies which have fired will take their places in the rear of the column, before the movement to form square is commenced. TO FORM SQUARE FROM A COLUMN OF INFANTRY. 966. If the column is acting as infantry, it will be closed to half distance, if not already in that position ; the Colonel will give the proper commands for the formation of square ; and if the coluraQ be formed by company, the platoons of all the companies, except the first and last, will wheel outward, as prescribed for companies when the column is formed by division. 967. At the command to form square, the companies which have fired, if the column is engaged in firing, will pass rapidly to the rear, and enter the column in their proper places. 968. The leading and rear companies will form the first and fourth fronts of the square, the rear company advancing so as to close the square, and facing by the rear rank ; if there arc any companies on the flanks which have not been brought into column, they will enter the square and be posted in close order by platoon or section, as a reseiTc, in the rear of the first and fourth fronts of the square. In all other respects the movement will conform to the ordinary formation of square. A square formed from a column by company will be reduced, in the same manner as in squares formed from a column of divisions, by commands suited to the case. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 189 Street Firing. , 969. If a square is to be formed from a column, for street firing, the music and engineers will enter the square, and form compactly in ranks near to the fourth front, and next to the flankers, if any are formed in rear of that front. When the square moves, they will face and move with it. THE SQUARE IN FOUR RANKS. 970. A battalion doing duty as infantry or light infantry may form a square in four ranks, in the manner directed in the Lighi Infantry tactics. ( See 2 Hardee^ s Tactics, ^ 910, ^-c. ) 971. It is proposed to use the square in four ranks, marching, for the purpose of entering a compact mass or crowd of persons, when neces- sary, during a riot or public disturbance ; and the directions herein given, in regard to that formation, have reference to such service. 972. A square in four ranks may be formed from a column by division or company, according to the directions contained in 2 Har- dee's Tactics, ^^ 911, 955. Tho propriety of forming it by division or company will depend on the number of men in each company, and the width of the street or place to be entered. 973. The formation of square in four ranks, as directed in this article, will give an efficiency of fire, a security from attack on the fianks and rear, and a solidity and force, combined with mobility, which peculiarly commend it for the service contemplated, and espe- cially so, when the troops are called to act in dark and crowded streets in the night time. TO MARCH IN SQUARE. 974. The square, whether in two or four ranks, may, for the pur- pose contemplated by these regulations, march, in advance or retreat, in common time, to any distance. 975. The command for the march in square will indicate the front by which it is to move, and the battalion will conform to what is pre- scribed in 2 Hardee's Tactics, % 854, et seq., except as herein other- 190 GENERAL REGULATIONS Street fHring, wise directed. In moving by the first or fourth fronts, the reverse front will face about, and the second and third fronts face towards the leading front and march by the flank ; the reserves, &c., con- forming to the movement. 976. The utmost care will always be had, in these movements, to prevent an elongation in the fronts of tlie square which are marching by the flank. At every halt each front will instantly face outward, and any interval caused in marching will be promptly closed. The Captains on the several fronts are specially charged with this duty. 977. While marching in square, the Commandant of the battalion will carefully watch the several fronts, and. upon the appearance of any wavering or opening in the ranks, he will halt the square or cause it to mark time. If the Commandant does not desire to face the fronts of the square outward, and intends to resume his march when steadiness is restored or the intervals are closed, he will, instead of ordering a halt, command, 1. Battalion. 2. Mark Time. 3. March ! At this command the battalion will mark time, and all intervals will be instantly closed and the ranks aligned, without waiting for distinct commands for the purpose ; and when the Colonel shall wish to resume the march he will command, 1. Battalion. 2. Forward — March! and the march will be resumed in common time. 978. The square being in march, if the Colonel shall desire to quicken the march, to gain a particular point, he may order it to march in quick time; but the quick march will not be continued to exceed the distance of thirty paces. 979. Each Commandant of a front of the square will promptly repeat all orders given by the Colonel, in order that tliey may be dlstirctly understood in every part of the square. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 191 Street Firing. TO FIRE IN SQUARE. 980. The fire, in squares in the two-rank formation, whether of infantry or light infantry, may be by file or by rank. 981. The fire hyjile will be conducted according to the prescribed method. 982. The fire by ranJc is to be conformed to the system prescribed in the light infantry tactics. 983. The fire, in squares in the four-rank formation, is also by file or by rank, but in both these fires the first and second ranks only lake part. The third and fourth ranks stand at support, or shoul- dered arms. 984. To prevent confusion in the commands, when the square is in four ranks, and the fire is to be by rank, the command will be addressed to the Jirst and second ranks, instead of the front and rear rank. 985. To increase the fire of the square in four ranks, for the special purposes contemplated by this article, the third and fourth ranks will be allowed to participate in the fire, by loading for the second rank, as provided in the following paragraphs. 986. The^re with three ranks, as it will be called by way of dis- tinction, will be conducted according to the principles laid down in 1 Scott's Tactics^ ^ 291, et seq., for firing by two ranks in the three- rank formations, but with some alterations of detail. The command given will be to fire with three ranks. The first rank will fire and load continuously ; the second rank will fire and exchange muskets with the third rank, as particularly described in the next paragraph ; the third rank loads for the second rank ; the fourth rank ordinarily remains at shouldered or support arms. The reserved fire of the fourth rank will thus be held ready to meet sudden emergencies ; and may also be useful to repulse an attack from the roofs or windows of buildings, without withdrawing the proper fire of the fronts of the square. If, however, an additional fire shall be demanded, by reason 192 GENERAL REGULATIONS street Firing. of one of the fronts of the square being fiercely assailed, the fourth rank may also exchange muskets with the third rauk, as subse- quently described; but this exchange of muskets, by the fourth rank, will only be for a short period, and will be discontinued as soon as the particular emergency shall cease. 987. In the fire with three ranks, each man of the second rank, after having fired, will pass his piece, with the right hand, to the third rank man of his file; the latter will take it with the left baud, aud pass his own with the right hand to the second rank man, who will receive it with the right hand, fire it, reload and fire the same piece the second time, when he will repass it to the third rank man, and thus in continuation, so that the second rank will always fire twice in succession the same piece before passing it to the third rank man, except the first time. 988. In the fire with four ranks, as it will be called, the first rank man of each file fires and loads continuously ; the second rank man fires, and passes his musket, with the right hand, to the third rank man, who receives it with his left hand, and passes his own musket with his right hand to the second rank man, who receives it with his right liand; the third rank man instantly exchanges muskets, in the same manner, with the fourth rank man, who at once commences loading ; the second rank man fires the piece which he has received from the third rank man, and instantly exchanges, in the manner before indicated, with the third rank man, and the third rank man loads. The second rank man then fires and loads, and again fires the piece which ho has loaded ; and the process of exchange, and firing and loading, above detailed, is again gone through with ; the second rank man always loading his piece after each third fire. 989. In the fire with four ranks, at the command, Ready ! the third and fourth ranks order arms, and during the fire, as often as they have reloaded (or have a loaded musket ready to exchange), they resume the position of order arms. In the fire with three ranks, the third rank men also order arms in the manner above directed. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 198 Street Firing. 990. The fire with three ranks, and also with four ranks, will be conducted upon the principles of the fire by file. The fire will com- mence on the right of the front of the square. 991. The men of tho second rank will be especially warned against passing to the rear pieces which have not been discharged; and before passing them, the second rank men will half-cock the pieces, and notice whether smoke issues from the tube. If it does not, they will always pick, if necessary, and recap the piece (unless provided with the Maynard primer), and fire it. And if, in loading, any man shall find that the piese has not been discharged, he will always pick. 992. The third and fourth rank men will have particular care, in passing loaded muskets, to see that the muzzles are kept elevated, acd that the pieces are at half-cock. 993. The command to fire will be addressed to the particular front by which the fire is to be made ; or to two or more fronts, naming them, if the fire is )equired to be made by more than one front. 994. The men of the outer files of the first and fourth fronts (who will have faced outward) will fire alternately. If there be four ranks, the first and third rank men in the files will begin the fire, and when they have reloaded the second and fourth rank men will fire. The fire may be direct or oblique, as may be required. 995. When an angle of the square is attacked, it will be protected by the oblique fire of the fronts of the square by which the angle is formed, the left front using the right oblique and the right front, the left oblique fire. 996. The Colonel will have near him, at all times during the firing, a drummer or bugler, to give the signal to cease firing. At the signal to cease firing, all the commissioned officers will instantly command. Cease — Firing. 997. The signal to cease firing will indicate that the whole square is to cease firing. When it is intended that only a portion of the square shall cease or change its fire, and that the residue shall con- MlLITABT. 17 194 GENERAL REGULATIONS Remarks — Troops in Campaign — Organization of an Army in the FHeld. tinue to fire, the signal to cease firing need not be given, and the command to cease firing will be communicated or addressed specially to the portion concerned. KEMARKS ON STREET FIRING, 998. Either of the systems of street firing herein given, although designated to be respectively for the infantry and light infantry, may be practiced by regiments doing duty in either arm, whether organ- ized as infantry, artillery or riflemen. 999. Neither of the systems of street firing in column, herein pre- scribed, can be safely used at night in a place so dark that the troops cannot readily distinguish each other. Officers, under those circum- stances, are recommended to assume the formation in square. 1000. The peculiar formations and firings prescribed in this article form no part of the general system of tactics. They will be only practiced with a view to proficiency in the special service, under the laws of this state, to which they have reference. ARTICLE XLVI. TROOPS IN CAMPAIGN. 1001. The following article, from the United States Army Regula- tions, relating to troops in campaign, is published for the informa- tion of the military forces of the state, and also for their government, as far as the same can be made applicable, upon occasions of war, invasion or insurrection. ORGANIZATION OF AN ARMY IN THE FIELD. 1002. The formation by divisions is the basis of the organization ftnd administration of armies in the field. 1003. A division consists usually of two or three brigades, either of infantry or cavalry, and troops of other corps in the necessary proi>ortion. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 195 War ( Organization of an Army in the Feld ) Service. 1004. A brigade is formed of two or more regiments. The first number takes the right. 1005. Mixed brigades are sometimes formed of infantry and light cavalry, especially for the advanced guards, 1006. As the troops arrive at the rendezvous, the General command- ing in chief will organize them into brigades and divisions. 1007. The light cavalry is employed as flankers and partisans, and generally for all service out of the line, 1008. Heavy cavalry belongs to the reserve, and is covered, when necessary, in marches, camps or bivouacs, by light troops or infantry of the line. 1009. The arrangement of the troops, on parade and in order of battle, is : 1st, the light infantry ; 2d, infantry of the line ; 3d, light cavalry ; 4th, cavalry of the line ; 5th, heavy cavalry. The troops of the artillery and engineers are in the centre of the brigades, divisions or corps to which they are attached ; marines take the left of other infantry ; volunteers and militia take the left of regular troops of the same arm, and, among themselves, regiments of volunteers or militia of the same arm take place by lot. This arrangement is varied by the General commanding in chief, as the circumstances of war render expedient. 1010. Brigades in divisions, and divisions in the army, are numbered from right to left ; but in reports of military operations, brigades and divisions are designated by the name of the General commanding them. 1011. The order of regiments in brigades, and of brigades in divi- sions, may be changed by the Commander of the division for impor- tant reasons, such as the weakness of some corps, or to relieve one from marching too long at the rear of the column. Such changes must be reported to the General commanding in chief. 1012. The General commanding in chief assigns the Generals of divisions and oi brigades to their respective commands when the assignment is not made by the Department of War. 196 GENERAL REGULATIONS War (^Organization of an Army in the Field^ Service. 1013. The General of brigade inspects his troops in detail, by com- panies, when he takes command, and at the opening of the campaign, and as often as may be necessary to ascertain exactly their condition. The General of division makes similar inspections when he thinks proper. At these inspections the Generals examine the arms, clothing, equipments, harness, horses, &c., direct the necessary repairs, and designate the men and horses to remain in dep6t or march with the train. 1014. Reports of inspections are made by the General of brigade to the General of division, and by the General of division to the General commanding in chief. 1015. During marches and all active oi)erations, Generals of brigade keep themselves exactly informed, by reports of corps and by their inspections, of the actual strength of the regiments, so as always, and especially after an engagement, to make accurate returns to the General of division. 1016. Staff officers, and officers of engineers, ordnance and artillery, according to the nature of the service, are assigned to the head-quarters of armies and divisions, and detached brigades, by order of the Gene- ral commanding in chief, when the distribution of these officers has not been regulated by the War Department. The necessary staff will bo assigned to Commanders of brigades. 1017. When an engineer or other officer is charged with directing an expedition or making a reconnoissance, without having command of the escort, the Commander of the escort shall consult him on all the arrangements necessary to secure the success of the operation. 1018. Staff officers, and Commanders of engineers, ordnance and artillery, report to their immediate Commanders the state of the sup- plies, and whatever concerns the service under their direction, and receive their orders, and communicate to them those they receive from their superiors in their own corps. 1019. The senior officer of engineers, of ordnance, and the depart- ments of the general staff serving at the chief head-quarters in the FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. ]97 War (^Contributions — Orderlies') Service. field, will transmit to the bureau of his department at Washington, at the close of the campaign, and at such other times as the Com- mander in the field may approve, a full report of the operations of his department, and whatever information to improve its service he may be able to furnish. 1020. The report of the Officer of engineers will embrace plans of military works executed during the campaign, and, in case of siege, a journal of the attack or defence. CONTRIBUTIONS. 1021. When the wants of the army absolutely require it, and in other cases, under special instructions from the War Department, the Greneral commanding the army may levy contributions in money or kind on the enemy's country occupied by the troops. No other Com- mander can levy such contributions without written authority from the General commanding in chief. ORDERLIES, ^ 1022. At the opening of a campaign, the Commander of an army determines and announces in orders the number of orderlies, mounted or foot, for the Generals, and the corps or reghnents by which they are to be supplied, and the periods at which they shall be relieved. 1023. In marches, the mounted orderlies follow the Generals, and perform the duty of escorts, or march with orderlies on foot at the head of the division or brigade. 1024. The staff officer who distributes the orderlies to their posts sends with them a note of the time and place of departure ; those relieved receive a like note from the staff officer at the head-quarters. 1025. Mounted soldiers are employed to carry dispatches only in special and urgent cases. 1026. The precise time when the dispatch is sent off, and the rate at which it is to be conveyed, are to be written clearly on the covers of all letters transmitted by a mounted orderly, and the necessary Military. 17* 198 GENERAL REGULATIONS War (_ Depots — Camps') Service. instructions to him, and the rate of travel going and returning, are to be distinctly explained to him. dep6ts. 1027. The grand dep6ts of an army are established where the military operations would not expose them to be broken up. Smaller depots are organized for the divisions and the several arms. They are com- manded by officers temporarily disabled for field service, or by other officers when necessary, and comprise, as much as possible, the hos- pitals and dep6ts for convalescents. When conveniently placed, they serve as points for the halting and assembling of detachments. They receive the disabled from the corps on the march; and the officers in command of the dep6ts send with the detachments to the army those at the depdts who have become fit for service. CAMPS. 1028. Camp is the place where troops are established in tents, in huts, or in bivouac. Cantonments are the inhabited places which troops occupy for shelter when not put in barracks. The camping- party is a detachment detailed to prepare a camp. 1029. Reconnoissances should precede the establishment of the camp. For a camp of troops on the march, it is only necessary to look to the health and comfort of the troops, the facility of the communica- tions, the conveinence of wood and water, and the resources in pro- visions and forage. The ground for an intrenched camp, or a camp to cover a country, or one designed to deceive the enemy as to the strength of the army, must be selected, and the camp arranged for the object in view. 1030. The camping-party of a regiment consists of the Regimental Quartermaster and Quartermaster-Sergeant, and a Corporal and two men per company. The General decides whether the regiments camp separately or together, and whether the police guard shall accompany the camping-party, or a larger escort shall be sent. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 199 War (_ Camps') Service. 1031. Neither baggage nor led horses are permitted to move with the camping-party. 1032. When the General can send in advance to prepare the camp, he gives his instructions to the Chief of the Quartermaster's Depart- ment, who calls on the regiments for their camping-parties, and is accompained, if necessary, by an Engineer to propose the defences and communications. 1033. The watering-places are examined, and signals placed at those that are dangerous. Any work required to make them of easier access is done by the police guard or Quartermaster's men. Sentinels, to be relieved by the guards of the regiment, when they come up, are placed by the camping-party over the water, if it is scarce, and over the houses and stores of provisions and forage in the vicinity. 1034. If the camping-party does not precede the regiment, the Quartermaster attends to these things as soon as the regiment reaches the camp. 1035. On reaching the ground, the infantry form on the color front ; the cavalry in rear of its camp. 1036. The Generals establish the troops in camp as rapidly as pos- sible, particularly after long, fatiguing marches. 1037. The number of men to be furnished for guards,, pickets and orderlies ; the fatigue parties to be sent for supplies ; the work to be done, and the strength of the working parties ; the time and place for issues; the hour of marching, &c., are then announced by the Brigadier-Generals to the Colonels, and by them to the Field officers ; the Adjutant and Captains, formed in front of the regiment, the First Sergeants taking post behind their Captains. The Adjutant then makes the details, and the First Sergeants warn the men. The regimental officer of the day forms the picket, and sends the guards to their posts. The colors are then planted at the centre of the color line, and the arms are stacked on the line ; the fatigue parties to pro- cure siipplies, and the working parties, form in rear of the arms ; the men not on detail pitch the tents. 200 GENERAL REGULATIONS , I , . I War (^Camp of Infantry) Service. 1038. If the camp is near the enemy, the picket remains under anna until the return of the fatigue parties, and, if necessary, is reinforced by details from each company. 1039. In the cavalry, each troop moves a little in rear of the point at which its horses are to be secured, and forms in one rank ; the men then dismount ; a detail is made to hold the horses ; the rest stack their arms and fix the picket rope ; after the horses are attended to, the tents are pitched, and each horseman places his carbine at the side from the weather, and hangs his sabre and bridle on it. 1040. The standard is then carried to the tent of the Colonel. j 1041. The terms front, flank, right, left, file, and rank, have thi same meaning when applied to camps as to the order of battle. 1042. The front of the camp is usually equal to the front of the troops. The tents are arranged in ranks and files. The number of ranks varies with the strength of the companies and the size of the tents. 1043. No officer will be allowed to occupy a house, although vacant and on the ground of his camp, except by permission of the com^ mauder of the brigade, who shall report it to the commander of the division. 1044. The staff officer charged with establishing the camp will design nate the place for the shambles. The offal will be buried. OAMP OF INFANTRY. 1045. Each company has its tents in two files, facing on a street perpendicular to the color line. The width of the street depends on the front of the camp, but should not be less than five paces.* The interval between the ranks of tents is two paces ; between the files of tents of adjacent companies, two paces ; between regiments, twenty;- two paces. * The pace Is thirty inches, or two and one-half feoU I'l;ih Camp or a U(^M L.I' '' yl'O' M Sur'i ?■ Iliiiiiiiiiir Trnin ^ ^ % % X'^3^ ^ % T » ,^ Ofturrs Suik. HIH/>ilirs FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 201 War (^Camp of Infantry) Service. 1046. Tlie color line is ten paces in front of the front rank of tente. The kitchens are twenty paces behind the rear rank of company tents ; the non-commissioned staff and sutler, twenty paces in rear of the kitchens ; the company officers, twenty paces farther in rear ; and the field and staff, twenty paces in rear of the company officers. 1047. The company officers are in rear of their respective companies ; the Captains on the right. 1048. The Colonel and Lieutenant-Colonel are near the centre of the line of field and staff; the Adjutant, a Major and Surgeon, on the right ; the Quartermaster, a Major and Assistant Surgeon, on the left.* 1049. The police guard is at the centre of the line of the non-com- missioned staff, the tents facing to the front, the stacks of arms on the left. 1050. The advanced post of the police guard is about two hundred paces in front of the color line, and opposite the centre of the regi- ment, or on the best ground ; the prisoners' tent about four paces in rear. In a regiment of the second line, the advanced post of the police guard is two hundred paces in rear of the line of its field and staff. 1051. The horses of the staff officers and of the baggage train are twenty-five paces in rear of the tents of the field and staff; the wagons are parked on the same line, and the men of the train camped near them. 1052. The sinks of the men are one hundred and fifty paces in front of the color line ; those of the officers one hundred paces in rear of the train. Both are concealed by bushes. When convenient, the sinks of the men may be placed in rear or on a flank. A portion of the earth dug out for sinks to be thrown back occasionally. 1053. The front of the camp of a regiment of one thousand men in two ranks will be four hundred paces, or one-fifth less paces than * In regiments in which there is but one Major, the camp will be conformed to that prescribed for the infantry in the article " Camps for Instruction." 202 GENERAL REGULATIONS War ( Camp of Cavalry ) Service. the number of files, if the camp is to have the same front as the troops in order of battle. But the front may be reduced to one hundred and ninety paces by narrowing the company streets to five paces ; and if it be desirable to reduce the front still more, the tents of companies may be pitched in single file, those of a division facing on the same street CAMP OF CAVALRY. 1054. In the cavalry, each company has one file of tents ; the tents opening on the street facing the left of the camp. 1055. The horses of each company are placed in a single file, facing the opening of the tents, and are fastened to pickets planted firmly in the ground, from three to six paces from the tents of the troops. 1056. The interval between the file of tents should be such, that the regiment being broken into column of companies [ as indicated in plate ], each company should be on the extension of the line on wliich the horses are to be picketed. 1057. The streets separating the squadrons are wider than those between the companies by the interval separating squadrons in line ; these intervals are kept free from any obstruction throughout the ciimp. 1058. The horses of the rear rank are placed on the left of those of their file-leaders. 1059. The horses of the Lieutenants are placed on tlie right of their platoons ; those of the Captains on the right of the company. 1060. Each horse occupies a space of about two paces. The number of horses in the company fixes the depth of the camp, and the distance between the files of tents ; the forage is placed between the tents. 1061. The kitchens are twenty paces in front of each file of tents. 1062. The non-commissioned officers are in the tents of the front rank. Camp-followers, teamsters, &c. , are in the rear rank. The police guard in the rear rank, neai- the centre of the regiment. Vhne 3 13Vpacfs 20 I I m - ' ■' • ■•■•■•'■* t-^ • a9a333Z33r>33> • ■•■•■ / -■ ^ t§ .' ^ ^ v/ V^ N "^ ^ FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 203 War (^Camp of Artillery^ Service. 1063. The tents of tlie Lieutenants are thirty paces in rear of the file of their company ; the tents of the Captains thirty paces in rear of the Lieutenants. 1064, The Colonel's tent thirty paces in rear of the Captains', near the centre of the regiment ; the Lieutenant-Colonel on his right ; the Adjutant on his left ; the Majors on the same line, opposite the second company on the right and left ; the Surgeon on the left of the Adjutant.* 1065, The field and staff have their horses on the left of their tents, on the same line with the company horses ; sick horses are placed in one line on the riglit or left of the camp. The men who attend them have a separate file of tents ; the forges and wagons in rear of this file. The horses of the train and of camp-followers are in one or more files extending to the rear, behind the right or left squadron. The advanced post of the police guard is two hundred paces in front, opposite the centre of the regiment ; the horses in one or two files. 1066. The sinks for the men are one hundred and fifty paces in front, those for officers one hundred paces in rear of the camp. CAMP OF ARTILLERY. 1067. The artillery is encamped near the troops to which it is attached, so as to be protected from attack, and to contribute to the defence of the camp. Sentinels for the park are famished by the artillery, and, when necessary, by the other troops. 1068, For a battery of six pieces the tents are in three files : one for each section ; distance between the ranks of tents fifteen paces ; tents opening to the front. The horses of each section are picketed in one file, ten paces to the left of the file of tents. In the horse artillery, or if the number of horses makes it necessary, the horses are in two files on the right and left of the file of tents. The kitchens are twenty- * When there is but one Major to a regiment, the post of the Colonel will be in the centre of the regiment, on the lino of the field and staff; and that of the Lieu- tenant-Colonel in the right wing, in place of the senior Major. 204 GENERAL REGULATIONS War (_ Bivouacs') Service. five paces in front of the front rank of tents. The tents of the officers are in the outside files of company tents, twenty-five paces in rear of the rear rank ; the Captain on the right, the Lieutenants on the left. 1069. The park is opposite the centre of the camp, forty paces in rear of the officers' tents. The carriages in files, four paces apart ; distance between ranks of carriages sufficient for the horses when harnessed to them ; the park guard is twenty-five paces in rear of the park. The sinks for the men one hundred and fifty paces in front ; for the officers one hundred paces in rear. The harness is in the tents of the men. BIVOUACS. 1070. A regiment of cavalry being in order of battle, in rear of the ground to be occupied, the Colonel breaks it by platoons to the right. The horses of each platoon are placed in a single row, and fastened as prescribed for camps ; near the enemy, they remain saddled all jiight, with slackened girths. The arms are at first stacked in rear of each row of horses ; the sabres, with the bridles hung on them, are placed against the stacks. 1071. The forage is placed on the right of each row of horses. Two stable-guards for each platoon watch the horses. 1072. A fire for each platoon is made near the color line, twentjr paces to the left of the row of horses. A shelter is made for the men around the fire, if possible, and each man then stands his arms and bridle against the shelter. 1073. The fires and shelter for the officers are placed in rear of the line of those for the men. 1074. The interval between the squadrons must be without obstruc- tion throughout the whole depth of the bivouac. 1075. The interval between the shelters should be such that the platoons can take up a Une of battle freely to the front or rear. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 205 War ( Contonments ) Service. 1076. The distance from the enemy decides the manner in which the horses are to be fed and led to water. Wlien it is permitted to unsaddle, the saddles are placed in the rear of the horses. 1077. In infantry, the fires are made in rear of the color line, on the ground that would be occupied by the tents in camp. The companies are placed around them, and, if possible, construct shelters. When liable to surprise, the infantry should stand to arms at day break, and the cavalry mount until the return of the reconnoitring parties. If the arms are to be taken apart to clean, it must be done by detach- ments, successively. CANTONMENTS. 1078. The cavalry should be placed under shelter* whenever the distance from the enemy, and from the ground where the troops are to form for battle, permit it. Taverns and farm-houses, with large stables and free access, are selected for quartering them. 1079. The Colonel indicates the place of assembling in case of alarm. It should generally be outside the cantonment ; the egress from it should be free ; the retreat upon the other positions secure, and roads leading to it on the side of the enemy obstructed. 1080. The necessary orders being given, as in establishing a camp, the picket and grand guards are posted. A sentinel may be placed on a steeple or high house, and then the troops are marched to the quarters. The men sleep in the stables, if it is thought necessary. 1081. The above applies in the main to infantry. Near the enemy, companies or platoons should be collected, as much as possible, in the same houses. If companies must be separated, they should be divided by platoons or squads. All take arms at day break. 1082. When cavalry and infantry canton together, the latter furnish the guards by night, and the former by day. 1083. Troops, cantoned in presence of the enemy, should be covered 6y advanced guards and natural or artificial obstacles. Cantonments taken during a cessation of hostilities should be established in rear Military. 18 206 GENERAL REGULATIONS War Service, of a line of defence, and in front of the point on which the troops would concentrate to receive an attack. The General commanding in chief assigns the limits of their cantonments to the divisons, the commanders of divisions to brigades, and the commanders of brigades post their regiments. Tlie position of each corps, in case of attack, is carefully pointed out by the Generals. HEAD-QUARTERS. 1084. Generals take post at the centre of their commands, on the main channels of communication. If troops bivouac in presence of the enemy, the Generals bivouac with them. MILITARY EXERCISES. 1085. When troops remain in camp or cantonment many days, the Colonels require them to be exercised in the school of the battalion and squadron. Regiments and brigades encamped by division are not united for drills withoiit the permission of the General of division. The troops must not be exercised at the firings without the authority of the General commanding in chief. The practice of the drums must never begin with the "general," or the "march of the regi- ment ;" nor the trumpets with the sound " to horse." The hour for practice is always announced. ORDERS. 1086. In the field, verbal orders and important sealed orders are carried by officers, and, if possible, by staff oflicers. "When orders are carried by orderlies, the place and time of departure will be marked on them, and place and time of delivery on the receipt. DISPATCHES. 1087. Dispatches, particularly for distant corps^ should be intrusted only to officers to whom their contents can be confided. In a country occupied by the enemy the bearer of dispatches should be accom- panied by at least two of the best mounted men ; should avoid towns and villages, and the main roads ; rest as little as possible, and only FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 207 War Service. at out-of-the-way places. Wliere there is danger, he should send one of the men in advance, and be always ready to destroy his dispatches. He should be adroit in answering questions about the army, and not to be intimidated by threats WATCHWORDS. 1088. The parole and countersign are issued daily from the principal head- quarters of the command. The countersign is given to the sentinels and non-commissioned officers of guards ; the parole to the commissioned officers of guards. The parole is usually the name of a general, the countersign of a battle. 1089. When the parole and countersign cannot be communicated daily to a post or detachment which ought to use the same as the main body, a series of words may be sent for some days in advance. 1090. If the countersign is lost, or one of the guard deserts with it, the Commander on the spot will substitute another, and report the case at once to the proper superior, that immediate notice may be given to head-quarters. ISSUES, 1091. At what time and for what period issues are made, must depend on circumstances, and be regulated in orders. When an army is not moving, rations are generally issued for four days at a time. Issues to the companies of a regiment, and the fatigues to receive them, are superintended by an officer detailed from the regiment. Issues are made from one end of the line to the other, beginning on the right and left alternately. An issue commenced to one regiment will not be interrupted for another entitled to precedence if it had been in place. THE ROSTER, OR DETAILS FOR SERVICE. 1092. The duties performed by detail are of three classes. The first class comprises : 1st, grand guards and outposts ; 2d, interior guards, as of magazine, hospital, &c. ; 3d, orderlies ; 4th, police gua^-ds. 208 GENERAL REGULATIONS War (_The Roster, or Details for Service) Service. The secmd class comprises : 1st, detachments to protect laborers on military works, as field-works, communicatious, &c, ; 2d, working parties on such works ; 3d, detachments to protect fatigues. The third cUiss are all fatigues, without arms, in or out of camp. In the cavalry, stable guards form a separate roster, and count before fatigue. 1093. The rosters are distinct for each class. Officers are named on them in the order of rank. The details are taken in succession in the order of the roster, beginning at the head. 1094. Lieutenants form one roster, and first and second Lieutenants are entered on it alternately. The senior first Lieutenant is the first on the roster ; the senior second Lieutenant is the second, &c. The Captains form one roster, and are exempt from fatigues, except to superintend issues. A Captain commanding a battalion temporarily is exempt from detail, and duty falling to him passes. Lieutenant- Colonels and Majors are on one roster. They may be detailed for duties of the first and second classes, when the importance of the guards and detachments requires it. Their roster is kept at division and brigade head-quarters. In the company, sergeants, corporals and privates form distinct rosters. 1095. Officers, non-commissioned officers and soldiers take duties of the first class in the order stated, viz., the first, for the detail, takes the grand guards ; the next, the interior guards ; the last, the police guard ; and the same rule in regard to the details and duties of the second class. In the details for the third class, the senior officer takes the largest party. The party first for detail takes the service out of camp. 1096. When the officer whose tour it is, is not able to take it, or is not present at the hour of marching, the next after him takes it. When a guard has passed the chain of sentinels, or an interior guard lias reached its post, the officer whose tour it was cannot then take it. He takes the tour of the officer who has taken his. When an officer is prevented by sickness from taking his tour, it passes. These rules apply equally to non-commissioned officers and soldiers. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 209 War ( Police Guard ) Service. 1097. Duties of the first and second classes are credited on tlie roster when the guards or detachments have passed the chain of sentinels, or an interior guard has reached its post ; fatigue duties when the parties have passed the chain or begun the duties in camp. 1098. Every officer, non-commissioned officer or soldier, on duty of the first class, or who is of the next detail for such duty, takes, when relieved, the duty of the second or third class that has fallen to him during that time, unless he has marched for detachment more than twenty-four hours. 1099. Soldiers march with knapsacks on all duties of the first class ; and with arms and equipments complete on all working parties out of the camp, unless otherwise ordered. In the cavalry, horses are packed for all mounted service. 1100. In the cavalry, dismounted men, and those whose horses are not in order, are preferred for the detail for dismounted service. Those who are mounted are never employed on those services if the number of the other class are sufficient. 1101. Every non-commissioned officer and soldier in the cavalry, detailed for dismounted service, mast, before he marches, take to the First Sergeant of the troop, or Sergeant of his squad, his horse equip- ments and his valise ready packed. In case of alarm, the First Sergeant sees that the horses of these men are equipped and led to the rendezvous. 1102. These rules in regard to the roster apply also to service in garrison. POLICE GUARD. 1103. In each regiment a police guard is detailed every day, consist- ing of two sergeants, three corporals, two drummers, and men enough to furnish the required sentinels and patrols. The men are taken from all the companies, from each in proportion to its strength. The guard is commanded by a Lieutenant, under the supervision of a Captain, as regimental officer of the day. It furnishes ten sentinels Military. 18* 210 GENERAL REGULATIONS War ( Police Guard ) Service. at the camp : one over the arms of the guard ; one at the Colonel's tent ; three on the color front, one of them over the colors ; three, fifty paces in rear of the field officers' tents ; and one on each flank, Lotween it and the next regiment. If it is a flank regiment, ont more sentinel is posted on the outer flank. 1104. An advanced post is detached from the police guard, com- posed of a sergeant, a corporal, a drummer, and nine men to fumislx sentinels and the guard over the prisoners. The men are the first of the guard roster from each company. The men of the advanced post must not leave it under any pretext. Their meals are sent to the post. The advanced post furnishes three sentinels : two a few paces in front of the post, opposite the right and left wing of the regiment, posted so as to see as far as possible to the front, and one over the arms. 1105. In the cavalry, dismounted men are employed in preference on the police guard. The mounted men on guard are sent in succes- sion, a part at a time, to groom their horses. The advanced post is always formed of mounted men. 1106. In each company a corporal has charge of the stable guard. His tour begins at retreat, and ends at morning stable-call. Tlie stable guard is large enough to relieve the men on post every two hours. They sleep in their tents, and are called by the corporal when wanted. At retreat he closes the streets of the camp with cords, or uses other precautions to prevent the escape of loose horses. 1107. The officer of the day is charged with the order and cleanli- ness of the camp ; a fatigue is furnished to him when the number of prisoners is insufficient to clean the camp. He has the calls beaten by the drummer of the guard. 1108. The police guard and the advanced post pay the same honors as other guards. They take arms when an armed body approaches. 1109. The sentinel over the colors has orders not to permit them to be moved except in presence of an escort ; to let no one touch them FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 211 War ( Police Guard ) Service^ but the color-bearer, or the sergeant of the police guard when he is accompanied by two armed men. 1110. The sentinels on the color front permit no soldier to take arms from the stacks, except by order of some officer, or a non-com- missioned officer of the gu^xd. The sentinel at the Colonel's tent has orders to warn him, day or night, of any unusual movement in or about the camp. 1111. The sentinels on the front, flanks and rear, see that no soldier leaves camp with horse or arms unless conducted by a non-commis- sioned officer. They prevent non-commissioned officers and soldiers from passing out at night, except to go to the sinks, and mark if they return. They arrest, at any time, suspicious persons prowling about the camp, and at night, every one who attempts to enter, even the soldiers of other corps. Arrested persons are sent to the officer of the guard, who sends them, if necessary, to the officer of the day. 1112. The sentinels on the front of the advanced post have orders to permit neither non-commissioned officers nor soldiers to pass the line, without reporting at the advanced post ; to warn the advanced post of the approach of any armed body, and to arrest all suspicious persons. The sergeant sends persons so arrested to the officer of the guard, and warns him of the approach of any armed body. 1113. The sentinel over the arms at the advanced post guards the prisoners and keeps sight of them, and suffers no one to converse with them without permission. They are only permitted to go to the sinks one at a time, and under a sentinel. 1114. If any one is to be passed out of camp at night, the officer of the guard sends him under escort to the advanced post, and the sergeant of the post has him passed over the chain. 1115. At retreat, the officer of the guard has the roll of his guard called, and inspects arms, to see that they are loaded and in order ; and visits the advanced posts for the same purpose. The sergeant oi the police guard, accompanied by two armed soldiers, folds the colors and lays them on the trestle in rear of the arms. He sees that the 212 GENERAL REGULATIONS War (^Police Guard") Service. sutlers' stores are then closed, and the men leave them, and that the kitchen fires are put out at the appointed hour. 1116. The officer o£ the day satisfies himself frequently during the night, of the vigilance of the police guard and advanced post. He prescribes patrols and rounds to be made by the officer and non-com- missioned officers of the guard. The officer of the guard orders them when he thinks necessary. He visits the sentinels fre-quently. 1117. At reveille, the police guard takes arms ; the officer of the guard inspects it and the advanced post. The sergeant replants the colors in place. At retreat and reveille the advanced post takes arms ; the sergeant makes his report to the officer of the guard when he visits the post. 1118. When necessary, the camp is covered at night with small outposts, forming a double chain of sentinels. These posts are under the orders of the commander of the police guard, and are visited by his patrols and rounds. 1119. The officer of the guard makes his report of his tour of service, including tlie advanced post, and sends it, after the guard is marched off, to the officer of the day. 1120. When the regiment marches, the men of the police guard return to their companies, except those of the advanced post. In tlie cavalry, at the sound "boot and saddle," the officer of the guard sends one-half the men to saddle and pack; when the regiment assembles, all the men join it. 1121. When the camping-party precedes the regiment, and the new police guard marches with the camping-party, the guard, on reaching the camp, forms in line thirty paces in front of the c<»ntre of the ground marked for the regiment. Tlie officer of the guard furnishes the sentinels required by the commander of the camping-party. The advanced post takes its station. 1122. The advanced post of the old police guard takes charge of the prisoners on the march, and marches, bayonets fixed, at the centra FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 21 a War ( The Picket ) Service. of the regiment. On reaching camp, it turns over the prisoners to the new advanced post. THE PICKET. 1123. The detail for the picket is made daily, after the details for duty of the first class, and from the next for detail on the roster of that class. It is designed to furnish detachments and guards un- expectedly called for in the twenty-four hours ; it counts as a tour of the first class to those who have marched on detachment or guard, or who have passed the night in bivouac. 1124. The officers, non-commissioned officers and soldiers of the picket are at ill times dressed and equipped ; the horses are saddled, and knapsacks and valises ready to be put on. 1125. Detachments and guards from the picket are taken from the head of the picket-roll in each company. The picket of a regiment is composed of a Lieutenant, two sergeants, four corporals, a drummer, and about forty privates. For a smaller force, the picket is in pro- portion to the strength of the detachment. 1126. Officers and men of the picket who march on detachment or guard before retreat will be replaced. 1127. The picket is assembled by the Adjutant at guard-mounting ; it is posted twelve paces in rear of the guard, and is inspected by its own commander. When the guard has marched in review, the com- mandant of the picket marches it to the left of the police guard, where it stacks its arms, and is dismissed ; the arms are under charge of the sentinel of the police guard. 1128. The picket is only assembled by the orders of the Colonel or officer of the day. It forms on the left of the police guard. 1129. The officer of the day requires the roll of the picket to be called frequently during the day ; the call is sounded from the police guard. At roll-calls and inspections, infantry pickets assemble with knapsacks on, cavalry on foot. The picket is assembled at retreat ; 214 GENERAL REGULATIONS War ( Grand Guards and other Outposts ) Service. tlie officer lias the roll called, and inspects the arms. The picket sleep in their tents, but without undressing. 1130. The picket does not assemble at night, except in cases of alarm, or when the whole or a part is to march ; then the officer of the daj calls the officers, the latter the non-commissioned officers, and these the men, for which purpose each ascertains the tents of those he is to call ; thej ai-e assembled without beat of drum or other noise. At night, cavalry pickets assemble mounted. 1131. Pickets rejoin their companies whenever the regiment is under arms for review^ drill, march or battle. GRAND GUARDS AND OTHER OUTPOSTS. 1132. Grand guards are the advanced posts of a camp or cantonment, and should cover the approaches to it. Their number, strength, and position are regulated by the Commanders of brigades ; in detached corps, by the Commanding Officer. When it can be, the grand guards of cavalry and infantry are combined, the cavalry furnishing the advanced sentinels. When the cavalry is weak, the grand guards are infantry, but furnished with a few cavalry soldiers, to get and carry intelligence of the enemy. 1133. The strength of the grand guard of a brigade will depend on its object and the strength of the regiments, the nature of tlie country, the position of the enemy, and the disposition of the inhabitants. It is usually commanded by a Captain. 1134. Under the supervision of the Generals of division and brigade, tlie grand guards are specially under the direction of a field officer of the day in each brigade. In cage of necessity. Captains may be added to the roster of Lieutenant- Colonels and Majors for this detail. 113.5. Staff officers, sent from division head-quarters to inspect the X>osts of grand giiards, give them orders only in urgent cases, and in the absence of the field officer of the day of the brigade. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 215 War {Grand Guards, and other Outposts y Service. 1136. Grand guards usually mount at the same time as the othei guards, but may mount before day break if the General of brigade thinks it necessary to double the outposts at that time. In this ease they assemble and march without noise, and during their march throw out scouts ; this precaution should always be taken in the first posting of a grand guard. The doubling of guards weakens the corps and fatigues the men, and should seldom be resorted to, and never when preparing to march or fight. 1137. A grand guard is conducted to its post, in the first instance^ by the field officer of the day, guided by a staff officer who accom- panied the General in his reconnoissance. After the post has been established, the Commander sends to the field officer of the day, when necessary, a soldier of the guard to guide the relieving guard to the post. He also sends to him in the evening a corporal or trusty man of the guard for the note containing the parole and countersign, and sends them before dark to the detached posts. He will not suffer his guard to be relieved except by a guard of the brigade, or by special orders. 1138. If there is no pass to be observed or defended, the grand guards are placed near the centre of the ground they are to observe, on sheltered, and, if possible, high ground, the better to coaaceal their strength and observe the enemy ; they ought not to be placed near tlie edge of a wood. When, during the day, they are placed very near or in sight of the enemy, they fall back at night on posts selected farther to the rear. 1139. In broken or mountainous countries, and particularly if the inhabitants are ill-disposed, intermediate posts must be established when it is necessary to post the grand guard distant from the camp. 1140. Grand guards are chiefly to watch the enemy in front ; their flanks are protected by each other, and the camp must furnish posts to protect their rear and secure their retreat. 1141. Grand guards are seldom intrenched, and never without the orders of the General, except by a barricade or ditch when exposed in a plain to attacks of cavalry. 216 GENERAL REGULATIONS War ( Grand Guards and other Outposts ) Service. 1142. The General of division, if he thinks proper, changes the stations and orders of these guards, and establishes posts to connect the brigades or protect the exterior flanks. 1143. After a grand guard is posted, the first care of the commander and of the field officer of the day is to get news of the enemy ; then to reconnoitre his position, and the roads, bridges, fords and defiles. This rcconnoissance determines the force and position of the small posts and their sentinels day and night. These posts, according to tlieir importance, are commanded by oflicers or non-commissioned officers ; the cavalry posts may be relieved every four or eight hours. 1144. The commander of a grand guard receives detailed instmctiona from the General and field officer of the day of the brigade, and instructs the commanders of the small posts as to their duties and the arrangements for defence or retreat. The commanders of grand guards may, in urgent cases, change the positions of the small posts. If the small posts are to change their positions at night, they wait until the grand guard have got into position and darkness hides their movements from the enemy ; then march silently and rapidly under the charge of an officer. 1145. In detached corps, small posts of picked men are at night sent forward on the roads by which the enemy may attack or turn the position. They watch the forks of the roads, keep silence, conceal themselves, light no fires, and often change place. Tliey announce the approach of the enemy by signals agreed uj^on, and retreat, by routes examined during the day, to places selected, and rejoin the guard at day break. 1146. Grand guards have special orders in each case, and the follow- ing in all cases : to inform the nearest posts and the field officer of the day, or the General of brigade, of the march and movements of the enemy, and of the attacks they receive or fear ; to examine every person passing near the post, particularly those coming from without ; to arrest suspicious persons, and all soldiers and camp-followers who try to pass out without permission, and to send to the General, unless othei-wise directed, all country people who come in. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 211 War (^Grand Guards and other Outposts') Service. 1147. All out-guards stand to arms at night on the approach of patrols, rounds or other parties; the sentinel over the arms has orders to call them out. 1148. Advanced posts will not take arms for inspection or ceremony when it would expose them to the view of the enemy. 1149. Grand guards are often charged with the care and working of telegraphic signals. 1150. The sentinels and vedettes are placed on points from which they can see farthest, taking care not to break their connection with each other or with their posts. They are concealed from the enemy as much as possible by walls, or trees, or elevated gi-ound. It is generally even of more advantage not to be seen than to see far. They should not be placed near covers, where the enemy may capture them. 1151. A sentinel should be always ready to fire ; vedettes carry their pistols or carbines in their hands. A sentinel must be sure of the presence of an enemy before he fires ; once satisfied of that, he must fire, though all defence on his part be useless, as the safety of the post may depend on it. Sentinels fire on all persons deserting to the enemy. 11 52. If the post must be where a sentinel on it cannot communicate with the guard, a corporal and three men are detached for it, or the sentinels are doubled, that one may communicate with the guard. During the day the communication may be made by signals, such as raising a cap or handkerchief. At night sentinels are placed on low ground, the better to see objects against the sky. 1153. To lessen the duty of rounds, and keep more men on the alert at night, sentinels are relieved every hour. To prevent sentinels from being surprised, it is sometimes well to precede the countersign by signals, such as striking the musket with the hand, striking the hands together, &c. 1154. On the approach of any one at night, the sentinel orders : "HaltT' If the order is not obeyed after once repeated, he fires. Military. 19 218 GENERAL REGULATIONS War (^Grand Guards and other Outposts') Service. If obeyed, he calls : " IVho goes thereV^ If answered : " Rounds " or " Patrol,^^ he says : " Advance ttrith the countersign.^^ If more than one advance at the same time, or the person who advances fails to give the countersign or signal agreed on, the sentinel fires, and falls back on his guard. The sentinel over the arms, as soon as his hail is answered, turns out the guard, and the corporal goes to reconnoitre. When it is desirable to hide the position of the sentinel from the enemy, the hail is replaced by signals ; the sentinel gives the signal, and those approaching the counter signal. 1155. With raw troops, or when the light troops of the enemy are numerous or active, and when the country is broken or wooded, the night stormy or dark, sentinels should be doubled. In this case, while one watches, the other, called a flying sentinel, moves about, examining the paths and hollows. 1156. The commandants of grand guards visit the sentinels often ; change their positions when necessary ; make them repeat their orders ; teach them under what circumstances and at what signals to retire, and particularly not to fall back directly on their guard, if pursued, but to lead the enemy in a circuit. 1157. At night, half the men of the grand guard oflf post watch under arms, while the rest lie down, arms by their side. The horses are always bridled ; the horsemen hold the reins, and must not sleep. 1158. When a grand guard of cavalry is so placed as not to be liable to a sudden attack from the enemy, the Gknieral may permit the horses to be fed during the night, unbridling for this purpose a few at a time, the horsemen being vigilant to prevent them from escaping. 1159. An hour before break of day, infantry grand guards stand to arni.s, and cavalry mount. At the advanced posts, some of the infantry are all night under arms, some of the cavalry on horseback. 1160. The commander of a grand guard regulates the numbers, the hours, and the march of patrols and rounds, according to the strength of his troop and the necessity for precaution ; and, accompanied by FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 219 War ( Grand Guards and other Outposts ) Service, those who are to command the patrols and rounds during the night, he will reconnoitre all the routes they are to follow. 1161. Patrols and rounds march slowly, in silence, and with great • precaution ; halt frequently to listen and examine the ground. The rounds consist of an officer or non-commissioned officer, and two or three men. 1162. Towards break of day the patrols ought to be more frequent, and sent to greater distances. They examine the hollow- ways and ground likely to conceal an enemy, but with great caution, to avoid being cut oflf, or engaged in an unequal combat ; if they meet the enemy, they fire and attempt to stop his march. While the patrols are out, the posts are under arms. 1163. Cavalry patrols should examine the country to a greater dis- tance than infantry, and report to the infantry guard everything they observe. The morning patrols and scouts do not return until broad daylight ; and when they return, the night sentinels are withdrawn, and the posts for the day resumed. 1164. When patrols are sent beyond the advanced posts, the posts and sentinels should be warned. 1165. On their return, commanders of patrols report in regard to the ground, and everything they have observed of the movements of the enemy, or of his posts, and the commandant of the grand guard reports to the field officer of the day. 1166. The fires of grand guards should be hidden by a wall or ditch, or other screen. To deceive the enemy, fires are sometimes made on ground not occupied. Fires are not permitted to small posts liable to surprise. 1167. The horses of cavalry guards are watered or fed by detach- ments ; during which the rest are ready to mount. 1168. If a body of troops attempt to enter the camp at night, unless their arrival has been announced, or the commander is known to, or is the bearer of a written order to the commander of the grand guard, 220 GENERAL REGULATIONS War {Intrenched Posts') Service. he stops tliem, and sends the commander under escort to the field officer of tlie day, and warns the posts near him. 1169. Bearers of flags are not permitted to pass the outer chain of sentinels ; their faces are turned from the post or army ; if necessary, their eyes are bandaged ; a non-commissioned officer stays with them to prevent indiscretion of the sentinels. 1170. The commandant of the grand guard receipts for dispatches, and sends them to the field officer of the day or General of brigade, and dismisses the bearer ; but if he has discovered what ought to be concealed from the enemy, he is detained as long as necessary. 1171. Deserters are disarmed at the advanced posts, and sent to the commander of the grand guard, who gets from them all the informa- tion he can concerning his post. If many come at night, they are received cautiously , a few at a time. They are sent in the morning to the field officer of the day, or to the nearest post or camp, to be con- ducted to the General of the brigade. All suspected persons are searched by the commanders of the posts. 1172. When an enemy advances to attack, unless he is in too great force, or the grand guard is to defend an intrenched post or a defile, it will take the positions and execute the movements to check the enemy, acting as skirmishers, or fighting in close or open order, as may be best. The guard joins its corps when in line, or when a suffi- cient number of troops have reached the ground it defends. INTRENCHED POSTS. 1173. Unless the army be acting on the defensive, no post should be intrenched, except to cover the weak parts of the line, or at points which the enemy cannot avoid, or in mountain warfare, or to close a defile, or cover winter quarters. 1174. Posts connected with the operations of an army are intrenched only by order of the General commanding in chief or a (Jeneral of division. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 221 War {Detachments) Service. 1175. Any intrenchment that requires artillery is considered as a post, and a guard or garrison and commander are assigned to it. 1176. The General who establishes an intrenched post gives to its commander detailed instructions in regard to its defence, and the circumstances under which the defence should cease. 1177. The commander reconnoitres his post ; distributes the troops ; posts the officers and non-commissioned officers ; forms a reserve ; gives orders for all contingencies he can foresee ; supposes an attack, and arranges his troops for defence, so as to prepare them for attack, day or night. 1178. In dark weather he redoubles his vigilance, and changes the hours and direction of the rounds and patrols. He permits no flags of truce, deserters or strangers to enter. If a flag ought to pass his post, he bandages his eyes. He refuses admittance to a relief or any other party until he has carefully examined them. In case of an attack, he does not wait for orders or hold a council. Having defended his post to the last extremity, or till the purpose of defence, according to his instructions, is answered, he may then spike his guns and rejoin the army under cover of night, or by cutting his way through the enemy. DETACHMENTS. 1179. When a detachment is to be formed from the different regi- ments of a brigade, the Assistant Adjutant-General of the brigade assembles it, and turns it over to the commander. 1180. When a detachment is to be formed from diflferent brigades, the Assistant Adjutant- General in each forms the contingent of the brigade, and sends it to the place of assembling. 1181. Detachments are generally formed by taking battalions, squad- rons, companies, platoons in turn, according to the roster for such detail. 1182. When the detachment is to consist of men from every com^ pany or troop, the first on the roster for guard are taken. Military. 19* 222 GENERAL KEGULATIOXS War (^Rcconnoissances) Service. 1183. Officers, non-commissioned officers and soldiers, whose tour it is to go on detachment, if employed otlierwise at the time, are relieved from the duty they are on, if they can reach camp in time to march with the detachment. 1184. When detachments meet, the command is regulated while they serve together as if they formed one detachment. But the senior officer cannot prevent the commander of any detachment from moving when he thinks proper, to execute the orders he has received. 1185. On the return of a detachment, the commander reports to the head- quarters from which he received his orders. RECONNOISSANCES. 1186. Near an enemy, daily reconnoissances are made to observe the ground in front, and to discover whether the advanced guards of the enemy have been increased or put in motion, or any other sign of his preparation for march or action. 1187. They are made by small parties of cavalry and infantry, from the brigade, under direction of the General of division or the General of a separate brigade, and to less distance by the patrols of the grand guard, and are not repeated at the same hour or by the same route. On the plain, reconnoissances are made by cavalry ; among mountains, by infantry, with a few horsemen to carry intelligence. 1188. Reconnoitring parties observe the following precautions : to leave small posts, or sentinels at intervals, to transmit intelligence to the advanced posts of the army, unless the return to it be by a dif- ferent route ; to march with caution, to avoid fighting ; and see, if possible, without being seen ; to keep an advanced guard ; to send well mounted men ahead of the advanced guard, and on the flank of the party ; to instruct the scouts that no two should enter a defile or mount a hill together, but to go one at a time, while one watches to carry the news if the other is taken. 1189. Before day break the advanced guard and scouts are drawn closer J the party then march slowly and silently, stop frequently to FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 223 War (^Partisans and Flankers') Service. listen, and keep the horses that neigh in the rear. The party should enter no wood, defile, village or inclosure nntil it has been fully examined by the scouts. 1190. Special reconnoissances are made under the instruction of the General in command, by such officers and with such force as he may direct 1191. Offensive or forced reconnoissances are to ascertain with cer- tainty points in the enemy's position, or his strength. They are sometimes preludes to real actions, and sometimes only demonstra- tions. They drive in his outposts, and sometimes engage special corps of his line. They are only made by the order of the Greneral commanding in chief, or the commander of an isolated corps. 1192. In all reports of reconnoissances, the officer making them shall distinguish expressly what he has seen from the accounts he has not been able to verify personally. 1193. In special and offensive reconnoissances, the report must be accompanied by a field-sketch of the localities, the dispositions and defences of the enemy. PARTISANS AND FLANKERS. 1194. The operations of partisan corps depend on the nature and theatre of the war ; they enter into the general plan of operations, and are conducted under the orders of the General commanding in chief. 1195. The composition and strength of partisan corps and detach- ments of flankers depend on the object, the difficulties, the distance, and the probable time of the expedition. 1196. The purpose of these isolated corps is to reconnoitre at a dis- tance on the flanks of the army, to protect its operations, to deceive the enemy, to interrupt his communications, to intercept his couriers and his correspondence, to threaten or destroy his magazines, to carry off his posts and his convoys, or, at all events, to retard his march by making him detach largely for their protection. 224 GENERAL REGULATIONS - ■- ^ War ( Partisans and Flankers ) Service. 1197. While these corps fatigue the enemy and embarrass his opera- tions, they endeavor to inspire confidence and secure the good will of the inhabitants in a friendly country, and to hold them in check in an enemy's country. 1198. They move actively, appear unexpectedly on different points in such a manner as to make it impossible to estimate their force, or to tell whether they are irregular forces or an advanced guard. 1199. These operations require vigilance, secrecy, energy and promptness. The partisan commander must frequently supply by stratagem and audacity what he wants in numbers. 1200. These detachments are sometimes composed of different arms, but the service belongs more particularly to the light cavalry, which can move to a distance by rapid marches, surprise the enemy, attack unexpectedly, and retire as promptly. 1201. Stormy weather, fogs, extreme heat, and the night above all, are favorable to the success of ambuscades; when the enemy are careless, the break of day is the best time. A partisan commander should communicate to his second in command his secret orders, the direction and object of the expedition, and the different points of junction with the army. 1202. Guides of the country and spies are often necessary to the partisan. They are examined separately, and confronted if their accounts differ. When there is but one guide, he marches with the advanced guard, guarded by two men, and bound if necessary. Peddlers and smugglers are specially suitable for spies. 1203. A fit time to attack a convoy is at a halt, or when they begin to park, or when they are watering, or passing a wood or a defile ; at a bend of the road, a bridge, or steep ascent. 1204. The attacking party may be principally cavalry, with some infantry. The first object is to disperse the escort. A part of the detachment attacks the main body of the escort, another the wagons, and a tliird is in reserve ; skirmishers line the road, and try to cut FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 225 War (^Marches) Seivice. the traces, and to seize the front and rear wagons, and turn them across the road, to prevent the train from advancing or retreating. 1205, If the convoy is parked, the cavalry surrounds it, assails the escort, and tries to draw it away from the train. The infantry then engage the troops remaining at the park, slip under the wagons, and get into the park. When the cavalry is alone and the enemy are shaken, they dismount a portion of the men to supply the want of infantry. 1206. If it is a large convoy, the principal attack is made on the centre ; the most valuable wagons are also selected, and additional horses are put to thera if the attack is successfal Those that cannot be carried off are burned. MARCHES. 1207. The object of the movement and the nature of the ground determine the order of march, the kind of troops in each column, and the number of columns. 1208. The force is divided into as many columns as circumstances permit, without weakening any one too much. They ought to pre- serve their communications, and be within supporting distance of each other. The Commander of each column ought to know the strength and direction of the others. 1209. The advance and rear guards are usually light troops ; their eterength and composition depend on the nature of the ground and the position of the enemy. They serve to cover the movements of the army, and to hold the enemy in check until the General has time to make his arrangements. 1210. The advance guard is not always at the head of the column ; in a march to a flank, it takes such positions as cover the movement. Sappers are attached to the advanced guard if required. 1211. The " general^'''' sounded one hour before the time of marching, is the signal to strike tents, to load the wagons, and pack horses, and 226 GENERAL REGULATIONS - * War (^Marches) Service. send them to the place of assembling. The fires are then put out, and care taken to avoid burning straw, &c., or giving to the enemy any other indication of the movement. 1212. The " march" will be beat in the infantry, and the " advance '* sounded in the cavalry, in succession, as each is to take its place in the column, 1213. When an army should form suddenly to meet the enemy, the " long roll " is beat, and " to horse " sounded. The troops form rapidly in front of their camp- 1214. Batteries of artillery and their caissons move with the corj)a to which they are attached ; the field train and ambulances march at the rear of the column ; and the baggage with the rear guard. 1215. Cavalry and infantry do not march together, unless the proxi- mity of the enemy makes it necessary. 1216. In cavalry marches, when distant from the enemy, each regi- ment, and, if possible, each squadron, forms a separate column, in order to keep up the same gait fi-om front to rear, and to trot, when desirable, on good ground. In such cases, the cavalry may leave the camp later, and can give more rest to the horses, and more attention to the shoeing and harness. Horses are not bridled until the time to start. 1217. When necessary, the orders specify the rations. the men are to carry in their haversacks. The field officers and Captains make Inspections frequently during the march ; at halts they examine the knapsacks, valises and haversacks, and throw away all articles not authorized. The officers and non-commissioned officers of cavalry companies attend personally to the packs and girths. 1218. When it can be avoided, troops should not be assembled on high roads or other places where they interrupt the communication, 1219. Generals of division and commanders of detached corps send a staff officer to the rendezvous, in advance, to receive the troops, wbo, on arriving, take their place in the order of battle, and form in FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 227 VYar {Marches') Service. close column, unless otherwise ordered. Artillery, or trains halted on the roads, form in file on one side. 1220. The execution of marching orders must not he delayed. If the Commander is not at the head of his troops when they are to march, the next in rank puts the column in motion. 1221. If possible, each column is preceded by a detachment of sappers, to remove obstacles to the march, aided, when necessary, by infantry, or the people of the country. The detachment is divided into two sections : one stops to remove the first obstacle, the other moves on to the next. 1222. In night marches, and at bad places, and at cross-roads, when necessary, intelligent non-commissioned officers are posted to show the way, and are relieved by the regiments ag they come up. 1223. On the march no one shall fire a gun, or cry "AcrZt" or " march' ^ without orders. 1224. Soldiers are not to stop for water ; the canteens should be filled before starting. 1225. It is better to avoid villages ; but if the route lies through them, officers and non-commissioned officers are to be vigilant to prevent straggling. Halts should not take place at villages. 1226. Besides the rear guard, the General sometimes takes a detach- ment from the last regiment, and adds to it non-commissioned officers from each regiment, to examine all villages and hiding places on the route, to bring up stragglers and seize marauders. 1227. In night marches, the sergeant-major of each regiment remains at the rear with a drummer, to give notice when darkness or difficulty stops the march. In cavalry, a trumpet is placed in rear of each squadron, and the signal repeated to the head of the regiment. 1228. The General and field officers frequently stop, or send officers to the rear, to see that the troops march in the prescribed order, and keep their distances. To quicken the march, the General warns the 228 GENERAL REGULATIONS War (^Marches) Service. Colonels, and may order a signal to be beat. It is repeated in all the regiments. 1229. In approaching a defile the Colonels are warned ; they close their regiments as they gome up ; each regiment passes separately, at an accelerated pace, and in as close order as possible. The leading regiment having passed, and left room enough for the -whole column in close order, then halts, and moves again as soon as the last regiment is through. In the cavalry, each squadron, before quickening the pace to rejoin the column, takes its original order of march. 1230. When the distance from the enemy permits, each regiment, after closing up in front and rear of the defile, stacks arms. 1231. Halts to rest and re-form the troops are frequent during the day, depending on the object and length of the march. They are made in preference after the passage of defiles. 1232. No honors are paid by troops on the march or at halts. 1233. The sick march with the wagons. 1234. Led horses of officers, and the horses of dismounted men, follow their regiment. The baggage wagons never march in the column. When the General orders the field train and ambulances to take place in the column, he designates the position they shall take- 1235. If two corps meet on the same road, they pass to the right, and both continue their march, if the road is wide enough; if it ia not, the first in the order of battle takes the road, the other halts. 1236. A corps in march must not be cut by another. If two corps meet at cross-roads, that which arrives last lialts if the other is in motion. A corps in march passes a corps at a halt, if it has pre- cedence in the order of battle, or if the halted corps is not ready to move at once. 1237. A column that halts to let another column pass resumes the march in advance of tlie train of this column. If a column has to pass a train, ^he train must halt, if necessary, till the column passes. The FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 229 War (^Battles') Service. column which has precedence must yield it if the commander, on seeing the orders of the other, finds it for the interest of the service BATTLES. 1238. Dispositions for battle depend on the number, kind and quality of the troops opposed, on the ground, and on the objects of the war ; but the following rules are to be observed generally : 1239. In attacking, the advanced guard endeavors to capture the enemy's outposts, or cut them off from the main body. Having done so, or driven them in, it occupies, in advancing, all the points that can cover or facilitate the march of the army, or secure its retreat, such as bridges, defiles, woods, and heights ; it then makes attacks, to occupy the enemy, without risking too much, and to deceive them as to the march and projects of the army. 1240. When the enemy is hidden by a curtain of advanced troops, the commandant of the advanced guard sends scouts, under intelligent officers, to the right and left, to ascertain his position and movements. If he does not succeed in this way, he tries to unmask the ememy by demonstrations ; threatens to cut off the advance from the main body ; makes false attacks ; partial and impetuous charges in echelon ; and if all fail, he makes a real attack to accomplish the object. 1241. Detachments left by the advanced guard to hold points in the rear rejoin it when other troops come up. If the army takes a position, and the advanced guard is separated from it by defiles or heights, the communication is secured by troops drawn from the main body. 1242. At proper distance from the enemy, the troops are formed for the attack in several lines ; if only two can be formed, some battalions in column are placed behind the wings of the second line. The lines may be formed of troops in column or in order of battle, according to the ground and plan of attack. 1243. The advanced guard may be put in the line or on the wings, or other position, to aid the pursuit or cover the retreat. Military. 20 230 GENERAL REGULATIONS War (^Battles) Service. 1244. The reserve is formed of the best troops of foot and horse, to complete a victory or make good a retreat. It is placed in the rear of the centre, or chief point of attack or defence. 1246. The cavalry should be distributed in echelon on the wings and at the centre, on favorable ground. 1246. It should be instructed not to take th > gallop until within charging distance ; never to receive a charge at a halt, but to meet it, or, if not strong enough, to retire manoeuvring ; and in order to be ready for the pursuit, and prepared against a reverse, or the attacks of the reserve, not to engage all its squadrons at once, but to reserve one-third, in column or in echelon, abreast of or in the rear of one of the wings; this arrangement is better than a second line with intervals. 1247. In the attack, the artillery is employed to silence the batteries that protect the position. In the defence, it is better to direct its fire on the advancing troops. In either case, as many pieces are united as possible, the fire of artillery being formidable in proportion to its concentration. 1248. In battles and military operations it is better to assume the offensive, and put the enemy on the defensive ; but to be safe in doing so requires*&, larger force than the enemy, or better troops, and favorable ground. When obliged to act on the defensive, tlio advan- tage of position and of making the attack may sometimes be secured by forming in rear of the ground on which we are to figlit, and advancing at the moment of action. In mountain warfare the assail- ant lias always the disadvantage ; and even in offensive warfare in the open field, it may frequently be very important, when the artillery is well posted, and any advantage of ground may be secured, to await the enemy and compel him to attack. 1249. The attack should be made with a superior force on the decisive point of the enemy's position, by masking this by false attacks and demonstrations on other points, and by concealing the troops intended for it by the ground, or by other troops in their front. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 231 War ( Battles ) Service. 1250. Besides the arrangements which depend on the supposea piau of the enemy, the wings must be protected by the ground, or sup- ported by troops in echelon; if the attack of the enemy is repulsed, the ofFensire must at once be taken, to inspire the troops, to disconcert the enemy, and often to decide the action. In thus taking the offen- sive, a close column should be pushed rapidly on the wing or flank of the enemy. The divisions of this column form in line of battle successively, and each division moves to the front as soon as formed, in order, by a rapid attack in echelon, to prevent the enemy from changing front or bringing up his reserves. In all arrangements, especially in those for attack, it is most important to conceal the design until the moment of execution, and then to execute it with the greatest rapidity. The night, therefore, is preferred for the movement of troops on the flank or rear of the enemy, otherwise it is necessary to mask their march by a giand movement in front, or by taking a wide circuit. 1251. In making an attack, the communications to the rear and for retreat must be secured, and the General must give beforehand all necessary orders to provide for that event. 1252. When u success is gained, the light troops should pursue the enemy promptly and rapidly, The other troops will restore order in their columns, then advance from position to position, always prepared for an attack or to support the troops engaged. 1253. Before the action, the Generals indicate the places where they will be ; if they change position, they give notice of it, or leave a staff officer to show where they have gone. 1254. During the fight the officers and non-commissioned officers keep the men in the ranks, and enforce obedience if necessary. Soldiers must not be permitted to leave the ranks to strip or rob the dead, nor to assist the wounded, unless by express permission, which is only to be given after the action is decided. The highest interest and duty is to win the victory, which only can insure proper car© of the wounded. 232 GENERAL REGULATIONS War ( Battles ) Service. 1255. Before the action, the Quartermaster of the division makes all the necessary arrangements for the transportation of the wounded. He establishes the ambulance dep6ts in the rear, and gives his assist- ants the necessary instruction for the service of the ambulance wagons and other means of removing the wounded 1256. The ambulance dep&t, to which the wounded are carried or directed for immediate treatment, is generally established at the most convenient building nearest the field of battle. A red flag marks its place, or the way to it, to the conductors of the ambulances and to the wounded who can walk. 1257. The active ambulances follow the troops engaged to succor the wounded and remove them to the dep6ts ; for this purpose the conductors should always have the necessary assistants, that tho soldiers may have no excuse to leave the ranks for that object. 1258. The medical director of the division, after consultation with the Quartermaster-General, distributes the medical officers and hospi- tal attendants at his disposal to the dep6ts and active ambulances. He will send officers and attendants, when practicable, to the active ambulances, to relieve the wounded who require treatment before being removed from the ground. He will see that the dep6ts and ambulances are provided with the necessary apparatus, medicines and stores. lie will take post and render his professional services at the principal dep6t. 1259. If the enemy endanger tho dep6t, the Quartermaster takes the orders of the General to remove it or to strengthen its guard. 1260. Tho wounded in the dep6ts and the sick are removed, as soon as possible, to the hospitals that have been established by tho Quartermaster-General of the army on the flanks or rear of the army. 1261. After an action, tho officers of ordnance collect the munitions of M'ar left on the field, and make a return of them to tho General. The Quartermaster's department collects the rest of the public pro- perty captured, and makes the returns to head-quarters. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 233 War ( Prisoners of War ) Service. 1262. Written reports for the General commanding in chief are made "by Commandants of regiments, batteries and separate squadrons, and by all Commanders of a higher grade, each ia what concerns his own command, and to his immediate Commander. 1263. When an officer or soldier deserves mention for conduct in action, a special report shall be made in his case, and the General commanding in chief decides whether to mention him in his report to the government and in his orders. But he shall not be mentioned in the report until he has been mentioned in the orders to the army. These special reports are examined with care by the intermediate Commanders, to verify the facts and secure commendation and rewards to the meritorious only, 1264. The report of battles, which must frequently be made before these special reports of persons are scrutinized, is confined to general praise or blame, and an account of the oi>erations. PRISONERS OP "WAR. 1265. Prisoners of war will be disarmed and sent to the rear, and reported as soon as practicable to the head-quarters. The return of prisoners from the Head-quarters of the Army to the War Depart- ment will specify the number, rank and corps. 1266. The private property of prisoners will be duly respected, and each shall be treated with the regard due to his rank. They are to obey the necessary orders given them. They receive for subsistence one ration each, without regard to rank ; and the wounded are to be treated with the same care as tl>e wounded of the army. Other allowances to them will depend on conventions with the enemy. Prisoners' horses will be taken for the army. 1267. Exchanges of prisoners and release of oflSicers on parole depend on the orders of the Geneial commanding in chief, under the instruc- tions of government. Military. 20* 234 GENERAL REGULATIONS War ( Convoys and their Escorts ) Service. CONVOYS AND THEIR ESCORTS. 1268. The strength and composition of the escort of a convoy depend on the country, the nature and value of the convoy, and the dangers it may incur. A larger escort is required for a convoy of powder, that the defence may not be near the train. 1269. Cavalry is employed in escorts chiefly to reconnoitre ; the pro- portion is larger as the country is more open. 1270. Pioneers or working parties are attached to convoys, to mend roads, remove obstacles and erect defences. The convoys should always be provided with spare wheels, poles, axes, &c. 1271. The Commandant of the escort should receive detailed instruc- fions in writing. 1272. As far as the defence permits, the Commander of the escort shall refer to the officer in charge of the convoy for the hours of departure, the halts, the parking and order of the train, and the pre- cautions against accidents. 1273. Officers who accompany the convoy, but do not belong to the escort, shall exercise no authority in it except by consent of the Commander. If the^c officers are junior to the Commander, he may assign them to duty if the defence requires it. 1274. Large convoys are formed into divisions, each with a con- ductor. The distance between the wagons is four paces. A small party of infantry is attached to each division. 1275. Generally, munitions of war are at the head of the convoy, subsistence next, and then other military stores ; the sutler last. But always that part of Wio convoy which is most important to the army shall be where it is most secure from danger. 1276. The Commandant should send out reconnoitring parties, and never put the convoy in motion until tlicir reports have been received. He always forms an advance and rear guard, and keeps the main FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 235 War ( Convoys and their Escorts ) Service. body under his immediate order at the most important point, with small guards or posts at other points. 1277. In an open country the main body marches by the side of the road, opposite the centre of the convoy ; in other cases at the head or rear of the column, as the one or the other is more exposed. 1278. The advance guard precedes the convoy far enough to remove all obstacles to its advance. It examines the woods, defiles and villages, and by mounted men gives information to the Commander, and receives his orders. It reconnoitres places for halts and parks. 1279. If the head of the column is threatened, the advanced guard seizes the defiles and places which the enemy might occupy, and holds them until the main body advances to the front and relieves it ; the main body holds the positions imtil the head of the convoy arrives, and then leaves detachments which are relieved by the parties march- ing with the divisions ; the posts are not abandoned until the whole convoy has passed and the position is no longer important. 1280. When the rear is threatened, like measures are taken ; the rear guard defends the ground and retards the enemy by breaking the bridges and blocking the road. 1281. If the flanks are threatened, and the ground is broken, and many defiles are to be passed, the defence of the convoy becomes more diflScult ; the advance and rear guards must be reduced, the flanks strengthened, and positions which will cover the march of the convoy must be occupied by the main body of the troops before the head of the convoy reaches them, and until it has passed. 1282. If the convoy is large, and has to pass places that the force and position of the enemy make dangerous, the loss of the whole convoy must not be risked ; it must pass by divisions, which reunite after the passage. In this case the greater part of the troops guard the first division ; they seize the important points, and cover them with light troops, or, if necessary, with small posts, and hold them until all the divisions have passed. 236 GENERAL REGULATIONS War ( Convoys and their Escorts ) Service. 1283. If there is artillery in the convoy, the Commander of the escort uses it for the defence. 1284. To move faster and make the defence easier,, the wagons move in double file whenever the road allows it. If a wagon breaks, it is at once removed from the road ; when repaired, it takes the rear ; when it cannot be repaired, its load and horses are distributed to some of the other wagons kept in the rear for that purpose. 1285. Convoys by water are escorted on the same principles. Each boat has a small infantry guard ; one portion of the escort precedes or follows" the convoy in boats. The cavalry march opposite the convoy; the advance and rear guard move by land, and all are con- nected by flankers with the convoy. Where a river runs through a narrow valley, the body of the infantry moves by land to prevent the enemy from occupying the heights and disturbing the convoy. 1286. Convoys halt every hour to let the horses take breath and the wagons close up. Long halts are made but seldom, and only in places that have been reconnoitred and found favorable for defence. At night the park is arranged for defence, and in preference at a dis- tance from inhabited places, if in an enemy's country. 1287. The wagons are usually parked in ranks, axle against axle, the poles in the same direction, and with sufficient space between the ranks for the horses. If an attack is feared, they are parked in square, the hind wheels outside and the horses inside. 1288. On the appearance of the enemy during the march, the Com- mander closes up the wagons and continues his march in order : he avoids fighting ; but if the enemy seizes a position that commands his road, he attacks vigorously with the mass of his force, but is not to continue the pursuit far from the convoy. Tlie convoy halts, and resumes the march when the position is carried. 1289. When the enemy is too strong to be attacked, the convoy is parked in square if there is room ; if not, closed up in double file ; at the front and rear the road is blocked by wagons across it. The drivers are dismounted at the heads of the horses. They are not FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 237 War {Baggage Trains') Service. permitted to make their escape. The light troops keep the enemy at a distance as long as possible, and are supported when necessary, but prudently, as the troops must be kept in hand to resist the main attack. 1290. If a wagon takes fire in the park, remove it if possible ; if not, remove first the ammunition wagons, then those to leeward of the fire. 1291. When a whole convoy cannot be saved, the most valuable part may sometimes be by abandoning the rest. If all efforts fail, and there is no hope of succor, the convoy must be set on fire and the horses killed that cannot be saved j the escort may then cut its way through. 1292. If the convoy is of prisoners of war, every effort should be made to reach a village or strong building where they may be con- fined ; if forced to fight in the field, the prisoners must be secured and made to lie down until the action is over. BAGGAGE TRAINS. 1293. The baggage train of general head-quarters and the trains of the several divisions are each under the charge of an officer of the Quartermaster's department. These officers command and conduct the trains under the orders they receive from their respective head- quarters. When the trains of different divisions march together, or the train of a division marches with the train of general head-quarters, the senior Quartermaster directs the whole. 1294. The Regimental Quartermaster has charge of the wagons^ horses, equipments, and all means of transport employed in the service of the regiment. Under the orders of the Colonel, he assembles them for the march, and maintains the order and police of the train in park and on the march. On marches, the regimental trains are under the orders of the Quartermaster of the division. When the march is by brigade, the senior Regimental Quartermaster in the brigade, or the Quartermaster of the brigade, has the direction of the whole. The necessary wagon-masters, or non-commissioned officers to act as such, are employed with the several trains. 238 GENERAL REGULATIONS War (^ Baggage Trains) Service. 1295. None but the authorized wagons are allowed to march with the train. The wagons of the several head-quarters, the regimental wagons, and the wagons of sutlers authorized by orders from head- quarters to march with the train, are all to be conspicuously marked. 1296. When the train of head-quarters is to have a guard, the strength of the guard is regulated by the General. Generals of brigade guard their trains by the men attached to the train of the first regiment of their brigades. The regimental trains are loaded unloaded and guarded, as far as practicable, by convalescents and men not effective in the ranks ; in the cavalry, by dismounted men. When the guard of a train is the escort for its defence, the regulations in regard to convoys and escorts take effect. 1297. Habitually each division is followed by its train, the regimental trains uniting at the brigade rendezvous. When otherwise, the order for the movement of the divisions, brigades and regiments contains the necessary directions in regard to the assembling and marching of the respective trains. The several trains march in an order analogous to the rank of the Generals, and the order of battle of the troops to which they belong. Trains are not allowed in any case to be in the midst of the troops, or to impede the march of the troops. 1298. The wagon-masters, under the orders of the officers of the Quartermaster's department, exercise the necessary restraints over the teamsters and servants who leave their teams, or do not properly conduct them ; or who ill-treat their horses, or who attempt to pillage, or run away in case of attack. 1299. The General commanding the army, and the Generals of divi- sion, will not permit any general or staff officer, or regiment under their orders, or any person whatsoever, attached to their command, to have more than the authorized amount of the means of transportation. For this purpose they will themselves make, and cause to be made, frequent reviews and inspections of the trains. They will see that no trooper is employed to lead a private horse, no soldier to drive a private vehicle, and that no trooper is put on foot to lend his horse FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 239 War (^General Police') Service, to an officer. They will not permit the wagons of the artillery or of the train to be loaded with anything foreign to their proper service, nor any public horse, for any occasion, to be harnessed to a private carriage. 1300. The officers of the Quartermaster's department, the wagon- masters, and all conductors of trains, are charged with watching that the regulations respecting transportation allowances are strictly observed GENERAL POLICE. 1301. When necessary, the General-in-Chief or General of division may appoint a provost marshal to take charge of prisoners, with a suitable guard, or other police force. 1302. Private servants, not soldiers, will not be allowed to wear the uniform of any corps of the army, but each will be required to carry with him a certificate from the officer who employs him, verified, for regimental officers, by the signature of the Colonel ; for other officers under the rank of Colonel, by the chief of their corps or department. 1303. Laundresses permitted to follow the army will be furnished with certificates, signed as in the preceding paragraph, and no woman of bad character will be allowed to follow the army. Other persons with the army, not officers or soldiers, such as guides of the country, interpreters, &c., will carry about them similiar certificates from the head-quarters that employs them. 1304. Deserters from the enemy, after being examined, will be secured for some days, as they may be spies in disguise ; as oppor- tunities offer, they will be sent to the rear ; after which, if they are found lurking about the army, or attempting to return to the enemy, they will be treated with severity. 1305. The arms and accoutrements of deserters will be turned over to the Ordnance department, and their horses to the corps in want of them, after being branded with the letters " U. S." The com- pensation to be accorded to deserters, for such objects, will be accord- 240 GENERAL REGULATIONS War (^Safeguards) Service. \\\g to appraisement, made under the direction of the Quartermaster's departtnent. The enlistment of deserters, without express permission from general head-quarters, is prohibited. 1306. It is forbidden to purchase horses without ascertaining the riglit of the party to sell. Stolen horses shall be restored. Estrays, in the enemy's country, when the owner is not discovered, are taken fur the army. 1307. Plundering and marauding, at all times disgi-aceful to soldiers, when committed on the persons or property of those whom it is the duty of the army to protect, become crimes of such enormity as to admit of no remission of the awful punishment which the military law awards against ofiences of this nature. SAFEGUARDS. 1308. Safeguards are protections granted to persons or property iu foreign parts by the Commanding General, or by other Commanders within the limits of their command. 1309. Safeguards are usually given to protect hospitals, public establishments, establishments of religion, charity or instruction, museums, depositories of the arts, mills, post-offices, and other insti- tutions of public benefit ; also to individuals whom it may be tho interest of the army to respect. 1310. A safeguard may consist of one or more men of fidelity and firmness, generally non-effective non-commissioned officers, furnished with a paper setting out clearly the protection and exemptions it is intended to secure, signed by the Commander giving it, and his staff officer ; or it may consist of such paper, delivered to the party whose person, family, house and property it is designed to protect. These safeguards must be numbered and registered. 1311. The men left as safeguards by one corps may bo replaced by another. They are withdrawn when the country is evacuated ; but if not, they have orders to await the arrival of the enemy's troops, and apply to the Commander for a safe-conduct to the outposts. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 241 Sieges, 1312. Form of a safeguard : By authority of . A safeguard is hereby granted to [ A. B , or the house and family of A, B , or to the college, mills or property ; statiug precisely the place, nature and description of the person, property or buildings]. All officers and soldiers belonging to the army of the United States are therefore commanded to respect this safeguard, and to afford, if necessary, protection to [the person, family or property of , as the case may be]. Given at head-quarters, the — day of . A. B , Major-General commanding in chief. By command of the General. C. D , Adjutant-General. bbih Article of the Rules and Abides of War. " Whosoevej: belonging to the armies of the United States, employed in foreign parts, shall force a safeguard, shall suffer death. SIEGES. 1313. In the following regulations the besieging force is supposed lo be two divisions of infantry and a brigade of cavalry. The samo principles govern in other cases. 1314. The Brigadier-Generals of infantry serve, in turn, as Generals of the trenches ; one or more of them are detailed daily, according to the front and number of attacks ; they superintend the operations, and dispose the guards of the trenches to repulse sorties and protect the works. Officers of the general staff are assigned to them to transmit their orders and attend to the details of service. 1315. The Colonels and Lieutenant-Colonels of infantry alternate for duty in the trenches ; one or more are detailed daily ; they superintend the service of the guards and workmen in the part of the work to which the General of the trenches assigns them, being posted with troops of their own regiments in preference. The Commandant of the siege may place the Colonels on the roster with the Brigadier-Generals. Military. 21 242 GENERAL REGULATIONS Sieges- 1316. The Commandants of engineers and artillery accompany the first troops before the place to examine the works and the approaches. When the engineers have completed the reconnoissance of the works, and of each front as far as practicable, the Commandant of engineers makes a plan of the works as exact and detailed as possible, and, under the instructions of the General commanding the siege, draws up the general plan of the siege, and discusses it with the Commandant of artillery in regard to the best employment of that arm. These officers then submit their joint or separate opinions to the General, who decides on the plan of tlie siege, and gives the orders for the execution. The Commandant of engineers directs the construction of all the works of siege, under the authority of the General, and lays before him every day a report of his operations, and a plan showing the progress of the attack. The Commandant of artillery also makes daily reports to the General of all that relates to his branch of the service. 1317. The Quartermaster-General establishes the hospitals, and organizes the means for transporting the wounded to them. 1318. The Commanding General appoints a field officer of the trenches, who is aided by one or two Captains or Lieutenants. 1319. The field officer of the trenches is charged with all the details relative to the assembling of the guards and the workmen. He distri- butes the guards on the different points of the attack, agreeably to the orders c^ the General of the trenches, and fomis the detachments of workmen for the engineers and artillery ; that he may be prepared for this distribution, ho receives every day from the Adjutant-General a statement of the details for the next day. 1820. On the arrival of the General of the trenches, the field officer of the trenches gives him all the information necessary to enable him to station the troops, attends him in his visit to the trenches, and takes his orders on the changes to be made in the position of the troops. The execution is intrusted to the Commandants of the troops. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 243 Sieges^ 1321. The field oflSw^r of the trenches sees that men aud litters are always readj^ to bring off the wounded. One or more companies of the guards of the trenches are put under his immediate orders for tlie preservation of order and police in the trenches. 1322. The divisions, brigades, regiments and battalions arc encamped during the siege in the order of battle. The service of camp is con- ducted as heretofore prescribed. 1323. The infantry has two kinds of siege- service : the guard of the trenches and the work of the trenches. 1824. The guards of the trenches mount every day by battalions, in such order of detail that all the troops may take an equal share, and no part of the line be left too weak. If only one battalion is required, each division furnishes it alternately; if two are required, each divi- sion gives one ; if three, one division furnishes two, the other one alternately. The two battalions of the same division are not taken from the same brigade, 1325, The detail for work of the trenches is by company, from all the regiments at one time, or in turn, and continues generally twelve hours. The detail from any regiment should never be less than a company. If only half a company would be needed from all the regiments at a time, every other regiment furnishes a full company alternately. 1326, The battalions for guard are detailed at least twelve hours in advance ; they furnish no other details during this tour. If the whole regiment is called out, it leaves a sufficient police guard in camp, 1327, Twenty-four hours, or twelve at least, before mounting guard in the trenches, the battalions detailed for guard do not furnish work- men ; and the companies of these bat talions whose tour it would have been to work in the trenches, do not go there for twenty-four hours after guard, if possible, or at the least twelve. 1328, The workmen who are required for other work than that of the trenches are taken from the roster for fatigue from the battalions and companies not employed in the trenches. 244 GENERAL REGULATIONS Sieges. 1329. The battalions first for detail for guard of the trenches, and the companies first for detail for work in the trenches, furnish no other details, and are held on picket, ready to march at the call of the field officer of the trenches. 1830. Materials for the siege, such as fascines, gabions, hurdles pickets, &c., are furnished by the different corps, in the proportiou ordered by the General. 133L Guards and workmen going to the trenches march without beat of drum or music. 1332. At all times, and especially on the day the trenches are opened everything is avoided likely to attract the attention of the enemy. With this view the General may vary the hour of relieving guards. 1333. The chiefs of engineers and artillery make requisitions for workmen in advance, that the details may be made in time to prevent any delay in the work. They should exceed the number strictly required, that there may be a reserve for unforeseen wants. If this reserve is found insufficient, the General directs the field officer of the trenches to call on the picket. 1334. Before the guards and workmen march, the field officer of the trenches arranges them so that each detachment can reach its ground without confusion. The troops are posted in the trenches according to the position of their regiments in the order of battle, and, as far as possible, the companies of workmen in like order. The reserves of workmen are placed at the dep6t of the trenches, or the nearest suit- able place to the works. 1335. The workmen leave their knapsacks and swords in camp, and march with their firearms and cartridge-boxes, which they place near them while at work. They always carry their overcoats, to cover them in resting or when wounded. 1336. The guards always enter the trenches with arms trailed^ R-nd the workmen also, unless they carry materials or tools, when the arms are in the sling. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 245 Sieges. 1337. The guards and detachments of workmen send a corporal to the openings of the trenches to guide the relief. They march out of the trenches by the flank, with trailed arms, 1338. Sand-bags, forming loopholes, are placed at intervals on the parapet to cover the sentinels ; they are more numerous than the sentinels, so that the enemy may not know where the sentinels are placed, 1339. When detachments arc placed at night in advance of the trenches, to cover the workmen, the men sit or lie down, with their firearms in their hands, to hide themselves better from the enemy : the sentinels put their ears to the ground frequently, that they may hear troops coming out of the place. To prevent mistakes, the work- men are told what troops cover them. 1340. No honors are paid in the trenches. When the General com- manding the siege visits them, the guards place themselves in rear of the banquette, and rest on their arms. The colors are never carried to the trei-iches unless the whole regiment marches to repulse a sortie or make an assault. Even in this case they are not displayed until the General commanding the siege gives a formal order. 1341. The materials of ilie siege of all kinds, together with the tools, are collected in part at the dcp6ts of the trenches, and in part at the openings of the trenches, or in such other place as has been appointed for the convenience of the service by the field officer of the trenches, on the advice of the chiefs of artillery and engineers. They are in charge of officers of engineers and of artillery, with guards or non- commissioned officers of both corps. But if these corps cannot furnish them, the chiefs apply for assistance from the infantry. 1342. The workmen, in going to the trenches, carry such tools and materials as are required by the artillery and engineers. In this case, the field officer of the trenches has notice and superintends it. 1343. Tl>e soldiers sent to tlie trendies go with their cartridge- boxes filled. Cartridges, when needed, are sent to the trenches on MiMTAEY. 21* 246 GENERAL REGULATIONS Sieges. the requisition of Commanders of battalions, approved by the General of the trenches. 1344. In the case of a sortie, the guards move rapidly to the places that have been designated by the General of the trenches, and wliich afford the best defence for the head of the works, the batteries, the communications, or the flanks, or best enable them to take the sortie itself in flank or reverse. Having lined the banquette to fire on the enemy, the troops form on the reverse of the trench to receive him. The workmen take arms, retain their positions, or retire with their tools as ordered. The officers commanding the detachments of work- men see that their movements are made promptly and in good order, so as to avoid all confusion in the communications. 1345. The troops that advance beyond the trenches to repulse the sortie must not follow in pursuit. The General takes care that they return to the trenches before the retreat of the sortie allows the artil- lery of the place to open on them. When the workmen return, the officers and non-commissioned officers of the detachments call the roll without interrupting the work, which is immediately resumed. 134G. When it is necessary to dismount cavalry and send them to the trenches, they should be employed as near their camp as possible, and posted between the detachments of infantry. 1347. Men belonging to the cavalry may, in assaults, be employed in carrying fascines and other materials to fill ditches and make passages. 1348. The general officers of cavalry are more particularly employed in the service of posts and detachments placed in observation to pro- tect the siege. They and the field officers of this arm are employed in the command of escorts to convoys, of whatever arms the escorts may be composed. When these duties arc not suflficient to employ them, they take their share of the duty of the trenches. 1349. The officers of engineers and artillery of the trenches make to the General of the trenches a return of all losses in their troops, and such other reports on the work as he requires, in addition to the reports direct to their respective chiefs on the details of the service FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 247 Sieges. 1350. At the end of each tour, the field officer of the trenches draws tip a report for the twenty-four hours to the General of the trenches. The General of the trenches reports to the General commanding the siege. 1351. The Commanders of the several corps in the trenches report, when relieved, to their respective head-quarters the losses during the tour, and the conduct of the officers and men. 1352. However practicable the breach may appear, or however ruined the works in rear of it, the heads of columns must always be supplied with ladders to get over unexpected obstacles. 1353. The General commanding the siege designates picked com- panies to- protect property and persons, and prevent pillage and vio- lence, from the moment the place is carried. The officers exert themselves to restrain the men. 1354. The General designates the places requiring particular pro- tection, such as churches, asylums, hospitals, colleges, schools and magazines. The order for their protection should remind the soldiers, at the time, of the penalty of disobeying it. 1355. Whether the place be taken by assault or by capitulation, the provisions and military stores, and the public funds, are reserved for the use of the army. 1356. The Commander of engineers will keep a journal of the siege, showing the operations of each day in detail, the force employed on the work, the kind and quantity of materials used in them, &c. He will also mark on a plan of the ground the daily progress of the works, and make the necessary drawings explanatory of their construction. 1357. The Commander of the artillery will keep a daily journal of the operations under his direction, showing : the number and kind of pieces in battery, the force employed in serving them, the kind and quantity of ammunition expended, the number of rounds fired from each piece of ordnance, the effect of the fire, and all other particulars relative to his branch of the service. 248 GENERAL REGULATIONS Defence of ForUfied Places. 1358. These journals and drawings will be sent, after the siege, with the report of the General, to the War Department, DEFENCE OF FORTIFIED PLACES. 1359. In war, every Commander of a fortified place shall always hold himself prepared with his plan of defence, as if at any time liable to attack. He arranges this plan according to the probable mode of attack ; determines the posts of the trooi^s in the several parts of the works, the rtliefs, the reserves, and the details of service in all the corps. He draws up instructions for a case of attack, and exercises the garrison according to his plan of defence. In sea-coast works, he provides the instructions for the different batteries on tlio approach of ships, 1360. In framing his plan, he studies the works and the exterior within the radius of attack and investment, the strength of the garri- son, the artillery, the munitions of war, subsistence and supplies of all kinds, and takes immediate measures to procure whatever is defi- cient of troops or supplies, either by requisition on the government or from the means put at his disposal. 1361. On the approach of an enemy, he removes all houses and other objects, within or without the place, that cover the approaches, or interrupt the fire of the guns or the movements of the troops. He assures himself personally that all j)osterns, outlets, embrasures, &c., are in a proi>er state of security, 13G2. He shall be furnished by the Department of War with a i)lan of the works, showing all the details of the fortifications and of the exterior within tlie radius of attack ; with a map of the environs within the radius of investment; with a map of the vicinity, including the neighboring works, roads, water-channels, coasts, &c. ; with a memoir cxi)laining the situation and defence of the place, and the relations and bearings of the several works on each other, and on the approaches by land and water; all which he carefully preserves, and comnmni- catcs onlv to the council of defence. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 249 Defence of Fortified Places. 1363. He consults his next in rank, and the senior officer of the engineers and of the artillery, either separately or as a council of defence. In the latter case he designates an officer to act as secretary to the council, and to record their proceedings and their joint or separate opinions, which are to he kept secret during the siege. The members may record their opinions under their own signature. In all cases, the Commander decides on his own responsibilit3\ 1864. The Commander of the place, and the chiefs of engineers and of artillery, shall keep journals of the defence, in which shall he entered, in order of date, without blank or interlineation, the orders given or received, the manner in which they are executed, their results, and every event and circumstance of importance in the pro- gress of the defence. These journals and the proceedings of the council of defence shall be sent, after the siege, to the Department of War. 1365. There shall be kept in the office of the Commandant of the place, to be sent, after the siege, to the Department of War, a map of the environs, a plan of the fortifications, and a special plan of the front of attack, on which the chief engineer will trace, in succession, the positions occupied, and the works executed by the enemy from the investment ; and also the works of counter approach or defence, and the successive positions of the artillery and other troops of the garrison during the progress of the siege. 1366. The Commander shall defend, in succession, the advanced works, the covered way and outworks, the body of the work, and the interior intrenchments. He will not be content with clearing away the foot of the breaches, and defending them by abattis, mines, and all the means used in sieges; but he shall begin in good time, behind the bastions or front of attack, the necessary intrenchments to resist assaults on the main work. 1367. He shall use his means of defence in such manner as always to have a reserve of fresh troops, chosen from his best soldiers, to resist assaults, retake the outworks, and especially to resist the 250 GENERAL REGULATIOXS Uniform aaid Dress. assaults on the body of th« place; and a reserve of provisions for the last period of the siege, and of ammunition for the last attacks. 1368. He must, in every case, compel the besieging force to approach by the slow and successive works of siege, and must sustain at least one assault on a practicable breach in the body of the place. 1369. When the Commander thinks that the end of the defence has come, he shall still consult the council of defence on the means that may remain to prolong the siege. But in all cases he alone will decide on the time, manner and terms of the surrender. In the capitulation, he shall not seek or accept better terms for himself than for the garrison, but shall share their fate, and exert his best endeavors for the care of the troops, and especially of the sick and wounded. 1370. No Commander, in the field, shall withdraw troops or supplies from any fortified place, or exercise any authority over its Com- mandant, unless it has been put subject to his orders by competent authority. ARTICLE XLVII. UNIFORM AND DRESS OF THE MILITARY FORCES OF THE STATE OF NEW-YORK. COAT FOR A COMMISSIONED OFFICER. 1371. All officers shall wear a frock coat of dark blue cloth, the waist to extend to tlie top of the hip, and the skirt to within one incli of the bend of the knee; single breasted for Captaina and Lieutenants ; double breasted for all other grades. 1372. For a Major -General. — Two rows of buttons on the breast, nine in each row, placed by threes ; the distance between each row, five and one-half inches at top, and three and one-half inches at bottom ; stand-up collar, to rise no higher than to permit the cliin to turn freely over it, to hook in front at the bottom, and slope tlience up and backward at an angle of thirty degrees on each side ; cuffs two and one-half inches deep, to go around the sleeves parallel with the lower edge, and to button with tliree small buttons at the under FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 251 Uniform and Dress. seam ; pockets in the folds of the skirts, with one bntton at the hip, and one at the end of each pocket, making four buttons on the back and skirt of the coat ; the hip button to range with the lowest but- tons on the breast ; collar and cuffs to be of dark blue velvet ; lining of the coat, black. 1373. For a Brigadier -General. — The same as for a Major- General, except that there will be only eight buttons in each row on the breast, placed in paii-s. 1374. For a Colonel. — The same as for a Major-General, except that there will be only seven buttons in each row on the breast, placed at equal distances ; collar and cufis of the same color and material as the coat. 1375. For a Lieutenant -Colonel. — The same as for a Colonel. 1376. For a Major. — The same as for a Colonel. 1377. For a Captain. — The same as for a Colonel, except that there will be only one row of nine buttons on the breast, placed at equal distances. 1378. For a First Lieutenant. — The same as for a Captain. 1379. For a Second Lieutenant. — The same as for a Captain. 1380. For a Chaplain. — The same as for a Captain. FOR JCON-COMMISSIOJfED OFFICERS, MUSICIANS AND PRIVATES. 1381. The uniform coat for all non-commissioned officers, musi- cians and privates shall be a single breasted frock of dark blue cloth, with a skirt extending to within four inches of the bend of the knee. 1382. For a Sergeant -Major and Quartermaster- Sergeant of AHillery. — One row of nine buttons on the breast, placed at equal distances ; stand-up collar, to rise no higher than to pennit the chin to turn freely over it, to hook in front at the bottom, and slope thence up and backward at an angle of thirty degrees on each side ; cuffs pointed iMjcording to pattern, and to button with two small buttons at tbo 252 GENERAL REGULATIONS Uniform and Dress under seam ; collar and cuflfs edged with a cord or welt of scarlet cloth ; on each shoulder a metallic scale according to pattern, with the number of the regiment in white metal, figures one inch long, within the crescent ; narrow lining for skirt of the coat of same material and color as the coat ; pockets in the folds of the skirts, with one button at the hip to range with the lowest buttons on the breast ; no buttons at the ends of the pockets. 1383. For a Sergeant -Major and Quartermaster- Sergeant of Infaniry. — The same as for artillery, except that the edging will be of light or sky blue cloth. 1384. For a Sergeant -Major and Quartermaster- Sergeant of Riflemen. — Same as for the artillery, except that the edging will be of medium or emerald green cloth. 1385. For a Sergeant -Major and Quartermaster- Sergeant of Cavalry. — The same as for the artillery, except that the edging will be of orange cloth. 138G. For a Sergeant of Artillery, Infantry, Riflemen and Cavalry. — The same as for the Sergeant-Major of those corps respectively ; except that there will be upon the scales, instead of the number of the regiment, the letter of the company, in white metal, one inch long. 1387. For a Sergeant of Light Artillery. — The same as for the artil- lery. 1388. For a Sergeant of Engineer Sddiers. — The same as for the ser- geant of artillery, except that the edging will be of yellow cloth, and that upon the scales will be the number of the regiment ; on both sides of the collar, near the front, a castle of yellow metal one and five-eighths inches, by one and one-fourth inches high. 1389. For an Ordnance Sergeant. — The same as for a sergeant of engineer soldiers, except that the collar and cuffs will be edged with crimson instead of yellow, and that on the collar, on both sides, near the front, there will be a shell and flame of yellow metal two inches long. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 253 Uniform and Dress. 1390. For a Cot'poral of .Artillery, Infantry, Riflemen, Cavalry, Light Artillery and Engineer Soldiers. — The same as for a sergeant of those corps respectively. 1391. For a Private of Artillery, Infantry, Riflemen, Cavalry, Light Artillery and Engineer Soldiers. — The same as for a corporal of those arms respectively. 1392. For a Musician of Artillery, Infantry, Riflemen, Cavalry and Light Artillery. — The same as for a private of those corps respectively, with the addition of a facing according to pattern, and corresponding in color with the edging on the collar and cufls. 1393. For a Principal or Chief Musician. — The same as for a musi- cian of his regiment. 1394. For a Chief Bugler. — The same as for a principal or chief musician. 1395. On all occasions of duty, except fatigue, and when out of quarters, the coat shall be buttoned and hooked at the collar. BUTTONS. 1396. For General Officers and Officers of the Staff, except Engi- neers. — Gilt, convex ; device, a spread eagle, with thirteen stars over the head of the eagle, and upon its breast, on a shield, the arras of the state impaling those of the United States, with the motto " Excel- sior" below the eagle, according to the pattern in the office of the Adjutant-General ; large size, seven-eighths of an inch in exterior diameter ; small size, one-half inch. 1397. For Officers of the Engineers. — Gilt, nine-tenths of an inch in exterior diameter, slightly convex ; a raised bright rim, one-thirtieth of an inch wide ; device, an eagle holding in his beak a scroll, with the word "Essayons," a bastion with embrasures in the distance sur- rounded by water, with a rising sun ; the figures to be of dead gold upon a bright field. Small buttons of the same form and device, and fifty- five-hundredth s of an inch in exterior diameter. Military. 22 264 GENERAL REGULATIONS Uniform and Dress. 1398. For all Field and Line Officers. — Donble gilt, convex ; the arms of the State of New- York impaling those of the United States (the arms of the state on the dexter side, those of the United States on the sinister side), surmounted by the crest of the state, with thirteen stars over the head of the eagle of the crest. Motto, " Excelsior." According to pattern in the Adjutant-General's office; large size, seven-eighths of an inch in exterior diameter; small size, one-half inch. 1399. Chaplains may wear the button of the general staff, or of the line, at their option. 1400. For all Non- Commissioned Officers, Musicians and Privates, except Engineers. — Yellow, to correspond with those for the officers ( 1398 ) ; for Engineer soldiers, yellow, similar to those for engmeer officers (1397). TKOUgERS. 1401. The uniform trousers, for officers, non-commissioned officers, musicians and privates, will be of cloth throughout the year ; made loose, and spread well over the boot; of white and light blue mixed, commonly called sky blue mixture, for regimental officers, non-com- missioned officers, musicians and privates ; and of dark blue cloth for all other officers. 1402. For General Officers. — ^Plain, without stripe, welt or cord down the outer seam. 1403. For Officers of the General Staff, Aids-de-Camp and Engineers. — With a buff welt, oue-eighth of an inch in diameter, let iuto the outer seam. 1404. For Chaplains. — A welt of black yelvet, of the same size, and let iuto the outer seam. 1405. jFbr Regimental Officers. — With a welt let into the outer seam, one-eighth of an inch in diameter, of the following colors : For jlrtil- Icry, scarlet ; Infantry, dark blue ; i?»/kn»m, medium or emerald green ; Cavalry, orange. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. Unifarm. and Dress, 1406. For oil Non - Commissioned Officers, Musicians and Privates. — With welt, as for officers, of the following colors : For Artillery, scarlet ; Infantry, dark blue ; Riflemen, medium or emerald green ; Cavalry, orange ; Engineers^ yellow ; Ordnance, crimson. CAP. 1407. For all Officers, Non - Commissioned Officers, Musicians and Pri- vates. — Dark blue cloth, with a stiff felt body, according to pattern ; crown of four upright pieces ; height in front from five and three- fourths to six and one-fourth inches along the front seam ; length behind from eight to eight and one-half inches along the back seam ; back part of hat, along the back seam, to be slightly convex out- wards, so that when the hat is viewed sideways there shall appear a slight curve { convexity outwards ) along the back seam, from tip to lower edge of hat ; the lower edge to be bent sharply inwards, so as to grasp snugly the back of the head ; tip from five and one-half to six inches in diameter, and inclining downward slightly from rear to front when the cap is worn ( the dimensions given to vary with the circumference of the head ) ; vizor of strong neat's leather, to pro- ject at the middle two and one-eighth inches from the front of the hat, black on the upper and green on the under sides, to be put on at right angles with the front of the cap, or, in other words, to be horizontal when the cap is worn ; strap of strong black leather, fasten- ing under the chin by a yellow m^tal buckle and leather slide, and attached to the cap with small buttons similar to those upon the coat 1408. For all Officers. — On the caps of all officers will be worn the arms of the state, impaling those of the United States, with motto and crest of state, all to be executed in metal, extra gilt, and to be one and three-quarter inches high, and one and one-quarter inches broad, to be attached to the front of the cap, near the top and just below the base of the pompon. The caps of officers will also have a band, two inches wide, from the lower edge of the cap, and pointed in front according to pattern, of material, color, and with oi'rameut as follows : 256 GENERAL REGULATIONS Uniform and Dress. 1409. For General Officers. — Band of dark blue velvet, with a gold embroidered wreath in front, encircling the letters " N. g. " in old English characters, in silver. 1410. For all Staff Officers^ except Engineers. — Band of the same material and color as the cap, welted at the edges ; the same orna- ment in front as for general officers. 1411. Fcrr Officers of the Engineers. — The same as for the general staff, except the ornament in front, which will be a gold embroidered wreath of laurel and palm encircling a silver turreted castle. 1412. Far Officers of ArtUkry and Light Artillery. — The same as for general staff", except the ornament in front, which will be gold embroi- dered cross cannon, with the number of the regiment, in silver, above their intersection. 1413. For Officers of Infantry. — The same as for the general stafl^ except the ornament in front, which will be a gold embroidered bugle, with the number of the regiment, in silver, within the bend. 1414. For Officers of Riflemen. — The same as for the general staff, except the ornament in front, which will be a trumpet, perpendicu- lar, embroidered in gold, with the number of the regiment, in silver, within the bend. 1415. For Officers of Cavalry. — Tlie same as for the general staff, except the ornament in front, which will be two sabres crossed (edges upward), embroidered in gold, with the number of the regiment, in silver, in the upper angle. 1416. For Engineer Soldiers. — Bands of the same material, color and shape as for officers, edged with yellow, and, instead of the number, a turreted castle, in yellow metal, in front, and the impaled arras, as for officers, on the front of the cap, below the pompon. 1417. For Non- Commissioned Officers ^ Musicians and Privates of Artillery, Infantry, Riflemen, Light Artillery and Cavalry. — Bands of black patent leather, one inch wide from the lower edge of the cap, and extending around the cap at the same width. On the Plate 5 JohnE . Oavit .:,v, AHjcny N 1 "t U„t for. I ;./, i„ni. fimrrrsy"-'"'"'" >/ Huttims /» Itffli'frs nf FttqiuefTs .ni.f for thf Supptrs ,in./ . UmfTf FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 257 Uniform and Dress. front of the cap, below the base of the pompon, will be placed the number of the regiment in silver embroidery or white metal, the figure or figures to be one inch long; below the number of the regi- ment, and extending to the upper edge of the patent leather band, will be placed in one continuous plate of metal, extra gilt, the arms of the state impaling those of the United States ( the arms of the state upon the dexter side, and those of the United States on the sinister side ), surmounted by the crest of the state { comprising the demi-globe and eagle ), and underneath all the motto " Excelsior," according to the pattern in the Adjutant-General's office. CAP COVER. 1418. For Officers and Men (to be worn in bad weather). — Black, of suitable water-proof material, with a cape extending below the cap ten inches, coming well forward and tying under the chin; according to pattern. 1419. The pompon will be worn by all officers whenever the epaulettes are worn, and by the non-commissioned officers, musicians and privates, on all duty under arms, except when the cap cover is put on, and will be placed in the cap so as to project forward at an angle of about thirty degrees. 1420. For a Major- General. — A gold embroidered net sphere, two and one-quarter inches in diameter ( the sphere to be of bright gold, and the net of dead gold ), attached at the base to a gold netted cir- cular ring, two-thirds of an inch in diameter by two-thirds of an inch deep. 1421. For a Brigadier- General. — The same as for a Major-General, except that the body of the sphere will be of bright silver, and the net covering of dead gold. 1422. For all other Officers^ and for all Non Commissioned Officers, Musicians and Privates. — A worsted pompon ; spherical, two and one- fourth inches in diameter, and as follows : Military. 22* 258 GENERAL REGULATIONS Uniform and Dress. 1423. For Commissioned Officers. — The pompon to be permanently attached at the base to a gold netted circular ring, two-thirds of an inch in diameter by two-thirds of an inch deep, and to be of the following colors : 1424. For the Adjutant - General '« Department. — Lower two- thirds, buflF ; upper third, white. 1425. For the Inspector -General. — Lower two-thirds, buflf; upper third, scarlet. 1426. For the Commissary -GeneraVs Department. — Crimson. 1427. For the Department of Engineers. — Lower two-thirds, buff; upper third, black. 1428. For th£ Judge -Advocate -GeneraVs Department.— 'WYdiQ. 1429. For the Quartermaster '» Department. — Lower two-thirds, buff; upper third, light or sky blue. 1430. For the Medical Department. — Lower two-thirds, buff; upper third, medium or emerald green. 1431. For the Pay Department.— luovf ex two-thirds, buff; upper third, dark olive green. 1432. For Aids-de- Camp.— -RxxfS. 1433. For the ArtiUery. —Sc&rlet. 1434. For the Infantry. — Light or sky blue. 1435- For the Riflemen. — Medium or emerald green. 1436. For the Cavalry. — Orange. 1437. For Chaplains.— Bl&ck. 1438. For Non- Commissioned Officers^ Musicians and Privates. — The pompon to be permanently attached at the base to a yellow metal circular ring, two-thirds of an inch in diameter by two-thirds of an inch deep, and to be of the following colors: For ArtiUery^ scarlet; FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 259 r Uniform, and Dress. Infantry, light or sky blue ; Riflemen, medium or emerald green ; Cavalry, orange ; Engineers, yellow ; Ordnance, crimson. CRAVAT OR STOCK. 1439. For aU Officers, Non- Commissioned Officers, Musicians and Pri- vates. — Black ; when a cravat is worn, the tie not to be visible at the opening of the collar. SPURS. 1440. For all Mounted Officers and Mounted Men. — Yellow metal or gilt. 1441. For General Officers, and Officers of the Staff and Cavalry. — Buff or white. 1442. For Officers of Artillery, Infantry and Riflemen. — ^White. 1443. For Non -Commissioned Officers and Privates. — White. 1444. JFbr Ckneral Officers and Officers ranking as suck. — Buff silk net, with silk bullion fringe ends ; sash to go twice around the waist, and to tie behind the left hip ; pendant part not to extend more than eighteen inches below the tie. 1445. For all other Officers, except the Medical Department. — Crimson silk net, with silk bullion ends ; to go around the waist and tie, as for general officers. 1446. For Officers of the Medical Department. — Medium or emerald green silk net, with silk bullion fringe ends ; to go around the waist and tie, as for general officers. 1447. For all Sergeant -Majors, Quartermaster- Sergeants, Ordnance Sergeants, First Sergeants, Principal or Chief Musicians and Chief Buglers. — Red worsted sash, with worsted bullion fringe ends ; to go twice around the waist, and to tie behind the left hip ; pendant part not to extend more than eighteen inches below the tie. 260 GENERAL REGULATIONS - , Uniform and Dress. 1448. The saah will be worn (over the coat) on all occasions of duty of every description, except stable and fatigue. 1449. The sash will be worn by " Officers of the Day " across the body, scarf fashion, from the right shoulder to the left side, instead of around the waist, tying behind the left hip as prescribed. SWORD BELT. 1450. For aU Officers and Non - Commissioned Officers. — A waist belt of black leather, plain, patent or enameled; not less than one and one-half inches, nor more than two inches wide ; to be worn over the sash ; the sword to be suspended from it by slings of the same material as the belt, with a hook attached to the belt, upon which the sword may be hung. SWORD BELT-PLATE. 1451. For all Officers^ Non - Commissioned Officers, Musicians and Pri- vates. — Gilt, rectangular, two inches wide, with a raised bright rim ; a silver wreath of laurel and palm encircling the letters "N. §." in old English characters, in silver, according to pattern. BWORD A5D SCABBARD. 1452. For General Officers. — Straight sword, gilt hilt, bras» or steel scabbard. 1453. For all Staff Officers ( except the Medical Department and Chap- lains), and for Field Officers of AriiUcry, Infantry, Riflemen, and for all Officers of Light Artillery. — The sword of the pattern adopted by tho War Department of the United States, April 9, 1850. 1454. For the Medical Department. — Small sword and scabbard now in use in tho Medical Department of the United States army. 1455. For Chaplains. — Straight small sword, black scabbard, gilt mountings. 1456. For Cavalry Officers. — Sabre and scabbard now in use in United States Cavalry. Plate 4. JohnE&aviUScAUirxny. K i FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 261 Badges to Distinguish Rank, 1457. For the Officers of the Artillery^ Infantry and Riflemen, except Field Officers. — The sword of the pattern adopted by the War Depart- ment of the United States, April 9, 1850. 1458. The sword and sword belt will be worn upon all occasions of duty, without exception. 1459. When on foot, the sabre will be suspended from the hook attached to the belt. 1460. When not on military duty, officers may wear swords of honor, or the prescribed sword, with a scabbard, gilt, or of leather with gilt mountings. SWOED-KNOT. 1461. For General Officers. — Gold cord, with acorn end. 1462. For all other Officers. — Gold lace strap with gold bullion tassel. BADGES TO DISTINGUISH RANK. EPAULETTES. 1463. For Major -Generals. — Gold, with solid crescent ; device, two silver embroidered stars, one of one and one-half inches in diameter, one of one and one-fourth inches in diameter, placed on the strap in a row, longitudinally, and equidistant ; dead and bright gold bullion, one-half inch in diameter and three and one-half inches long. 1464. For a Brigadier -General. — The same as for a Major- General, except that, instead of two, there shall be one star (omitting the smallest ), placed upon the strap, and not within the crescent. 1465. For a Colonel. — The same as for a Brigadier- General, substi- tuting a silver embroidered spread eagle for the star upon the strap ; and within the crescent, for the Medical Department — a laurel wreath embroidered in gold, and the letters " ^. |9." in old English cha- racters, in silver, within the wreath ; Pay Department — same as the Medical Department, with the letters "p. 30," in old English cha- racters ; Department of Engineers — a turreted castle of silver ; Regi^ 262 GENERAL REGULATIONS Badges to Distinguish Rank, mental Officers — the number of the regiment embroidered in gold, within a circlet of embroidered silver, one and three- fourths inches in diameter, upon cloth of the following colors : For Artillery^ scarlet ; Infantry^ light or sky blue ; Riflemen^ medium or emerald green ; Cavalry, orange. 1466. For a Lieutenant - ColoncL — The same as for a Colonel, accord- ing to corps, but substituting for the eagle a silver embroidered leaf. 1467. For a Major. — The same as for a Colonel, according to corps, omittmg the eagle. 1468. For a Captain. — The same as for a Colonel, according to corps, except that the bullion will be only one- fourth of an inch in diameter, and two and one-half inches long ; and substituting for the eagle two silver embroidered bars. 1469. For a First Lieutenant. — The same as for a Colonel, according to corps, except that the bullion will be only one-eighth of an inch in diameter and two and one-half inches long, and substituting for the eagle one silver embroidered bar. 1470. For a Second Lieutenant. — The same as for a First Lieutenant, omitting the bar. 1471. All officers having military rank will wear one epaulette on each shoulder. 1472. The epaulette may be dispensed with when not on duty, and on certain duties oflf parade, to wit : at drills, at inspections of bar- racks and hospitals, on courts of inquiry and boards, at inspection of articles and necessaries, on working parties and fatigue duties, and upon the march, except when in war there is immediate expectation of meeting the enemy, and also when the overcoat is worn, SHOULDER STRAPS. 1473. For Major -Generals. — Dark blue cloth, one and three-eighths Inches wide by four inches long, bordered with an embroidery of gold one- fourth of an inch wide; two silver embroidered stars of five FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 263 Badges to Distinguish Rank. rays ; the centre of eacli star to be one inch from the outer edge of the gold embroidery on the ends of the strap ; both stars of the same size. 1474. For a Brigadier' General. — The same as for a Major-General, except that there will be one star instead of two ; the centre of the star to be equidistant from the outer edge of the embroidery on the ends of the strap. 1475. For a Colonel. — The same size as for a Major-General, and bordered in like manner with an embroidery of gold ; a silver embroi- dered spread eagle on the centre of the strap, two inches between the tips of the wings, having in the right talon an olive branch and in the left a bundle of arrows ; an escutcheon on the breast as repre- sented in the arms of the United States ; cloth of the strap as follows : For Staff Officers, dark blue; Artillery, scarlet; Infantry, light or sky blue ; Riflemen, medium or emerald green ; Cavalry, orange. 1476. For a Lieutenant -Colonel. — ^The same as for a Colonel, accord- ing to corps, omitting the eagle, and introducing a silver embroidered leaf at each end, each leaf extending seven-eighths of an inch from the end border of the strap. 1477. For a Major, — The same as for a Colonel, according to corps, omitting the eagle, and introducing a gold embroidered leaf at each end, each leaf extending seven-eighths of an inch from the end bor- der of the strap. 1478. For a Captain. — Tlie same as for a Colonel, according to corps, omitting the eagle, and introducing at each end two gold embroidered bars of the same width as the border, placed parallel to the ends of the strap ; the distance between them and from the border equal to the width of the border. 1479. For a First Lieutenant. — The same as for a Colonel, accord- ing to corps, omitting the eagle and introducing at each end one gold embroidered bar of the same width as the border, placed parallel to the ends of the strap, at a distance from the border equal to its width. 1480. For a Second Lieutenant. — The same as for a Colonel, accord- ing to corps, omitting the eagle. 2G4 GENERAL REGULATIONS Undress Uniform, 1481. The shoulder strap will be worn whenever the epaulette is not. CHKVBOUS. 1482. The rank of non-commissioned officers will be marked by chevrons upon both sleeves of the uniform coat and overcoat, above the elbow, of silk or worsted binding one-half an inch wide, same color as the edging on the coat, points down, as follows : 1483. For a Sergeant -Major. — Three bars and an arc, in stLk. 1484. For a Quartermaster-Sergeant. — Three bars and a tie, in silk. 1485. For an Ordnance Sergeant. — Three bars and a star, in silk. 1486. For a First Sergeant. — Three bars and a lozenge, in worsted. 1487. For a Sergeant. — Three bars, in worsted. 1488. For a Corporal. — Two bars, in worsted. UNDRESS UNIFORM. rOR OPPICERS, NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERS, *C. 1489. Fatigue Cap. — All officers may wear, off duty, and for drills and improvement meetings when ordered by the Commanding Officer, in lieu of the uniform cap, a cap of dark blue cloth, of a shape and style similar to the uniform cap ; to be about five inches high ; the body of haircloth or other flexible material ; band two inches wide, of the same material and color as the cap, and of equal width throughout; vizor as for uniform cap; chin strap of black leather, fastened to the cap with small buttons, same as on the sleeve of the uniform coat ; the whole according to pattern in the Adjutant-Gene- ral's office. Ornaments only on the band, and those the same as on the band of the uniform cap. 1490. Fatigue Jacket. — Non-commissioned officers, musicians and privates (except the cavalry and the light artillery) may wear, when off duty, or on fatigue duty, and also at drills and improvement meetings, when ordered by the Commanding Officer, in lieu of FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 265 Undress Uniform. the uniform coat, a jacket of cadet gray cloth, single breasted, with standing collar; to be cut long in the waist; polka style skirt, to extend from five to six inches, according to height, below the waist ; opened behind, with two buttons, large size, same as worn upon the uniform frock coat, to be placed on a line with the lowest button in front, two inches apart at the commencement of the opening of skirt ; three pointed flaps on waist, seven inches long, two and a half inches deep at the points, narrow part one and three-quarter inches ; flaps to be three and a half inches from the front of the jacket ; nine buttons on the front of the jacket, large size, of the same kind as those on the uniform coat; collar of black cloth, from one and three-quarters to two inches high ; the front cut as for the uniform coat, and to meet at bottom and fasten with a hook and eye ; cuffs of black cloth, two and a half inches deep, small at hand, to fasten with two small buttons, similar to those upon the cuffs of the uniform coat, one in cuff and one above ; shoulder straps of gray cloth, sewed into the sleeve head, pointed at top and secured with one small button ; the strap two and one-quarter inches wide at bottom and one and one-quarter at top, the upper point to extend to the collar seam ; the flaps and shoulder straps to be corded or edged with black. On the breast of the jacket for musicians, on either side of the buttons and button holes, and extending horizontally across the breast, will be placed stripes of black, flat braid, one-half of an inch in width, terminating in pointed ends, six inches from the buttons and holes on either breast, at top of jacket, and three inches at the bottom. 1491. Fatigue Cap for Non-Commissioned Officers, Musicians and Privates, except Cavalry and the Light Artillery. — Non-commissioned officers and privates may wear, under the same circumstances in which the jacket is allowed to be worn, a fatigue cap of cadet gray cloth, of a shape and style similar to the uniform cap ; the body of haircloth or other flexible material ; the cap to be about five inches high ; the vizor as for the uniform cap; the band to be of black cloth, two inches and one-quarter wide, and of equal width throughout ; a chin strap of black leather, fastened with small buttons of the arm or corps ; the whole according to pattern in the Adjutant-General's Military. 23 260 GENERAL REGULATIONS Undress Uniform. office. On the band in front of cap, so as to show above the chin strap, the number of the regiment, in silver or white metal figures, one inch long ; and one inch from the top of the cap, upon a circlet of cloth not more than one and three-quarter inches in diameter, of the colors of the arm in which the regiment or company is organized, will be placed the letter of the company, in silver or white metal, three- quarters of an inch long. 1492. Cavalry arid Light AriiUery Jacket. — ^The fatigue jacket for non-commissioned officers, musicians and privates of cavalry and light artillery will ba of the same style as the gray fatigue jacket, but will be made of dark blue cloth, with cnfFs and collar of the same material as the coat ; the edging, however,(and the braids, of the Musicians)^ov the Cawalry, will becrf (Munge, and for the Light Artillery^ of scarlet. 1493. The Fatigue Cap for Non -Commissioned Officers, Musi- cians and Privates of Cavalry and Light Artillery will be of the same style as the gray fatigue cap, except that it will be of dark blue cloth, and the band of the same material and color as the cap, Avith the number of the regiment on the band ; the letter of the com- pany on a circlet of orange cloth for Cavalry, and on a circlet of scarlet cloth for Light Artillery, OVERCOAT. 1494. For Commissioned Officers. — A '' doaJc coat" of dark blue cloth, closing by means of four frog buttons of black silk and loops of black silk cord down the breast, and at the throat by a long loop a echeUe, without tassel or plate, on the left side, and a black silk frog button on the right; cord for the loops flftecn-hundredths of an inch in diameter; back, a single piece, slit up from the bottom, from fifteen to seventeen inches, according to the height of the wearer, and closing at will, by buttons, and button holes cut in a concealed flap; collar of the same color and material as the coat, rounded at the ed,^cs, and to stand or fall; when standing to be about five inches high; sleeves loose, of a single piece, and round at the bottom, without cuflf or slit; lining, woolen ; around the front and lower border, the edges of the FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 267 Undress Unifornu pockets, the edges of the sleeves, collar and slit in the back, a flat braid of black silk one-half an inch wide; and around each frog button on the breast a knot two and one-quarter inches in diameter, of black, silk cord seven-hundredths of an inch in diameter, arranged according to drawing; cape of the same color and material as the coat, removable at the pleasure of the wearer, and reaching to the cufF of the coat sleeve when the arm is extended ; coat to extend down the leg from six to eight inches below the knee, according to height, 1495. To indicate Rank. — For all officers below the rank of gene- ral officers there will be on both sleeves, near the lower edge, rows of black silk braid, one-half of an inch apart ; such braid to be one- third of an inch in width, and extending around the sleeve. 1496. For a Colonel. — Six rows. 1497. For a Lieutenant -Colonel. — Five rows 1498. For a Major. — Four rows. 1499. For a Captain. — Three rows. 1500. For a First Lieutenant. — Two rows. 1501. For a Second Lieutenant. — One row. 1502. For a Brigadier - General. — Two lines of black silk braid, one inch in width, and one-half inch apart, extending from the edge of the sleeve, and running up the sleeve, parallel with the seam, a distance of eight inches, upon the upper side of the sleeve, and ter- minating with pointed ends. 1503. For a Major -General. — The same as for a Brigadier-Gene- ral, except there shall be three lines of braid. 1504. For Non -Commissioned Officers, Mtisicians and Privates of Cavalry and Light Artillery. — Of blue gray mixture; stand-up collar ; double breasted ; cape to reach down to the cuff of the coat when the arm is extended, and to button all the way up; buttons the same as upon the unifoitn frock coat; large size for coat body, small size for cape. 208 GENERAL REGULATIONS Horse fhcrniture. 1505. All other Non- Commissioned Officers, Musicians and Pri- vates. — Of blue gray mixture; stand-up collar ; single breasted ; cape to reach down to the elbows when the arm is extended, and to button all the way up ; buttons the same as upon the uniform frock coat. HORSE FURNITURE. FOR GENERAL OFFICERS AND THE GENERAL STAFF. 1506. Housing for General Officers. — To be worn over the saddle; of dark blue cloth, trimmed with two rows of gold lace, the outer row one inch and five-eighths wide, the iniier row two inches and one-fourth ; to be made full, so as to cover the horse's haunches and fore-hands, and to bear on each flank corner the following ornaments, distinctive of rank, to wit: 'For Major -Generals, a gold embroi- dered spread eagle and two stars; for Brigadier -Generals, a gold embroidered spread eagle and one star. 1507. Saddle- Cloth for Officers of the Staff of the Commander-in- Chief, and of Divisions and Brigades. — Dark blue cloth, of suflS- cient length to cover the saddle and holsters, and one foot teu inches in depth, with an edging of gold lace one inch wide. 1508. Surcingle. — Blue web. 1509. Bridle. — Black leather ; bent branch bit. with gilt bosses j the fVont and roses yellow. 1510. C6Z/ar.— Yellow. 1511. Holsters. — Black leather, with gilt mountings. 1512. Stirrups. — Gilt or yellow metal. f OR FIELD AND REGIMENTAL STAFF OFFICERS OF ARTILLERY, INFANTRY AND RIFLEMEN. 1513. Saddle -Cloth. —Dark blue cloth, two feet ten inches in length and one foot ten inches indo]>ili. wiih gold lace five-eighths of au inch in width; scarlet edging for tlie Artillery; medium or emerald green for the Riflemen ; light or sky blue for the Infantry. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 269 Horse Furniture. 1514. Bridle. — Black leather ; gilt bits and mountings ; front and roses, for Artillery^ scarlet; for Infantry, light or sky bine; for Riflemen, medium or emerald green. 1515. Stirrups. — Yellow. 1516. Collar, — For Ariillery^ scarlet- for Infantry, light or sky blue ^ for Riflemen, medium or emeraM gi^eeu. 1517. Holsters. — Black leather, with gilt mountings and black leather cover. FOR COMMISSIONED OFPICERS OF CAVAL^RY. 1518. Saddle -Cloth. — Dark blue cloth, with border one and one- half inches wide-, gold lace for Field and Regimental Staff Officers, and orange colored cloth for Company Officers / this border to be set back one-quarter of an inch from the edge, which will be bound with patent leather. The saddle cover to be pointed in the flanks, and to extend eleven inches behind the cantle, having thirty inches depth from the back seam to the flank points. 1519. Girths. — Indigo blue worsted webbing, three inches and one-half wide, three feet nine inches long. 1520. Surcingles. — Indigo blue worsted v/ebbing, three inches and one-half wide ; five feet webbing, two feet strap. 1521. Stirrup Leathers. — Black, one inch and three-eighths wide, with oval brass buckles. 1522. Stirrups. — Brass, and of same pattern as furnished the first regiment of United States dragoons in 1834. 1523. Breast Strap. — Same as that heretofore famished the Uni- ted States dragoons, and attached in the same manner. 1524. Breastplate. — Plain brass heart. 1525. Crupper. — To buckle 'nto rings on «ach side-bar, as in th« United States army. MiLITART. 23* 270 GENERAL REGULATIONS Horse Furniture^ 1526. Holsters. — Black leather ; the pipes to have plain brass tips, extending up two inches and a half, to be attached to the saddle and breast strap, as in the army. 1527. Holster Covers. — Black leather, extending two inches below the shoulder of the holster pipe, terminated by a leather strap one inch wide, strongly sewed to the cover; the strap to button to a brass knob firmly riveted to the holster. 1528. Saddle Blanket.— V\a.m dark blue 1529. Valise. — Dark blue cloth, bound with patent leather ; water- proof; five inches and one-half in diameter ; eighteen inches long; attached to saddle by three straps, the middle one to pass through the mortice of the cantle, and suspend the valise effectually from the horse's back. 1530. Spurs. — Brass, the leather strap to be three-fourths of an inch wide. 1531. Bridle. — With an S 6tY, with strenghtening cross-bar con- necting the lower extremities of the branches; mouth-piece of three patterns, as prescribed in the Cavalry Tactics ; branches all medium ; material of bit, steel, thickly plated with brass; cwrft, leather strap five-eighths of an inch wide, with brass buckle; headstall, single check-pieces, one inch wide, with brass wire buckles on each end, buckled to bit and upi>er part of headstall ; throat strap, five-eighths of an inch wide, with brass buckles on each side ; frontpiece, single plain strap one and one-quarter inches wide, a brass circular plate one and one-half inches in diameter on each extremity, with beaded edge; reins, leather, seven-eighths of an inch wide; curb rein five feet six inches long, snaffle rein four feet six inches long, both buckled to the bit ; curb rein provided with a strong leather slide ; buckles, brass wire, with oval top and strong tongue. 1532. Saddle. — Qrimsley's; stirrup leathers to pass through sta- ples let into the lower edge of the side bars ; girths to buckle to straps strongly nailed and riveted to side bars ; morticed holes in FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 271 Horse Furniture. pommel and cantle for cloak and valise straps ; iron rings and staples on the cantle end of side bars for attaching shoe pouch and crupper ; the tree to be protected and strenghtened by a covering of raw hide ; quilted seat, sewed down and stitched, as in the army ; leather skirts to protect the blanket on which the trooper rides in service, and the trousers of the rider, and small under skirts to protect the sides of the horse from the girth buckles. FOR NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERS, MUSICIANS AND PRIVATES IN THE CAVALRY. 1533. The same as described for commissioned officers of these arms, except as follows : 1534. Breastplate. — Plain brass heart, 1535. Holsters. — Black leather, attached to the saddle and brcast strap, as in the United States army. 1536. Holster Covers. — Black leather, extending two inches below the shoulder of holster pipe, terminated by a leather strap one inch wide, strongly sewed to the cover ; the strap to button to a brass knob, firmly riveted to the holster and pouch. 1537. Valise. — Dark blue cloth ; water-proof; five inches and one- half diameter; eighteen inches long; attached to saddle by three straps, the middle one to pass through the mortice of the cantle, and suspend the valise effectually from the horse's back ; a brass circular plate, one inch and one-half diameter, with beaded edge, on each end of the valise. 1538. Bridle. — Same as for commissioned officers. FOR THE LIGHT ARTILLERY. 1539. The same as for cavalry, except that the border of the saddle- cloth for officers will be of scarlet cloth. 272 GENERAL REGULATIONS Uniform Generally. UNIFORM GENKRALLT. 1540. The belts, cartridge boxes and other equipments, not herein specially enumerated, shall be of the pattern and material furnished by the Commissary-General, when so furnished by him pursuant to law ; or they may be such as are approved of by the regimental officers, and worn by the directions of the Commandants of regiments ; pro- vided that uniformity be observed throughout each regiment. 1541. Major-Generals or Brigadier-Generals, in their respective divisions or brigades, on application, may by order authorize plain white linen or cotton pantaloons, for the company officers, non- commissioned officers and privates of any particular corps, in place of those directed by this order. Such order must, however, include the whole of any such corps which ordinarily parades together in one body ; and if it extend to a regiment it may also include the field and staff officers of the same. 1542. No ornament indicative of rank or grade shall be worn, other than as prescribed in the foregoing regulations. 1543. General and staff officers, and the officers and soldiers of the engineers, are required to uniform and equip in strict accordance with the foregoing regulations. 1544. Officers of regiments, and the companies doing duty as bat- talion companies in regiments, are required to uniform and equip as prescribed in the foregoing regulations, unless the regiment to which they belong is already uniformed and equipped in a regimental uniform, or has heretofore adopted a regimental uniform which has been approved by the Commandor-in Chief, or shall hereafter adopt a regimental uniform which shall be approved of by the Commander- in-Chief, pursuant to these regulations. 1545. All the battalion companies in ft regiment, and companies doing duty aa battalion companies by order of the Commander-in- Chief, shall be uniformed and equipped alike, and in the uniform FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 273 Uniform Generally. and equipments prescribed in these regulations, or those worn, adopted and authorized pursuant to the preceding paragraph. 1546. All flank companieg of regiments, doing duty as artillery, cavalry or riflemen, which shall hereafter be organized, or which shall hereafter uniform or equip anew, or shall change their^niform or equipments, or shall be ordered by the Commander-in-Chief so to do, shall uniform and equip in strict conformity with the uniform prescribed herein for those arms respectively. 1547. All field and line officers, and non-commissioned officers, musicians and privates in regiments, irrespective of any special orders heretofore issued, are hereby required to wear the buttons herein prescribed, and upon the cap the number of the regiment ; and all officers and non-commissioned officers are required to wear the badges of rank and grade herein prescribed. This paragraph will apply as well to regiments and companies which are already uniformed, as to those which shall hereafter uniform. 1548. No regimental uniform will hereafter be approved of, by the Commander-in-Chief, in which the color of the trimmings peculiar to one arm of the service shall be authorized to be worn by a regi- ment or company organized in another arm. 1549. Within six months after the issue of these regulations, the Commandants of regiments, which have not already a regimental uniform, will convene the commissioned officers of their respective regiments { except the staff), and determine, by a majority thereof, upon a uniform for such regiments in general conformity with these regulations, and within thirty days thereafter will transmit a full description thereof to the Adjutant-General, to the end that an order may be made by the Commander-in-Chief for the uniform of such regiment ; otherwise the regiment will be deemed to have elected to take the uniform, as particularly described in the above regulations, for the arm in which the regiment is organized. In case the uniform is intended to apply only to the battalion companies, the officers of those companies will determine upon the uniform by a majority vote. 214: GENERAL REGULATIONS Uniform Generally. 1550. The following restrictions are imposed upon the regiments, in adopting regimental uniforms, and sueh uniforms will not be approved by the Commander-in-Chief unless they conform hereto. L The uniform coat must in aU cases be of dark blue cloth, for all arms ; except that for regiments which are ordered to do duty as light infantry, by the Commander-in-Chief, the frock coat may be of cadet gray cloth, the coat to be in the same style, as prescribed for the other arms, with edging of black cloth; and also with the exception that in regiments organized as riflemen the coat may be of dark green cloth, with an edging of emerald green cloth. % Where the cadet gray coat is allowed to be worn, by order of the Commander-in-Chief, the trousers will be of cloth of the same color and description as the coat, with a welt of black cloth ; and tlie cap will be of the prescribed shape, and of black cloth, or beaver, or felt, with the prescribed ornaments, and with a black pompon ; and where the dark green cloth coat is allowed to be worn, by order of the Commander-in-Chief, the trousers will be of dark green cloth, with a welt of emerald green cloth ; and the cap, of the prescribed shape, of dark green clotli, or black beaver or felt, with the ornamenta and pompon above prescribed for riflemen. 3. In all cases the plate on the front of the cap will be strictly as above prescribed by these regulations. 4. Regiments organized as infantry may adopt a white edging for the coat and trousers, and a white pompon. 5. Stripes upon the trousers will be allowed in lieu of the welt, but under the limitations contained in paragragh fifteen hundred and forty-eight ; and such stripes may be of white when the white pom- pon is worn, and black when the regiment has the gray uniform. 6. Horse-hair plumes may be adopted by regiments doing duty as cavalry or light artillery. 7. Bear skin caps may be worn by regiments doing duty as infantry. 8. The fatigue jacket of the cavalry and light artillery will !)« allowed to be worn, by regiments doing duty in those arms, as a full dress. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 275 Uniform Generally. 9. Worsted epaulettes may be worn, in place of the scales, by foot soldiers ; sucli epaulettes to be scarlet for the artillery ; light or sky blue, or whitCy for the infantry ; emerald green for the riflemen ; yellow for the engineers ; crimson for the ordnance ; and ilacJc for regi- ments doing duty as light infantry, and equipped in the gray uniform. 1551. The order for a regimental uniform may include the field officers, and all officers, non-commissioned officers, musicians and privates of battalion companies, and companies doing duty as batta- lion companies by order of the Commander-in-Chief. 1552. All officers and battalion companies, and companies doing duty as battalion companies, in regiments for which a regimental uniform shall not have been prescribed, or shall not be prescribed by the Commander-in-Chief, pursuant to the preceding paragraphs ( and which are not now uniformed agreeably to the regulations as to uniform, adopted by this state, by general orders No. 461, in 1851 ), shall equip in the uniform herein prescribed, within one year from the date of the issue of these regulations. 1553. In regiments for which a regimental uniform shall be pre- scribed, the officers and companies, which are affected by the adoption of such uniform, shall uniform and equip themselves, agi-eeably to such uniform, in six months after its approval by the Commander- in-Chief. 1554. All battalion companies, and companies doing duty as batta- lion companies, hereafter coming into a regiment, shall strictly equip agreeably to the uniform of such regiment. 1555. All orders regulating uniforms and equipments, inconsistent with those regulations, are hereby countermanded and rescinded ; but no person already in uniform, agreeably to the general orders ( No. 461 ), dated September 6, 1851, establishing a uniform for this state, will be required to change his uniform ( unless in pursuance of an order establishing a regimental uniform ), until a new uniform is required by him, except as prescribed in paragraph fifteen hundrtd and forty-seven, and, also, except that tlie general and staff officers 276 GENERAL REGULATIONS Manual of Arms. are required at once to conform to these regulations as to the prescribed buttons, cap ornaments and pompon. 1556. No discharge from service, exemption or any privilege what- soever, shall be given or allowed to any person, for military service, who shall not strictly comply with the foregoing regulations as to uniform. INSTRUCTION TO THE INFANTRY FOR ARMS WITH PERCUSSION CAPS. ^ Supplement to the Manual of Arms — Infantry Tactics. 1557. Percussion caps will be carried in a pouch, attached to the waist-belt, by loops, in a manner to admit of its being moved upon the belt. 1558. Whenever, in the Manual of ArmSy or in Scott^s Tactics, the words "little linger toucliing the feather spring " occur, the words *' little finger just above the lock " should be substituted. The terms " handle" and " small of the stock" mean the same thing. 1559. Load in Ten Times (being at Shoulder Arms). 1. Load. one time and two motions. First motion. — Drop the piece by a quick extension of the left arm ; seize it, with the right hand, above and near the lower band ; and, at the same time, carry the right foot forward, the heel against the hollow of the left foot. Second motion. — Drop the piece with the right hand along the left thigh ; seize it, with the left hand above the right, and with the left hand let it descend to the ground without shook, the piece touching the left thigh, and the muzzle opposite the centre of the body ; carry the right hand quickly to the cartridge-box and open it. 2. Handle — Cartridge. ONE TIME AND ONE MOTION. Seize a cartridge with the thumb and the next two fingers, and place it between the teeth. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 211 Manual of Arms. 3. Tear — Cartridge. ONE TIME AND ONE MOTION. Tear the paper down to the powder, hold the cartridge upright between the thumb and two next fingers, near the top ; in this posi- tion place it in front of and near the muzzle, the back of the hand to the front. 4. Charge — Cartridge. ONE TIME AND ONE MOTION. Fix the eye on the muzzle ; turn quickly the back of the right hand towards the body, in order to discharge the powder into the barrel ; raise the elbow to the height of the wrist, shake the cartridge, force it into the muzzle, and leave the hand reversed, the fingers closed, but not clenched. 5. Draw — Rammer. ONE TIME AND THREE MOTIONS. First motion. — Drop, quickly, the right elbow, and seize the rammer between the thumb and fore-finger bent, the other fingers shut ; draw it smartly ; extending the arm, seize the rammer again at the middle, between the thumb and fore-finger, the hand reversed, the palm to the front, the nails up, the eyes following the movement of the hand ; clear the rammer from the pipes by again extending the arm. Second motion. — Turn, rapidly, the rammer between the bayonet and the face, closing the fingers, the rammers of the rear rank grazing the right shoulders of the men of the same file in front, respectively, the rammer parallel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the butt of the rammer opposite to the muzzle, but not yet inserted, the eyes fixed on the muzzle. Third motion. — Insert the butt of the rammer and force it down as low as the hand. 6. Ram — Cartridge. ONE TIME AND ONE MOTION. Extend the arm to its full length to seize the rammer between the right thumb extended and the fore-finger bent, the other fingers MlUTARY. 24 278 GENERAL REGULATIONS Ma/Ttual of Arms. closed ; with force ram home twice, and seize the rammer at the little end, between the thumb and fore-finger bent, the other fingers closed, the right elbow touching the body.* 7. Return — Rammer. OITB TIMK AND THREE MOTIONS. First motion. — Draw, briskly, the rammer ; reseize it at the middle between the thumb and fore-finger, the liand reversed, the palm to the front, the nails up, the eyes following the movement of the hand ; clear the rammer from the barrel by extending the arm. Second motion. — Turn, rapidly, the rammer between the bayonet and the face, closing the fingers, the rammers of the rear rank grazing the right shoulders of the men in the same file in front, respectively, the rammer parallel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the little end of the rammer opposite to the first pipe, but not yet inserted, the eyes fixed on that pipe. Third motion. — Insert the little end, and with the thumb, which will follow the movement, force it as low as the middle band ; raise quickly the hand, a little bent, place the little finger on the butt of the rammer and force it down ; lower the left hand on the barrel, to the extent of tlie arm, without depressing the shoulder. 8. Cast — About.! ONE time and two MOTIONS. First motion. — With the left hand bring up the piece vertically against the left shoulder, seize it smartly with the right hand at the handle, and slide the left hand down as low as the chin. Second motion. — Make a half face to the right on the left heel, bring the left toe to the front, place at the same time the right foot behind * If the Minie ball be used, the ramming will be done gently, sufiBcicntly to send the ball home. t If the priming attachment is iMcd, the command will be load in eight times ; the commands cast about and prime are omitted, and the eighth command will be thoulder arms, and will be executed in the same maoner as fh>in ^he ix>sit!on of fix bayonet. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 279 Manual of Arms. and at right angles with the left, the hollow of the right foot against the left heel ; carry the piece opposite to the right shoulder ; bring down the piece with the right hand into the left, which will seize it at the tail band, the thumb extended on the stock, the butt under the right fore-arm, the handle against the body, and about two inches under the right breast, the muzzle at the height of the eye, the left elbow supported against the side, the right hand grasping the handle 9- Prime.* OlfB TIME AND ONE MOTION. Place the thumb of the right hand on the hammer ( the fingers remaining under and against the guard ), and half-cock the piece ; brush off the old cap, and with the thumb and first two fingers of the right hand take a cap from the pouch, place it firmly on the cone by pushing it down with the thumb, and seize the piece at the handle. 10. Shoulder — Arms. ONE TIME AND TWO MOTIONS. t^rst motion. — Face to the front by turning on the left heel ; bring up the right by the side of the left heel ; at the same time bring the piece briskly with the right hand to the left shoulder, and place the left hand under the butt. Second motion. — Let fall smartly the right hand into its position at Shoulder Arms. 1560. Ready (from the position of Shoulder Arms). ONE TIME AND FOUR MOTIONS. First motion. — Turn the piece with the left hand, the lock to the front ; seize it at the handle, with the right hand, and turn the left toe * If the priming attachment is used, the command will be load in eight times ; the commands cast about and prime are omitted, and the eighth command will be shoulder arms, and will be executed in the same manner as from the position of Jix bayonet. 280 GENERAL REGULATIONS Manual of Arms. a little to the front ; at the same time place the hollow of the right foot against the heel of the left. Second motion. — Bring the piece, with the right hand, to the middle of the body ; place the left hand, the little finger just above the lock, the thumb extended on the stock at the height of the chin, the counter- plate (or S) almost turned toward the body, the rammer obliquely to the left and front. Third motion. — Place the thumb on the head of the hammer, the fingers under and on the guard, the elbow at the height of the hand. Fourth motion. — Close the right elbow smartly to the body in cocking ; seize the piece at the handle, let it descend along the body in the left hand to the tail band, which will remain at the height of the shoulder. 1561. Ready (from the position of Prime).* ONE TIME AND ONE MOTION. Place the thumb of the right hand on the hammer (the fingers remaining under and against the guard), cock the piece and seize the handle with the right hand. jlim. ONE TIME AND ONE MOTION. Raise the butt to the shoulder ; drop, smartly, the muzzle, the left hand remaining at the tail band ; support the butt against the right shoulder, the left elbow a little down ; shut the left eye, direct the right along the barrel, drop the head upon the butt to catch the object, and place the fore-finger on the trigger. The rear rank will, * If priming attachment is used, Readt from poaitictn of prime 'wHl be omitted, and Ready /rom the. position of return rammer substituted, as follows: First Motion.— Unite the piece with the left hand along the left side, the left hand af. the height of the eyes, the fore arm touching the piece ; seize the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock, at the same time make a half face to the right, turning on the left heel, and i)lace the hollow of the right foot against the heel of the loft. Second, Third and Fourth Motions.— Witt be the same as the second, third and fourth motions of Reapt from the position of shoulder arms. FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 281 Manual of Arms. at the same time, carry the right foot about eight inches towards the left heel of the man next on the right. Fire. ONE TIME AND ONE MOTION. Apply the fore-finger with force to the trigger, without further lowering or turning the head, and remain in that position 1562L Load ( from the position of Fire. ) ONE TIME AND TWO MOTIONS. First motion. — Bring back the piece quickly with both hands, depress the butt strongly by extending the right arm, and carry it, with the arm thus extended, to the left side, the barrel to the front and opposite to the left shoulder, the left hand at the height of the chin, the back of the hand to the front, the left fore-arm touching the stock ; at the same time face to the front and carry the right foot forward, the heel against the hollow of the left foot. Second motion. — Let go the handle with the right hand, let the piece descend through the left to the ground, without shock, and take the position of the second motion of Load, when loading in ten times. 1563. Shoulder Arms •{ from the Fin ). ONE TIME AND TWO MOTIONS. JEtrst motion. — ^Bring back the piece with both hands, face to the front ; carry the piece against the left shoulder and place the left hand under the butt. Second motion. — Let fall, smartly, the right hand into its position at Shoulder Arms. 1564. After the words Ready and Aim are given, if it is desired to bring the musket to the shoulder without firing, the order will be as follows : Recover — Arms. ONE TIME AND ONE MOTION, Withdraw the finger from the trigger, throw up smartly the muazle, and retake the position of the fourth motion of Ready. Military. 24* 282 GENERAL REGULATIONS Manual of Arms. 1565. Shoulder — Arms {from the Reccwer).* OXE TIME AND ONE MOTION. At the word Shoulder, bring the piece to the middle of the body, the left thumb at the height of the chin, the little finger just above the lock ; next place the right thumb on the head of the hammer, support the fore-finger on the trigger, sustain at the same time the hammer carefully in its descent to the position of half-cock, then seize the handle of the piece with the right hand. At the word j2rms, carry the piece smartly to the shoulder, and take the position of Shoulder Arms. LOAD IN /FOUR TIMES.f 1566. Load. — One. Execute the first time of loading, handle car- tridge, tear cartridge, charge cartridge ; Two. Draw rammer, enter it as far as the hand, and ram twice ; Three. Return rammer, cast about, and prime ; Four. Execute the tenth time of loading. 1567. If the soldier be at the Ready, from Shoulder Arms, the same commands and means will be used, in returning from this position to that of Shoulder Arms, as were prescribed in coming to the latter from the Recover; but if he be at the Ready, from the position of Prime, when the command Shoulder Arms is given, he will, at the word Shoulder, support the piece firmly with the left hand, half- cock, as has been explained, and seize the piece at the handle witli the right hand. At the word Arms, face to the front and complete the time. If the priming attachment is used, the priming paper or tape will be torn close off at the orifice from which it appears, and the hammer allowed gently to fall upon the cone. t If the priming attachment is used, the command will be load in maeB timks • one and ttco will bo executed as al>ove provided ; three will be, return rammer and shoulder arms, as from the position of fix bayonets FOR THE MILITARY FORCES. 283 Manual of Arms. MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE LIGHT INFANTRY, WHEN THE LONG BARREL MUSKET OR RIFLE MUSKET IS USED. Principles of Shouldered Arms. 1568. The piece in the right hand, the right arm slightly bent, the barrel nearly vertical and resting in the hollow of the shoulder, the guard to the front, the arm hanging nearly at its full length near the body; the thumb and fore-finger embracing the guard, the remaining fingers closed together, and grasping the swell of the stock just under the cock, which rests on the little finger. 1569. Recruits are frequently seen with natural defects in the con- formation of the shoulders, breast and hips. These the instructor will labor to correct in the lessons without arms, and afterwards, by steady endeavors, so that the appearance of the pieces, in the same line, may be uniform, and this without constraint to the men in their positions. 1570. The instructor will have occasion to remark that recruits, on first bearing arms, are liable to derange their position by lowering the right shoulder and the right hand, or by sinking the hip and spreading out the elbows. 1571. He will be careful to correct all these faults by continually rectifying the position ; he will sometimes take away the piece to replace it the better; he will avoid fatiguing the recruits too much in the beginning, but labor by degrees to render this position so natural and easy that they may remain in it a long time without fatigue. 1572. Finally, the instructor will take great care that the piece, at a shoulder, be not carried too high nor too low : if too high, the right elbow would spread out, the soldier would occupy too much space in his rank, and the piece be made to waver; if too low, the files would be too much closed, the soldier would not have the necessary space to handle his piece with facility, the right arm would become too much fatigued, and would draw down the shoulder. 284 GENERAL REGULATIONS Manual of Arms. .573. The manual of arms will be taught to four men, placed, at first, in one rank, elbow to elbow, and afterwards in two ranks. 1574. Each command will be executed in one time (or pause), but this time will be divided into motions, the better to make known the mechanism. 1575. The rate (or swiftness) of each motion, in the manual of arms, with the exceptions herein indicated, is fixed at the ninetieth part of a minute; but, in order not to fatigue the attention, the instructor will, at first, look more particularly to the execution of the motions, without requiring a nice observance of the cadence, to which he will bring the recruits progressively, and after they shall have become a little familiarized with the handling of the piece. 1576. As the motions relative to the cartridge, to the rammer, and to the fixing and unfixing of the bayonet, cannot be executed at the rate prescribed, nor even with a uniform swiftness, they will not be subjected to that cadence. The instructor will, however, labor to cause these motions to be executed with promptness, and, above all, with regularity. 1577. The last syllable of the command will decide the brisk exe- cution of the first motion of each time (or pause). The commands two^ three and four will decide the brisk execution of the other mo- tions. As soon as the recruits shall well comprehend the positions of the several motions of a time, they will be taught to execute the time without resting on its different motions ; the mechanism of the time will nevertheless be observed, as well to give a perfect use of the piece, as to avoid the sinking of, or slurring over, either of the motions. 1578. The manual of arms will be taught in the following progres- sion. The instructor will command : Supp3 " not to be dispensed with, 809 FURLOUGHS: 86 to S3 Who may grant, S6 Maybe prohibited,' ■. S6 Soldiers on, not to take arms, Ssc, S7 Consequence of absence beyond, S3 Form ofi vide p. 17. FURNITURE : Mess, of soldiers, _ 74 G. GENERAL OFFICERS : 724 to 738 In command of divisions and brigades, 724 What required of, 725 to 729 Brigadier-generals disbanding companies to report to Adjutant-General,- 730 Commandants of brigades to cause inspection, &c., before approving organization of companies, 781 In command, to transmit copies of general orders to Adjutant-General, .. 733 Notice of encampments, «fec., to whom and how given, 733 GENERAL POLICE: Composition of, &c., 1301 to 1307 GRADATION : Vide Pbkcedence. GUARD MOUNTING: 398 to 421 Relief of guards, 39S Form of, 393 to 421 316 INDEX. Ko. or Paracrftph GUARDS: 422 to 454 Color, at inspections,.... - 830, 885 " at reviews, 8T2, 8T4 To be relieved every twenty-four hours, 898 Sentinels to be relieved every two hours, 422 Relief to be inspected, 428 Countersign, 424 Parole, 428 Grand, and other outposts, 1182 to 1173 GUIDONS: Of mounted regiments, 722 Pike pole or staff of, 728 H. HAVERSACKS : How marked and worn, 64 HONORS: To bo paid by the troops, 260 to 281 Funeral, 299 to 825 HOSPITALS : Vide Mkdioal DEPARTMKirr. L INFANTRY : Camp of, 1046 to 1068 INSPECTIONS: 826 to 847 Of thetrwjps, 826 to 84T *• ** preceded by review, 826 " ** periodical, 827 Visits by commanding, company and medical officers, 833 Form of, 829 to 843 Of hospital, quarters, &c., 848 to 846 Of cavalry and artillery, 847 Posting music at, 518 Generally, 776 to 778 INSPECTOR-GENERAL: 779 to 786 Precedence of, in staff, . 19 Duty to visit regimental districts, 779 " Inspect arsenals, Ac, 779 *• attend to organizations, 779 Commandants of regiments to ftirnlsh information to, 780 To report property missing, injured, &c., 780 INDEX. 317 INSPECTOE-GENERAL ( Continued ) : No. of Paragraph. Duty to inspect camp equipage, and report, 781 In annual report, to state what, 782 To, will be referred matters to be examined at a distance, 783 To report upon qualifications of persons appointed, 783 " " organization of companies, 7S3 May require Division and Brigade Inspectors to report to him, 7S4 To cause troops to be exercised, and to give instructions, &c., 7S5 To examine books, accounts and warrants of boards of auditors, and to report thereon, 786 INSPECTORS: 771 to 775 Of division, chiefs division staflfe, and duties of, 771 " act as Assistant Adjutants-General, 771 " to make inspections and returns, 772 " when to act as Brigade Inspectors, 774 Of brigade, chiefs of brigade staffs, and duties of, 771 " to act as Assistant Adjutants-General, 771 " to make inspections and returns, 772 " to make full returns to Adjutant-General, 778 Division and Brigade, to report to Inspector-General, when, 784 Inspecting officers when entitled to review, 1651, 1652 Vide Adjutant-General's Department, Instruction, Eetcrns and Reports. INSTRUCTION: 521 to 560 What manoeuvres and Forms of parade prohibited, 521 Officers responsible for, 522 Course of military, to be ordered by Commander-in-Chief, 623 to 526 Report of, to be made by commandant of regiment, 527 « " ♦* brigade, 527 ** " *• division, 528 •* blanks, &C., to be furnished for, 529 " duty of Adjutant-General with regard to, 530 Orders for, when transmitted, 531 " to be sent Brigade Inspector, 582 Duties of commandants to whom orders for, are sent, 583 Commandant of division to call together officers of division for, 534 " brigade " " brigade " 585 " regiment " " regiment" 536 What may be required of officers at such meetings for, 537 Principal instructors, 538 to 541 Substituted instructors, 539 to 545 Duties of instructor to explain, &c., 544, 545 Movements introduced to be executed slowly, «&c., 546 Course of, at encampments, &c., to be announced in orders, 547 Officer ordering meetings for, may designate instructors, 54S Military, 27* 318 INDEX. INSTRUCTION ( Continued ) : Ko. of P«n«n«pii. Sappers and miners, how instructed, kc, 549 Staflf officers in what Instructed, &c., 549 Markers to be selected and Instructed by Lieutenant-Colonel, 660 Duties of Brigade Inspectors with regard to, 551 to 656 In correcting errors, care will be taken, &c., 556 To facilitate, 557 to 560 INTERNAL ECONOMr OF COMPANIES: 47 to 76 Vide Ammunition, Armband Accoctrkmentb, Captains ofCompahiis. ISSUES : How made, «kc., 1091 J. JUDGE ADVOCATE-GENERAL'S DEPARTMENT : 828 to . S4l Precedence of Judge Advocate-General in staff, 29 Judge Advocate, duties of, 823 Who should be appointed, . .. 823 Duty of, when receives commission, 824 To direct prosecutions, «fcc., 825 To furnish accused with copy charges, Ac., 826 To correct and arrange testimony, kc, 827 To counsel court, 823 To admonish accused, Ac., 829 As law officer of court, not to Intimate opinion of; 880 To apply evidence, 881 To have preparation, &c., of papers, 882 To prepare and correct charges and specifications, 888 To keep record of proceedings of court, 834 To make copy of proceedings each day of court, 835 To whom to transmit record, - 886 Form of recording proceedings of court-martial, Ac-, -— 887 Bills for attending courts-martial to be made out and forwarded by, 888 Charges to be allowed by, for time, .- 889 Division and Brigade, to make annual report, .. .. 840 General to make report, - 841 L. LEAVE ^F ABSENCE : Vide AusKKOB. LIEUTENANTS : Duty of, 89,41, 42 Vide Offioers. LIQUORS : Bale of, prohibited, 6»5 INDEX. 319 M. No. of Paragraph. MAIN BODY: What is, 15 MANUAL OF AEMS : Instruction to infantry, for arms with percussion caps, 1557 to 1567 For light infantry, when long'or rifle barrel musket is used, 1568 to 1647 MANUAL OF SWOED OR SABRE : For officers, 1653, 1654 MARCHES : Order of, &c., 1207 to 1237 MEDICAL DEPARTMENT : 842 to 858 Precedence of Surgeon-General in staff, 28 Officers of, to be skilled in their profession, 842 Subgeon-General, charged with administrative details and oversight of, 843 May require reports from officers of, 844 Will make reports to Commander-in-Chief when necessary or re- quired, 845 Senior medical officer on duty to be Medical Director, 846 " « M « to select site for hospital, 847 Medical Director to inspect hospital, 848 " " officers to assist, 849 " " surgeons of regiments to obey, responsibility, &c., 850 Orderly sergeants to make morning reports of sick, 851 Surgeon to report cases of feigned sickness, &c.,- 852 " to be at all times within call, 853 ♦* assistant, to accompany, and duties, 854 •* commanding officer may appoint, in absence of military, 855 " " " may direct removal of sick, 856 « shall attend, when, 857 " certificate of private, shall not excuse absence, 858 MILITARY SECRETARY: Ranko^ 28 MUSIC : At ftmerals, 816 to 817 Field, at inspections, 831, 835 " dress parade, 3fi0, 361 « reviews, 872,874,876,878,881,884,386, 393 " guard mounting, 403,406, 408 " in route marches, 511 " how posted on different occasions, 518 to 619 " in street firing, 945 to 947 320 INDEX. MUSTER ROLLS : No. of ParagrapK How made, 854 Copy to be sent to Adjutant-General, 855 MUSTERS: 848 to 355 Will be made by inspecting officer, 84S Inspecting officer may be assisted, » 849 Preceded by inspection, 850 When preceded by review, 850 Form of, 851, 852 Mustering officer to visit guard and hospital, 853 N. NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICEKS : General observations on, - 43 Neglect of duty by, M Election of, 45 Duty of, on parades or in camp, 46 To be called together for instruction twice a year, 536 What may be required of them at such meetings, 687 In correcting errors, Ac, of, their authority not to be impaired, 656 To salute officers, 279, 281 0. OFFICE : No person to be elected to, not created by law, 6S4 Effect of person holding, accepting another, 6SS Commandants of brigade not to approve election to, of ineligible person,. 692 Qualifications of eligibility to, 693 OFFICES VACATED BY REMOVAL: When and how, 702 See 1656 OFFICERS : Precedence and gradation of, 7 to 9 Responsibility of, 11, 12 Rank and command of, 12 to «0 Succession in command of, 21 to 28 Resignation of, 24 to 26 Commanding, 29 To return salutes, 278,280, 281 Commissions of, when vacated by removal, 703 Not to loan arms belonging to their commands, 715 General, 724to 788 INDEX. 321 OFFICERS ( Continued ) : No. of Paragrarh. Staff, to draw swords and salute at review, 749 To salute with sword or sabre, 1654 Haying commands in cities, when deemed to have vacated office, 1656 OFFICERS OF THE DAT: To report for orders to commanding oflacer, 426 To see that officer of guard has countersign, &c., 427 To visit guards day and night, 423 To make remarks on guard report, 429 And duties of the day, 602 to 617 Charged with order and cleanliness of camp, Ac, 610 OFFICERS OF THE GUARD : 618 to G21 How detailed, 618 Duties of, 619 to 621 Tide Guards, Camp Guards, Camps. ORDERLIES : 1022 to 1026 ORDERS AND CORRESPONDENCE : 455 to 483 Enumeration of orders, 455, 456 General, 457 Special, 458 To be read by officer, Ac, 459 Form of, 460, 461 How addressed and transmitted, 462 to 467 Officers to acknowledge receipt of, 467 Commanding officers to arrange for opening, &c., 468 A file of, to be kept, &c., 469 Not received in regular succession to be reported, 470 Orderly hours, 471 On marches, how sent, &c., 472 To make tour, Ac, 473 Copies of, to be sent to, 474 "Written communications by commander, how made, 475 Official communications, how signed, 476 •* " how addressed and transmitted, 477 " " from commandants of divisions, &c., made to,.. 478 •* " from officers of regiments, sent to, 479 •* " transmitting rolls and returns, 480 " " certain, how treated, 481 to 4S3 In the field, 1086 ORDER BOOKS : What to be entered in, 484 to 486 322 INDEX No. of Pamgrttph. ORGANIZATION: 675 to 6S8 Member of one company not to join another, 677 " " " parade with another, 67S Person not citizen cannot parade or drill, 679 Names of persons prohibited by law, &c., from joinlnjj companies, &C., to be stricken from rolls, CSO Certiflrate of service not issued to hoaorary member, 6S1 Who considered member of, 6S3 Certificate of service not to be issued to certain persona, 083 No election to office not created by law, 6S4 Transfers from one company to another, 6S3 Discharfes of non-commissioned officers, Ac, 6S6 Transfers of companies and regiments, &S7 Of an army in the field, 1002 to 1020 P. PAEADE: 499 to 520 Forms of, 856 to 869 Order of troops at, 499 " riflemen at, 500 to 504 •* infantry at, 600 " artillery at, 601 to 608 " sappers and miners at, 602 •* fiank companies not doing duty as battalion companies, Ac, 605, 606 CJommanding officer may make such disposition, «fec., 606 Officers inferior to commander not to interfere with Acyutant, 607 « ordering, Ac, 60S Companies to be equalized, - -- 609 When may be ordered, - 610 Position of music at, 511,61810 619 Battalion in line for review, 612 Posting pioneers and engineers, 618 to 619 •* colors and standards, 618,616, 617 Signals and calls, 620 Notice of annual, to be given commandant of division, 733 PARTISANS AND FLANKERS : 1194 to 1206 PAYMASTER'S DEPARTMENT : 878, 874 Precedence of Paymaster-General In staff, 23 "When officers of, to observe Regulations of U.S., 878 Officers of, may be required to do duty In Quartermaster's department, Jbc., S74 PIONEERS : At inspection, 881 At dress parades, 860 INDEX. 823 PIONEERS ( Continued ) : No. of Paragraph At reviews, 372, 3T8 Posting, directions for, 513, 519 At street flringa, 945, 946 POLICE : Guard, 1103 to 1122 POSTS : Intrenched, 1IT3 to 1178 PRECEDENCE AND GRADATION : 7 to 9 Of officers and non-commissioned officers, T Of commissions same grade and date, 8 Question of, how settled, - 9 PRISONERS OF WAR : Return of, &c^ 1265 to 126T Q. QUARTERS : Head, 10S4 QUARTERMASTER'S DEPARTMENT : 859 to 872 Precedence of Quartermaster-General in staff, 23 Objects of, 859 At encampments, will have charge of what, 860 Quartermaster-General head of, 861 Officers of, to act under directions of Commissary-General, 862 " subject to orders of commandants, &c., 8G2 " while serving with troops, who to obey, 863 Regimental Quartermasters, certain duties of, 864 Certain expenses of, to be paid by regiments, 865 Quartermaster, moneys to be paid over by, 865 ** regimental, division and brigade, to receive tents, Ac., — 866 •* to examine, repair, &c., tents, &c., 867 ** regimental, annually, to inspect armories and report thereon to Commissary-General, 868 " commandant of regiment may temporarily fill vacancy in office of, 869 What sergeant, and when, to be sub-quartermaster sergean t, 870 Quartermaster sergeant at camps of instruction, T. 871 " " and sub-quartermaster sergeant to be instructed by Quartermaster, 872 R. RANK AND COMMAND : 12 to 20 When several corps are together, 12 Command of post, &c., must be regularly relieved, 18 324 INDEX. BANK AND COMMAND ( Continued ) : No, of Paragraph. Sickness of officer commanding post, Ac., 13 Command of detachment, 14 Staff and brevet commission, 16, 17 Absence from command provided for, 18, 19 Command in camp and field, 20 Officer temporarily in command, ^ 20 Vide Succession in Command. KECONNOISSANCES : 1186 to 1198 REGIMENTS : Definition of, 30 Duties of commanders of, 81, 82 Field officers, Ac, to take command of parade, 82 Order of companies in, 88 « " light infantry, 34 Flank companies, 85 Composition oflight artillery section, 86 Articles to be marked, 87 Bank of sergeant standard bearers of, 83 «• trumpet-major of, 88 " drum-major of, 8S Commandants of, to make returns, 663 to 676 BESIQNATION OF 0FFICEE3 : 24 to 26 Acceptance of, 24 To whom forwarded, 25 In time of war, when take effect, 26 BESPONSIBILITY : Of olBcers and non-comml8sloneerty of any citizen of any of the United States, such as is punishable by the known laws of the land, the Commanding Officer and officers of every regiment, troop, or com- jxiny, to which the person or persons so accused shall belong are hereby required, upon application duly made by, or in behalf of the party or parties injured, to use their utmost endeavors to deliver over such accused person or persons to the civil magistrate, and likewise to be aiding and assisting to the officers of justice in apprehending and securing the person or persons so accused, in order to bring him or them to trial. If any Commanding Officer or officers shall willfully neglect or shall refuse, upon the application aforesaid, to deliver over such accused person or persons to the civil magistrates, or to be aiding and assisting to the officers of justice in apprehending such person or persons, the officer or officers so offending shall be cashiered. Art. 34. If any officer shall think himself wronged by his Colonel, or the Commanding Officer of the regiment, and shall, upon due applica- tion being made to him, be refused redress, he may complain to the General Comanding in the State or the Territory where such regiment shall be stationed, in order to obtain justice; who is hereby required to examine into said complaint, and take proper measure for redress- ing the wrong complained of, and transmit, as soon as possible, to the department of war, a true state of such complaint, with the proceedings had thereon. APPENDIX. 339 Art. 35. If any inferior officer or soldier shall think himself wronged by his Captain or other officer, he is to complain thereof to the Com- manding Officer of the regiment, who is hereby required to summon a regimental court-martial for the doing justice to tlie complainant ; from which regimental court-martial either party may, if he thinks himself still aggrieved, appeal to a general court-martial. But if, upon a second hearing, the appeal shall appear vexatious and groundless, the person so appealing shall be punished at the discretion of the said court-martial. Art. 36. Any commissioned officer, store-keeper, or commissary* who shall be convicted at a general court-martial of having sold with- out a proper order for that purpose, embezzeled, misapplied, or will- fully, or through neglect, suffered any of the provisions, forage, arms, clothing, ammunition, or other military stores belonging to the United States to be spoiled or damaged, shall, at his own expense, make good the loss or damage, and shall, moreover, forfeit all his pay and be dissmissed from the service. Art. 37. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier who shall be convicted at a regimental court-martial of having sold, or designedly or through neglect, wasted the ammunition delivered out to him to be employed in the service of the United States, shall be punished at the discretion of such court Art. 38. Every non-commissioned officer or soldier who shall be convicted before a court-martial of having sold, lost, or spoiled, through neglect, his horse, arms, clothes, or accoutrements, shall undergo such weekly stoppages ( not exceeding the half of his pay ) as such court-martial shall judge sufficient for repairing the loss or damage ; and shall suffer confinement, or such other corporeal punish- ment as his crime shall deserve. Art. 39. Every officer who shall be convicted before a court-martial of having embezzled or misapplied any money with which he may have been intrusted, for the payment of the men under his command, or for enlisting men into the service, or for other purposes, if a commissioned officer, shall be cashiered, and compelled to refund the money ; if a non-commissioned officer, shall be reduced to the ranks, be put 340 APPENDIX. under stoppages until the money shall be made good, and suffer such corporeal punishment as such court-martial shall direct. Art. 40. Every Captain of a troop or company is charged with the arms, accoutrements, ammunition, clothing, or other warlike stores belonging to the troop or company under his command, which he is to be accountable for to his Colonel in case of their being lost, spoiled, or damaged, not by unavoidable accidents, or on actual service. Art. 41. All non-commissioned officers and soldiers who shall be found one mile from the camp without leave, in writing, ^om their Commanding Officer, shall suffer such punishment as shall be inflicted upon them by the sentence of a court martial. Art. 42. No officer or soldier shall lie out of his quarters, garrison, or camp without leave from his superior officer, upon penalty of being punished according to the nature of his offence, by the sentence of a court-martial. Art. 43, Every non-commissioned officer and soldier shall retire to his quarters or tent at the beating of the retreat ; in default of which he shall be punished according to the nature of his offence. Art. 44. No officer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier shall fail in rejDairing, at the time fixed, to the place of parade, of exercise, or other rendezvous appomted by his Commanding Officer, if not pre- vented by sickness or some other evident necessity, or shall go from the said place of rendezvous without leave from his Commanding Officer, before he shall be regularily dismissed or relieved on the penalty of being punished, according to the nature of his offence, by the sentence of a court-martial. Art. 45. Any commissioned officer who shall be found drunk on his guard, party, or other duty, shall be cashiered. Any non-com- missioned officer or soldier so offending shall suffer such corporeal punishment as shall be inflicted by the sentence of a court-martial. Art. 46. Any sentinel who shall be found sleeping upon his post, or shall leave it before he shall be regularly relieved, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be inflicted by the sentence of a court-martial. APPENDIX. 341 Art. 47, No soldier belonging to any regiment, troop, or company shall hire another to do his duty for him, or be excused from duty but in cases of sickness, disability, or leave of absence ; and every such soldier found guilty of hiring his duty, as also the party hired to do another's duty, shall be punished at the discretion of a regimental court-martial. Art, 48. And every non-commissioned officer conniving at such hiring of duty aforesaid, shall be reduced ; and every commissioned officer knowing and allowing such ill practices in the service, shall be punished by the judgment of a general court-martial. Art. 49, Any officer belonging to the service of the United States, who, by discharging of firearms, drawing of swords, beating of drums, or by any other means whatsoever, shall occasion false alarms in camp, garrison, or quarters, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be ordered by the sentence of a general court-martial. Art. 50. Any officer or soldier who shall, without urgent necessity, or without the leave of his superior officer, quit his guard, platoon, or division, shall be punished, according to the nature of his offence, by the sentence of a court-martial. Art. 51. No officer or soldier shall do violence to any person who brings provisions or other necessaries into the camp, garrison, or quarters of the forces of the United States, employed in any parts out of the said states, upon pain of death^ or such other punisliment as a court-martial shall direct. Art. 52. Any officer or soldier who shall misbehave himself before the enemy, run away or shamefully abandon any fort, post, or guard which he or they may be commanded to defend, or speak words inducing others to do the like, or shall cast away his arms or ammu- nition, or who shall quit his post or colors to plunder and pillage, every such offender, being duly convicted thereof shall suffer death, or such other punishment as ^hall be ordered by the sentence of a general court- martiaL Art. 53. Any person belonging to the armies of the United States who shall make known the watchword to any person who is not enti- tled to receive it according to the rules and discipline of war, or shall Military. 29* 342 APPENDIX. presume to give a parole or watchword diflferent from what he received, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be ordered by the sentence of a general court-martial. Art. 54. All officers and soldiers are to behave themselves orderly in quarters and on their march ; and whoever shall commit any waste or spoil, either in walks of trees, parks, warrens, fish-ponds, houses, or gardens, corn fields, inclosures of meadows, or shall maliciously destroy any property whatsoever belonging to the inhabitants of the United States, unless by order of the t'aen Commander-in-Chief of the armies of the said States, shall ( besides such penalties as they aro liable to by law ) be punished, according to the nature and degree of the offence, by the judgment of a regimental or general court-martial. Art. 55. Whosoever, belonging to the armies of the United States in foreign parts, shall force a safeguard, shall suffer death. Art. 56. Whosoever shall relieve the enemy with money, victualg or ammunition, or shall knowingly harbor or protect an enemy, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be ordered by the sentence of a court-martial. Art. 57. Whosoever shall be convicted of holding correspondence with, or giving intelligence to, the enemy, either directly or indirectly, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be ordered by the sentence of a court-martial. Art. 58. All public stores taken in the enemy's camp, towns, forts or magazines, whether of artillery, ammunition, clothing, forage or provisions, shall be secured for the service of the United States ; for the neglect of which the Commanding Officer is to be answerable. Art, 59. If any Commander of any garrison, fortress or post shall be compelled, by the officers and soldiers under his command, to give up to the enemy, or to abandon it, the commissioned officers, non- commissioned officers or soldiers, who shall be convicted of having so offended, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be inflicted upon them by the sentence of a court-martial. Art. 60. All sutlers and retainers to the camp, and all x)ersons whatsoever, serving with the armies of the United States in the field, APPENDIX. 343 though not enlisted soldiers, are to be subject to orders, according to the rules and discipline of war. Art. 61. Officers having brevets or commissions, of a prior date to those of the regiment,in which they serve, may take place in courts - martial, and on detachments, when composed of different corps, accord- ing to the ranks given them in their brevets or dates of their former commissions ; but, in the regiment, troop or company to which such officers belong, they shall do duty and take rank, both in courts- martial and on detachments which shall be composed of their own corps, according to the commissions by which they are mustered in the said corps. Art. 62. If, upon marches, guards or in quarters, different corps of the army shall happen to join or do duty together, the officer highest in rank of the line of the army, marine corps or militia, by commis- sion, there on duty or in quarters, shall command the whole, and give orders for what is needful to the service, unless otherwise specially directed by the President of the United States, according to the nature of the case. Art. 63. The functions of the engineers being generally confined to the most elevated branch of military science, they are not to assume, nor are they subject to be ordered on, any duty beyond the line of their immediate profession, except by the special order of the President of the United States ; but they are to receive every mark of respect to which their rank in the army may entitle them respectively, and are liable to be transferred, at the discretion of the President, from one corps to another, regard being paid to rank. Art, 64. General courts-martial may consist of any number of commissioned officers, from five to thirteen inclusively ; but they shall not consist of less than thirteen, where that number can be con- vened without manifest injury to the service. Art. 65.* Any general officer commanding an army, or Colonel commanding a separate department, may appoint general courts-mar- tial whenever necessary. But no sentence of a court-martial shall be * Modified by act of 29th May, 1830. 344 APPENDIX. carried into execution until after the whole proceedings shall have been laid before the officer ordering the same, or the oflScer com- manding the troops for the time being ; neither shall any sentence of a general court-martial, in the time of peace, extending to the loss of life, or the dismission of a commissioned officer, or which shall, either in time of peace or war, respect a general officer, be carried into execution until after the whole proceedings shall have been transmitied to the secretary of war, to be laid before the President of the United States for his confirmation or disapproval, and orders in the case. All other sentences may be confirmed and executed by the officer ordering the court to assemble, or the Commanding Officer for the time being, as the case may be. Art. 6G. Every officer commanding a regiment or corps may appoint, for his own regiment or corps, courts-martial, to consist of three commissioned officers, for the trial and punishment of offences not capital, and decide upon their sentences. For the same purpose, all officers commanding any of the garrisons, forts, barracks or other places where the troops consist of different corps, may assemble courts-martial, to consist of three commissioned officers, and decide upon their sentences. Art, 67- No garrison or regimental court-martial shall have the power to try capital cases or commissioned officers ; neither shall they inflict a fine exceeding one month's pay ; nor imprison, nor put to hard labor, any non-commissioned officer or soldier for a longer time than one month. Art. 68. Whenever it may be found convenient and necessary to the public service, the officers of the marines shall be associated with the officers of the land forces, for the purpose of holdmg courts-mar- tial and trying offenders belonging to either ; and, in such cases, the orders of the senior officer of either corps, who may be present and duly authorized, shall be received and obeyed. Akt. 69. The Judge- Advocate, or some person deputed by him, or by the General, or officer commanding the army, detachment or gar- rison, shall prosecute in the name of the United States, but shall so far consider himself as counsel for the prisoner, after the said pri- soner shall have made his plea, as to object to any leading question APPENDIX. 345 to any of tlie witnesses, or any question to tlie prisoner, the answer to which might tend to criminate himself ; and administer to each member of the court, before they proceed upon any trial, the follow- ing oath, which shall also be taken by all members of the regimental and garrison courts-martial : " You, A. B., do swear that you will well and truly try and deter- mine, according to evidence, the matter now before you, between the United States of America and the prisoner to be tried, and that you will duly administer justice, according to the provisions of 'An act establishing rules and articles for the government of the armies of the United States,' without partiality, favor or affection ; and if any doubt should arise, not explained by said articles, according to your conscience, the best of your understanding and the custom of war in like cases ; and you do further swear that you will not divulge the sentence of the court until it shall be published by the proper autho- rity ; neither will you disclose or discover the vote or opinion of any particular member of the court-martial, unless required to give evi- dence thereof, as a witness, by a court of justice, in a due course of law. So help you God." And as soon as the said oath shall have been administered to the respective members, the President of the court shall administer to the Judge- Advocate, or person officiating as such, an oath in the follow- ing words : "You, A. B., do swear that you will not disclose or discover the vote or opinion of any particular member of the court-martial, unless required to give evidence thereof, as a witness, by a court of justice, in due course of law ; nor divulge the sentence of the court to any but the proper authority, until it shall be duly disclosed by the same. So help you God." Art. 70. When a prisoner, arraigned before a general court-mar- tial, shall, from obstinacy and deliberate design, stand mute, or answer foreign to the purpose, the court may proceed to trial and judgment as if the prisoner had regularly pleaded not guilty. Art. 71. When a member shall be challenged by a prisoner, he must state his cause of challenge, of which the court shall, after due deliberation, determine the relevancy or validity, and decide record- 346 APPENDIX. ingly; and no challenge to more tlian one member at a time shall be received by the court. Art. 72. All the members of a court-martial are to behave with decency and calmness ; and in giving their votes are to begin with the youngest in commission. Art. 73. All persons who ^ve evidence before a court-martial are to be examined on oath or affirmation, in the following form : " You swear ( or affirm, as the case may be), the evidence you shall give in the cause now in hearing shall be the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the truth. So help you God." Art. 74. On the trials of cases not capital, before courts-martial, the deposition of witnesses, not in the line or staff of the army, may be taken before some justice of the peace, and read in evidence ; pro- vided the prosecutor and person accused are present at the taking the same, or are duly notified thereof. Art. 75. No officer shall be tried but by a general court-martial, nor by officers of an inferior rank, if it can be avoided. Nor shall any proceedings of trials be carried on excepting between the hours of eight in the morning and three in the afternoon, excepting in cases which, in the opinion of the officer appointing the court-martial, require immediate example. Art. 76. No person whatsoever shall use any menacing words, signs, or gestures, in presence of a court-martial, or shall oause any disorder or riot, or disturb their proceedings, on the penalty of being i>unished at the discretion of the said court-martial. Art. 77. Whenever any officer shall be charged with a crime, he shall be arrested and confined in his barracks, quarters or tent, and deprived of his sword by the Commanding Officer. And any officer who shall leave his confinement before he shall be set at li^rty by his Commanding Ofl!icer, or by a superior officer, shall bo cashiered. Art. 78. Non-commissioned officers and soldiers, charged with crimes, shall bo confined until tried by a court-martial or released by proper authority. APPENDIX. 34V Art. 79. No officer or soldier wlio shall be put in arrest &hall con- tinue in confinement more than eight days, or until such time as » court-martial can be assembled. Art. 80. No officer commanding a guard, or provost marshal, shall refuse to receive or keep any prisoner committed to his charge by an officer belonging to the forces of the United States; provided the officer committing shall, at the same time, deliver an account in writ- ing, signed by himself, of the crime with which the said prisoner is charged. Art. 81. No officer commanding a guard, or provost marshal, shall presume to release any person committed to his charge without proper authority for so doing, nor shall he suflFer any person to escape, on the penalty of being punished for it by the sentence of a court-martial. Art. 82. Every officer or provost marshal, to whose charge pri- soners shall be committed, shall, within twenty-four hours after such commitment, or as soon as he shall be relieved from his guard, make report in writing, to the Commanding Officer, of their names, their crimes, and the names of the officers who committed them, on the penalty of being punished for disobedience or neglect, at the discre- tion of a coui't-martial. Art. 83. Any commissioned officer, convicted before a general court-martial of conduct unbecoming an officer and a gentleman, shall be dismissed the service. Art. 84. In cases where a court-martial may think it proper to sentence a commissioned officer to be suspended from command, they shall have power also to suspend his pay and emoluments for the same time, according to the nature and heinousness of the offence. Art. 85. In all cases where a commissioned officer is cashiered for cowardice or fraud, it shall be added, in the sentence, that the crime, name, and place of abode, and punishment of the delinquent, be pub- lished in the newspapers in and about the camp, and of the particu- lar state from which the offender came, or where he usually resides ; after which it shall be deemed scandalous for an officer to associate with him. 348 ' APPENDIX. Art. 86. The Commanding Officer of any post or detachment, in which there shall not be a number of officers adequate to form a gene- ral court-martial, shall, in cases which require the cognizance of such a court, report to the Commanding Officer of the department, who shall order a court to be assembled at the nearest post or depart- ment, and the party accused, with necessary witnesses, to be trans- ported to the place where the said court shall be assembled. Aet. 87.* No person shall be sentenced to suffer death but by the concurrence of two-thirds of the members of a general court-martial, nor except in the cases herein expressly mentioned ; nor shall more than fifty lashes be inflicted on any offender, at the discretion of a court- martial; and no officer, non-commissioned officer, soldier or follower of the army, shall be tried a second time for the same offence. Art. 88. No person shall be liable to be tried and punished by a general court-martial for any offence which shall appear to have been committed more than two years before the issuing of the order foi such trial, unless the person, by reason of having absented himself, or some other manifest impediment, shall not have been amenable to justice within that period. Art. 89. Every officer authorized to order a general court-martial shall have power to pardon or mitigate any punishment ordered by such court, except the sentence of death, or of cashiering an officer ; which, in the oases where he has authority ( by article 65 ) to carry them into execution, he may suspend until the pleasure of the Pre- sident of the United States can be known ; which suspension, together with copies of the proceedings of the court-martial, the said officer shall immediately transmit to the President for liis determination. And the Colonel or Commanding Officer of the regiment or garrison, whore any regimental or garrison cotirt-martial shall be held, m«y pardon or mitigate any Dunishment ordered by such court to bo inflicted. So much of these rules and articles as authorizes the infliction of corporeal punlshmont, by stripes or Inshes, was specially ropeiilod by act of 16lh May, 1S12. By act of 2d March, ISS."?, the repealing act was repealed, so far as it applied to tho crime of doserlion, which, of course, revived the punishnient by lashes for that offence. APPENDIX. 349 Art. 90. Every Judge- Advocate, or person officiating as s.ich, at any general court-martial, shall transmit, with as much expedition as the opportunity of time and distance of place can admit, the origi- nal proceedings and sentence of such court-martial to the Secretary of War ; which said original proceedings and sentence shall be care- fully kept and preserved in the office of said Secretary, to the end that the persons entitled thereto may be enabled, upon application to the said office, to obtain copies thereof. The party tried by any general court-martial shall, upon demand thereof, made by himself, or by any person or persons in his behalf, be entitled to a copy of the sentence and proceedings of such court- martial. Art. 91. In cases where the General, or Commanding Officer, may order a court of iaquiry to examine into the nature of any transaction, accusation or imputation against any officer or soldier, the said court shall consist of one or more officers, not exceeding three, and a Judge- Advocate, or other suitable person, as a recorder, to reduce the pro- ceedings and evidence to writing ; all of whom shall be sworn to the faithful performance of their duty. The court shall have the same power to summon witnesses as a court-martial, and to examine them on oath. But they shall not give their opinion on the merits of the case, except they shall be thereto specially required. The parties accused shall also be permitted to cross-examine and interro- gate the witnesses, so as to investigate fully the circumstances in the question. Art. 92. The proceedings of a court of inquiry must be authenti- cated by the signature of the recorder and the President, and deliv- ered to the Commanding Officer, and the said proceedings may be admitted as evidence by a court-martial, in cases not capital, or extending to the dismission of an officer, provided that the circum- stances are such that oral testimony cannot be obtained. But as courts of inquiry may be perverted to dishonorable purposes, and may be considered as engines of destruction to military merit, in the hands of weak and envious commandants, they are hereby prohibited, unless directed by the President of the United States, or demanded by the accused. Military. 20 350 APPENDIX. Art. 93. The Judge- Advocate or recorder shall admmister to th« members the following oath : " You shall well and truly examine and inquire, according to your evidence, into the matter now before you, without partiality, favor, aflfection, prejudice or hope of reward. So help you God." After which the President shall administer to the Judge- Advocate or recorder the following oath : " You, A. B., do swear that you will, according to your best abili- ties, accurately and impartially record the proceedings of the court, and the evidence to be given in the case in hearing. So help you God." The witnesses shall take the same oath as witnesses sworn before a court-martial. Art. 94. When any commissioned officer shall die or be killed in the service of the United States, the Major of the regiment, or the officer doing the Major's duty in his absence, or, in any post or garri- son, the second officer in command, or the assistant military agent, shall immediately secure all his eflFects or equipage, then in camp or quarters, and shall make an inventory thereof, and forthwith trans- mit the same to the office of the Department of War, to the end that his executors or administrators may receive the same. Art. 95. When any non-commissioned officer or soldier shall die or bo killed in the service of the United States, the then Command- ing Officer of the troop or company shall, in the presence of two other commissioned officers, take an account of what effiects he died possessed of, above his arms and accoutrements, and transmit the same to the office of the Department of War, which said eflfects aro to be accounted for and paid to the representatives of such deceased non-commissioned officer or soldier. And in case any of the officers, so authorized to take care of the effects of deceased officers and sol- diers, should, before they have accounted to their representatives for the same, liavo occasion to leave the regiment or post, by preferment or otherwise, they shall, before they be permitted to quit the same, deposit in the hands of the Commanding Officer, or of the assistant military agent, all the effects of such deceased non-commissioned APPENDIX. 361 officers and soldiers, in order that the same may be secured for, and paid to, their respective representatives. Art. 96. All officers, conductors, gunners, matrosses, drivers, or other persons whatsoever, receiving pay or hire in the service of the artillery or corps of engineers of the United States, shall he governed by the aforesaid rules and articles, and shall be subject to be tried by courts-martial, in like manner with the officers and soldiers of the other troops in the service of the United States. Akt. 97. The officers and soldiers of any troops, whether militia or others, being mustered and in pay of the United States, shall, at all times and in all places, when joined, or acting in conjunction with the regular forces of the United States, be governed by these rules and articles of war, and shall be subject to be tried by courts-martial, in like manner with the officers and soldiers in the regular forces ; save only that such courts-martial shall be composed entirely of militia officers. Art. 98. All officers, serving by commission from the authority of any particular state, shall, on all detachments, courts-martial or other duty, wherein they may be employed in conjunction with the regular forces of the United States, take rank next after all officers of the like grade in said regular forces, notwithstanding the commissions of such militia or state officers may be elder than the commissions of the officers of the regular forces of the United States. Art. 99. All crimes not capital, and all disorders and neglects, which officers and soldiers may be guilty of, to the prejudice of good order and military discipline, though not mentioned in the foregoing articles of war, are to be taken cognizance of by a general or regimen- tal court-martial, according to the nature and degree of the oflfence, and be punished at their discretion. Art, 100. The President of the United States shall have power to prescribe the uniform of the army. Art. 101. The foregoing articles are to be read and published, once in every six months, to every garrison, regiment, troop or company, mustered, or to be mustered, in the service of the United States, and 852 APPENDIX are to be duly observed and obeyed by all officers and soldiers who are, or shall be, in said service. Sec. 2. jlnd be it further enacted^ That, in time of war, all persons, not citizens of, or owing allegiance to, the United States of America, who shall be found lurking as spies in or about the fortifications or encampments of the armies of the United States, or any of them, shall suffer death, according to the law and usage of nations, by sentence of a general court-martial. Sec. 3. jlnd be it further enacted ^ That the rules and regulations by which the armies of the United States have heretofore been governed, and the resolves of Congress, thereunto annexed and respecting the same, shall henceforth be void and of no eflfect, except so far as may relate to any transactions under them prior to the promulgation of this act, at the several posts and garrisons respectively occupied by any part of the army of the United States. [Approved, April 10, 1806.] RETURN TO the circulation desk of any University of California Library or to the NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY ' BIdg. 400, Richmond Field Station University of California Richmond, CA 94804-4698 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 2- month loans may be renewed by calling (510)642-6753 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books to NRLF Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date DUE AS STAMPED BELOW SEP 1 1 ffl'^ I 20,000(4/94) YB ivil75909 UBsof I . THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA UBRARY